Home

026-1102 - Emerson Climate Technologies

1. est 8 1 8 1 SUPERHEAT CONTROL LIQUID SIDE CONTROL 1 2 4 2 2100000000000000000000000000000000000000000 nennen nenne 8 1 6 2 TEMPERATURE ee subse Bere eie reto eoe dae E ette Eie E RESP Ee E EIER enda 8 1 8 3 VALVE CONTROL 5 edt EO PO RR E UR DR ORO RIPE FO PD RET P PEDES PAPE 8 2 8 4 DEFROST CONTROL 1 et esee Ie epe e aedem cete e b cR A testi 8 4 8 92 SYSTEM START UP irr ER OR EREMO EU PH HERD E OR ERU RD t DP ERE 8 4 8 6 SYSTEM RECOVERY MODE a a 8 4 8 4 FAN CONTROL c AERE E SO o EIFE E DOE rhe SEE E 8 5 8 9 EIGHT CONTROL ee TA et e Re e Nee TRE noi Ene eae ER eR EAE IAE UNSERE 8 5 8 9 WASH MODE inn nc rrr FER UR ERE ERIE DR PERRO PUR P EP FOIE REO UR ERO Ee DRE CE EPA 8 5 8 10 FAIL SAFE MODE LIQUID SIDE CONTROL 1 2 2 2 220 0000000000000000000000000000000000000050 8 6 8 10 1 Evaporator Control During Temperature Sensor Failure eese eene 6 6 9 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW e M 9 1 9 15 PID CONTROL RA e ERR tit 9 1 9 2 PROGRAMMING PID Chee DEEP PRI 9 1 9 3 HOW PID CONTROL OPERATES aine eet ree br t ede Ee UE oco ei
2. T PREV If the Sensor Type chosen in Section 11 5 1 Setup was set to IRLDS this version of the Sensor Setpoints screen will appear All other sensor types use the Sensor Setpoints screen as shown in Section 11 5 2 or Section 11 5 2 The Sensor Setpoints IRLDS Input screen allows users to calibrate an IRLDS input and to specify cut on and cut Off set points for the sensor control output The current DC voltage from the IRLDS output is shown in the Curr VDC field Beside this value is the Curr PPM value which will always be equal to the Curr VDC multiplied by the gain added to the offset Gain 999 999 250 The RMCC multiplies the actual DC voltage from the IRLDS with the number in the Gain field The gain neces 11 48 Sensor Control sary for proper IRLDS to RMCC communication 250 ppm V is entered by default If no adjustments to the gain are needed leave this value at 250 Offset 9999 9999 0 If the IRLDS s output is known to send a voltage that is higher or lower than it should be an offset may be speci fied The number of millivolts entered in the Offset field is added to the voltage received from the IRLDS times the gain The result of this addition is entered in the Curr PPM field Cut ON Cut OFF Setpoints 9990 9990 PPM 0 PPM The Cut ON and Cut OFF set points may be defined as specific PPM values The Cut ON set point is the PPM val
3. J00 Steps per Sec 10 Maximum Steps Open 250 gt 5 If the EEV is stepper valve the stepper functions may be configured in this screen Refer to Valve Types on Sec tion Valve Types for all recommended settings for case control valves Valve Type Bipolar Unipolar Users must specify whether the valve is unipolar or bi polar in the Valve Type field 11 4 39 Manual Defrost Refer to the description of Manual Defrost on Section 11 4 13 Manual Defrost RMCC I amp O Manual Hysteresis 0 255 The hysteresis value is the number of steps required by the valve to change direction When a stepper valve is clos ing and receives a command to open or when a valve is opening and receives a command to close the valve must continue to close or open for the number of steps equal to the valve s hysteresis value Steps per Second 1 100 The maximum steps per second rate of a stepper valve is defined in the Steps per Second field Maximum Steps 50 6553 The Maximum Steps value is the number of steps it takes for a stepper valve to travel from closed 096 to open 100 System Navigation 11 37 11 4 40 Logs Graphs Refer to the description of Logging and Graphing in Section 12 1 4 Standard Circuit Log 26 11 4 41 Refer to the description of the Summary screens on Section 11 4 56 Circuit Summary 11 4 42
4. Normal sensor operation may be bypassed with Sensor Alarm Overrides When the RMCC receives closure from the selected Alarm Override Input defined at the Input Def initions screens see Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions the associated sensor will not perform an alarm sequence and if desired will relay OFF to the controlled output The Alarm Override Input and override settings are defined at the Alarm Overrides screen Normal sensor operation is also manually bypassed at this screen No Selecting the Alarm Overrides command activates a sensor selection screen where users select the appropriate sensor number to be defined The selected sensor number is then displayed at the Alarm Overrides screen in the No field Digital Override Input 0 8 Normal sensor operation is bypassed when the RMCC receives closure from an Alarm Override Input defined at the Input Definitions screens Up to eight override inputs may be defined at the Input Definitions screens Section 14 2 Alarm Overrides To define sensor alarm set points and time delays enter the appropriate High and Low set points and time delays in the appropriate High and Low fields To generate an alarm when the control value exceeds the alarm set points define the set points in the Alarms fields To generate a notice when the control value exceeds the alarm set points define the set points in the Notices fields Sensor alarm set points may
5. REFLECS PROCESSOR BOARD 4800 19200 38400 N N b J Barg 26501045 Figure 4 11 Baud Rate Dip Switch Settings 4 14 1 Case Controllers If using case controllers the baud rate setting for COM A and D must be set to 19 200 since the baud rate for the case controller is hard coded at 19 200 Refer to Section 4 12 Baud Rate Dip Switches COM A and D only for more in formation 4 14 2 8lO Baud rate settings for the 8IO board are automatically adjusted by the board based on the baud rate setting of the RMCC The 8IO and ARTC can communicate at baud rates between 4800 and 38 400 baud 4 14 3 COMB The COM B baud rate is preset on the RMCC and 485 Alarm Panel dip switch S1 at 4800 baud since the 485 alarm panel can only communicate at 4800 baud RMCC I amp O Manual 4 14 4 COMC The COM C baud rate setting is established within the remote communications screens in the RMCC and is related to the speed of the modem being used at the store The RMCC can communicate at 300 1200 2400 and 9600 baud It is recommended that a baud rate of 9600 be used for remote communication ASE CONTROL COM A AND D BAUD RATE STANDARD CIRCUIT COM A AND D BAUD RATE 7 AND 8RO FC SWITCH 51 16 SWITCH 53 nui REFLECS PROCESSOR BOARD Figure 4 12 Baud Rate Dip
6. Name Type Eng Unit T PREV 4 NEXT gt SET DATA Selecting the Alarms command activates a sensor se lection screen where users select the appropriate sensor number to be defined The selected sensor number name RMCC I amp O Manual System Navigation 14 1 type and associated engineering unit are displayed at the Sensor Alarm Setpoints screen in the 4 Name Type and Eng Unit fields respectively Alarms Notices N one O pen C losed When control values are received by the RMCC from the specified sensors they may be compared to the user de fined High and Low alarm set points to determine if the RMCC should generate an alarm or notice A notice creates an entry in the RMCC Alarm Log and initiates no other sig nal An alarm is a high level warning that will appear in the RMCC Alarm Log and may be accompanied by a contact closure for on site operation of a bell light horn etc An alarm may also initiate an alarm dialout sequence and or the activation of the 485 Alarm Annunciator Panel Time Delays 0 240 minutes When the RMCC generates an alarm or a notice it must wait the specified time delay before activating the alarm se quence 14 5 Alarm Overrides J ce 59 OVERR DE SETPO NTS 1 ALARM No Digital Override nput Turn Sensor Relay OFF Type FF Duration Manual Override NORM Leave a Notice in Alarm Logs T PREV 4 NE T gt SET DATA
7. Sea RS 11 52 LET A Demand Set Points DR DI pP dte ree opui y rere rade 11 52 1128 lt ttt penam eeiam he tien eO NO 11 52 ISe Input Definiti nsiss ai E visa sales 11 53 1H 5 2 Output Definitions iie v Uie iM e d p edt RR ge aed ee eee eS 11 54 11 8 3 System Information ote resi eere ER ER EE aere rte pep de He ri ER 11 55 FISA Options iiie eR ERE SD EGRE QURE AERA ER davis Eoo neds VE quie Lees 11 56 1 8 5 System Information ree i rhe HR RH RR ER RR Ree ne 11 57 71 6 6 Send 10 485 Alarm P nel c ec c e a d e etes e b eye v o pen 11 57 11 947 System UNIS 5i in e ON GNE MU RES asad 11 58 11 6 6 Dialout Set p siio eee oe RU E REN E LSE 11 58 11 6 9 FoggingJSetup ue OD aO pn iae eben 11 59 11 8 10 Communications Setup i i iv e ER er ied dieit dea eive e ever 11 59 11 8 11 Modem Iitialization eoe etuer quiere der ir ageres 11 60 11 8 12 Transducer Offsets asus dir E ER RO TR EGER o RS E EO QUIE 11 61 LL813 Oil Pressure Transducer Offsets eet tre I Pet t trit peer gts 11 61 1 8 14 TransducerSSetupz iade at n eade estela A bier erepti 11 61 TLS AS Host Network ip
8. O MENU gt SET DATA After suction pressure groups are defined at the Pres sure Groups Setup screen see Section 11 2 6 Compressor Setup the compressors within each group are defined and or edited at the Group Setup screen use the down arrow to access the Group 2 3 and 4 setup screens Type CMP C omp V S or U nldr X Clear C Compressor stages are defined in the Type CMP fields A variable speed compressor V may be defined as the first stage in each compressor group An unloader U may be defined for any stage immediately following a compres sor stage Unused stages within a group should always be cleared X Run Time 0 Clear Runtime The Run Time field displays the total hours of operation for the selected compressor stage Oil Sens P ress N one N An Oil monitoring sensor is defined in the Oil Sens field If the compressor is equipped with an oil sensor it may be defined as either a pressure transducer or a contact If a pressure transducer is indicated the RMCC will termi nate compressor stages when the net oil pressure read by 11 2 8 Pressure Setup SETUP mp On During Defr During Reclaim Always Remain On Grp2 T PREV Grp3 gt SET DATA 11 6 Main Menu Each compressor group may contain a single variable speed compress
9. cud eR eee aet erbe ere 14 3 1258 SAEARMS EGER OR IRSE EE HERR RE SERRE NU SR EUER CRGO TORRE RUEDAS ERE tenian 14 4 15 HAND HELD TERMINAL SCREENS wisssscsssscssesssccscsnssesnsssonsssnsesessensvensevsncsvensendecesesdosdesasebscecdsseszesosssoassesaveess 15 1 15 1 LIQUID PULSE HHT SCREENS ii exerce Sends sac E ERU EN E eren Ree e ans d tUe tats 15 2 15 2 LIQUID STEPPER HHT SCREENS cccssscccceceesscecceceessaececcsesenececeseneseececeseasseeccecessaaeccecessaaeceececsaaececeeeesaeeeseeeeenees 15 4 RMCC 1 amp 0 Manual Table of Contents ix 15 3 CPC SUCTION STEPPER 5 005 4 seco e e oe 15 7 15 4 HUSSMANN SUCTION STEPPER HHT 5 6 00 0 0 202 0 0 000 00000000000 15 9 APPENDIX A ADVANCED PRESSURE CONTROL RMCT 2 10 cere eee eere ee een eee teen ee enne seen seta A 1 APPENDIX B SENSOR HARDWARE SOFTWARE SETUP 1 1 1 7 1 B 1 APPENDIX C PRESSURE VOLTAGE AND TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE CHARTS FOR ECLIPSE TRANSDUCERS amp CPC TEMP SENSORS oso rosse edes oaa bu eoo oo voe Ua eee eV no ep so ed eeu pe rob bU pU ND co e Uwe C 1 APPENDIX D SYSTEM NAVIGATION SCREEN G sssccssssssssssccesssccsssscccsssscscsscccsssccccsscecscsscecescc
10. ea ae ena ee 5 1 5 1 WAIRING SPECIFIGATIONS 2 533 rU ne E A EO 5 1 AND D WIRING tete edocet et tuit etate e 5 1 25 3 COM B WIRING ette EORR BERE EUR UR EIE E 5 1 3S4 COM CCWIRING oe epe tieni 5 2 2 29 BINCORG INVERTER WIRING 5 2 5 6 SENSOR AND TRANSDUCER WIRING scsssccscesssssecececssssceececeeseceecsensaeseeceeeasseseseessececesesaeeecesesaesececessaaeeeeceneseaeecs 5 3 5 7 POWER CONNECTION WIRING eere reete teneor eie aeree es eo see o eee iren rae uh 5 7 5 70 Power Transformers aq gi o E PER EET dee a Remus 5 7 5 7 1 1 Wiring the 16AI 8RO 4AO or 8 DOn ROA E E ertet trennen ersten nnns 5 8 5 71 2 Wiring th 8IO Board ueber tede ee a neve tr t eee edet ete 5 8 3 5 NEDLWORK SETTINGS uere deis eei datam eed ute uide deis e PUN DEST AGATESS IM EE eA deme RES AS t 9 61 DIp SWItC 6S c treo neat OV ERE OE fe tetra otic coat nhs etna a 5 8 1 2 LED Indicator Lights 5 9 FAIL SAFE AND RELAY DIP SWITCH SETTINGG ccccccccccesssssceceeesescecescsessecccesessecccecessaaeccecesssaeceecsessus
11. T PREV gt 5 O MENU The circuit Refrigeration Defrost and Master Liquid Line Solenoid outputs are configured at the Circuit Output Setup screen This screen will display only those outputs defined at the Circuit Setup screens and only applicable fields will be active 11 30 Circuit Defrost Control The RMCC uses this address to locate the selected sen sor Log Interval 00 00 00 24 00 00 The RMCC periodically records the values received from the defined sensors and stores the information in the RMCC Log The Logging Interval defines when the data received from the sensors are recorded Bypass 50 99 N one O pen C losed A fixed bypass may be assigned to the defined sensors in the Bypass field A fixed bypass will override the actual sensor reading with a user defined value until the bypass is deactivated at this screen Users may bypass the current sensor reading with a numerical value or with an open or closed status To activate the fixed bypass enter a numeri cal value or C losed in the Bypass field Sensor Type T emp 6 450 D igital T If the circuit has been configured with the default val ues for the type of case within the circuit the appropriate sensor type for the selected sensor will be displayed in the Sensor Type Users may change the sensor type to either a temperature sensor or a digital sensor by entering the ap propriat
12. ce 2 5 2 5 4855 2 5 20 HAND HELD TERMINAL E PTUS EE RETE VEEREC EAE VE CR 2 6 2 7 REMOTE COMMUNICATION ss te RR EU e 2 6 2 7 1 RS232 eese ge dee tete et eges 2 6 2 727 2 22723 UI CIAM ce 2 6 3 HARD WARE MOUNTING e 3 1 3 1 REFRIGERATION MONITOR AND CASE CONTROL cscssscscsesssscececesesssesecesesseaeececescasecececsauececcecesasseseeeseneseseeesentaeees 3 1 3 2 I O BOARDS AND ENCLOSURES detect eeetceee eee tec ER UE VR Rev UY 3 1 22 485 nere tono reel cabectos eu evi eee 3 4 3 4 RS232 BUS EDI EUR UTE ERE UR 3 5 35 3 5 3 0 PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS ier RAE IECUR AREE ERE RRE NER ES REESE EUER A E EG ENS 3 5 3 7 TEMPERATURE SENSORS e tes iut erteilt eto ipee de Edere 3 6 3 7 1 Outside Ambient Temperature Sensor eese eene teeth ettet nnen tenente ee terere tenen nent enne enne 3 6 3
13. THE SWITCH SETTING SHOWN CER 2 IS SPECIFICALLY FOR UNLOADERS N O 1 C THE SWITCH CLOSES THE RELAY 4 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION THE JUMP ER OPENS THE RELAY ON LOSS OF D POWER n c S2 FAILSAFE JUS 26501031 Figure 4 13 8RO Board Fail Safe Dip Switch and Jumper Settings The ARTC 8 and 8RO FC have a dip switch S2 which indicates the state of the relay NC or NO When the relay is set normally closed the appropriate LED relay indi cator one through eight is illuminated Dip switch rockers one through eight should be set to the up position if the relay is wired normally closed and down if the relay is wired nor mally open The REFLECS Networks 4 5 5 Communication and Power Connections This section describes how to wire the CPC refrigera tion control system Information is provided for the RE FLECS and all sensors alarm panels modems loads and output functions wiring schemes shown in this section conform to the requirements outlined in Section 5 1 Wiring Specifi cations 5 1 All CPC I O and host bus communication components COM A and D and COM B have been designed to con form to RS485 standards Remote communication compo nents COM C have been designed to conform to RS232 standards When wiring CPC components together it is necessary to follow the rules and requirements specified in this section
14. CABLE SHIELD 335 3151 DD a DISCHARGE AIR 1 CASE n CONTROLLER iL BLUE s 2 DISCHARGE AIR 2 G BLUE OHE 919 2 DISCHARGE AIR 3 RED GG G CREEN GREEN B 0 DISCHARGE AIR 4 G PURPLE PURPLE OKD So amau BLUEMHITE EP EXTRA TEMP 2 43 REDWHITE 210 ORANGE 5 e DEFROST TERMINATION 15 eR SUCTION VALVE OUTPUT OUS SUCTION VALVE OUTPUT RETURN RS485 Gg HE Gg BLACK C 09 26513018 Appendix F F 1 Index Numerics 16AI Analog Input Board defined 2 2 features 2 2 mounting in enclosure 3 1 mounting without enclosure 3 3 power requirements 5 7 software setup 11 63 485 Alarm Panel alarm filtering 11 57 14 3 defined 2 5 disabling alarm resets 11 57 features 2 5 location 3 4 mounting 3 4 power requirements 5 7 sending notices to 11 56 11 57 4 Analog Output Board defined 2 4 features 2 4 mounting in enclosure 3 1 mounting without enclosures 3 4 power requirements 5 7 software setup 11 63 8DO Digital Output Board definition 2 4 max number of boards 2 4 power requirements 5 7 software setup 11 63 8IO Combination Input Output Board Baud Rate Dip Switch Settings defined 2 4 features 2 4 Limitations on Transformer Wir ing 5 7 max number of boards 2 4 mounting in enclosure 3 1 mounting in weather resistant enclosure 3 2 mounting without enclosure 3 4 power requirements 5 7 software s
15. COIL 2 OUT DEFROST TERMINATION GO GO eg GO SUCTION VALVE OUTPUT SUCTION VALVE OUTPUT RETURN RS485 RS485 CABLE SHIELD 26513021 Figure 7 3 Input Cable Harness 335 3151 Schematic Diagram 7 6 2 Output Cables Full Output Cables CPC s case controller full output cable harness without connectors 335 3156 and with connectors 335 3158 are designed for use with either a pulse or stepper valve case controller The connector is constructed with 18 AWG col or coded wire with a 16 pin male end connector for con nection to the case controller The 335 3156 output cable is supplied with wire leads for connection to non CPC power modules while the 335 3158 cable is supplied with an 8 pin male end connector for connection to the CPC power RMCC I amp O Manual module The schematic diagrams for these cables are shown in Figure 7 4 and Figure 7 5 CASE CONTROLLER BLUE GREEN ORANGE BLACK BROWN BLACK RED BLACK PURPLE BLACK WHITE WHITE BLACK YELLOW PURPLE RED BLACK YELLOW PULSE VALVE 1 OR STEPPER MOTOR 1 PULSE VALVE 1 OR STEPPER MOTOR 2 LIGHTS CONTROL LIGHTS CONTROL RETURN FANS CONTROL FANS CONTROL RETURN DEFROST CONTROL DEFROST CONTROL RETURN ANTI SWEATS CONTROL ANTI SWEATS CONTROL RETURN 24 VAC 1 24 2 OPTIONAL VALVE
16. __ ESEN gt SET DATA _ 0 L NEXT gt SET DATA O MENU 0 0 gt SET DATA SYSTEM OPTIONS 12 00 MODEM INITIALIZATION STRING 12 00 DIL PRESSURE TRANDUCER OFFSETS 12 00 Host Net State ON 1 0 Bus State ON 12 00 Addi tional Delay After Defrost 000 m Curren 01 02 05 04 05 06 07 08 Number Offline D Number Offline 0 Notice on Defrost Timeout ATRFE OS O 1 8 2x08W 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 1234567890123456 Patterns Number to Copy gt 09 10 1i 12 13 1 15 15 RMCC 2 3 485A 1 8809 Power Fail Alarm Notice D Hayes 3 P P 24008A v42bis 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 1 GAIs Record NO Powcrup Self Test Y 11Multi tech 21 pip 96008A 42 16 1 18 19 20 21 23 AOs 2 P P 24005A 5 Generic 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 CCBS Total O Online 0 gt SET DATA _O MENU i J 0 T PREV L NEXT gt SET DATA SYSTEM INFORMATION 12 00 TRANSDUCER SETUP 12 00 Host Bus DEVICES 12 00 170 BOARD DEVICE NUMBERS 12 00 Send Notices to 485 Alarm DN Disch Pressure This Controller is Device 1 Disable Alarm Reset by 485 Alm N Sucti n Pressur Alarm If Another Device Fails N Number 8RO Boards MAX 16 NOW D Delay Before Alarm Dial Out 000 m Gri Gre GR3 GR4 Test Host Net for New Devices N DAYLIGHT SAVINGS MODE AUTOMATIC USA 100 lb 100 tb 100 Lb 100 Lb Number 16AI Boards Max 8 NOW 0 DST MANUAL SET START 04 05 92 Oil Pressure 200 lb Nu
17. ier T PREV gt SET DATA When the Demand Defrost feature is activated the RMCC will only activate defrost when a contact closure is received from the installed Demand Defrost sensors or when the system reaches the demand fail safe time For more information about the Demand Defrost feature see Section 3 Software Overview This feature is optional within the RMCC therefore default values will not apply to this screen Demand Sensors 0 2 The number of Demand Sensors installed within each circuit is defined in the Demand Sensors field If two De 11 4 21 Circuit Set Points 4 Dabok E CIRCUIT SETPOINTS Z1 Case Pump Down Delay Dual Tmp Alarm Set Point Shift Dual Temp Shift Input T PREV gt SET DATA Circuit settings for the Pump Down Delay and Dual Temp Case features are defined at the Circuit Set Points 4 screen Case Pump Down Delay 0 240 seconds 0 Defrost performance is improved by specifying a dura tion during which the system empties or pumps down re frigerant from the evaporator coil This procedure ensures that residual refrigerant in the coil will not work against the defrost cycle When the delay is activated within a Stan dard Circuit the refrigeration solenoid is closed for the de fined delay before the defrost cycle begins During this RMCC I amp O Manual mand Sensors are used the RMCC must receive
18. t tee et e e ies 9 9 9 9 12 Module Inputs and Outputs oe e E E ete ER Ee eee ueste te ae 9 9 9 9 2 RMCC VO Module Descriptions Lii wiih todas d esa Rebel edid e e E 9 9 9 92 T An log Input Module err en tere E eee ee t eee tien eee e eie e cade ERE 9 9 90 20 22 Digital Output Module ec 9 12 9 9 2 3 Analog Output Module nseni rer ten 9 14 10 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION GUIDE eee setatis tosta sessanta sensns theta ss so sesta tns en sens 10 1 GENERAL T 10 1 10 22 SETUP COMPRESSORS 5 ubere omoibus auper ende EP ae miii 10 1 10 3 SETUP CONDENSERS sri ee eei idein EG t n te dc rte yi bti ie 10 1 10 4 SETUP STANDARD CIRCUITS ertet E ER IRE eR GERIT Ute eee tiae 10 2 10 5 SETUP CASE CONTROL E E UE INE ESE 10 2 10 6 SETUP SENSORS oni RI eae eei adiutorem e bcp IRE 10 2 MOr 11 1 1121 tie CUP Ie ro te CERE E 11 2 MENU BU QOO BI ee e RN UNI E he 11 2 TTE Pressure Control iet e tt tette tetro eer e SEHR
19. Circuit SummbaEy a t Re RR PERLE 13 4 13 23 Anti Sweat Status eerte ettet teta tede aS i ades 13 4 13 3 4 Anti Sweat Dewpoint Status Screen eese SOSSE SE OEK 13 4 13 3 5 Anti Sweat Output Status iie vedere dee devon eve ee 13 5 13 4 CASE CONTROL STATUS reete bi EE e ER e E FU d eT 13 5 13 4 L Case Control Circuit Status c SE E a EN ee me 13 5 13 4 2 CCB Status 1 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only sese enne etre rennen rene 13 5 13 4 3 CCB Status 1 Suction Stepper Only ette etr ret ee EUR siete 13 6 13 4 4 CCB Status 2 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only esses 13 7 13 4 5 CCB Status 2 Suction Stepper Only e ee bere e ie ee o e bp etre Eye Dues 13 7 13 4 6 CCB Status 3 Liquid Pulse Only entente he ee i i radere 13 8 13 4 7 CCB Status 4 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only sese eese eerte trennen etre trennen rene 13 8 13 5 SENSORS 2t eR RINT 13 8 13 2 D SensorSStatls So SESE EEA EONS metn I 13 8 13 6 ALARMS reete or t e RR ODER RENI 13 9 75 26 Alarm Oyerride Status e et ERU I RN SUI IB He RR 13 9 13 7 oINPUT QUTPUT MODULES 5 eter Nee SEU EHE ERE RI Ee TO RARE VAR TS RSSEEPEEKFO FERRO ELE REPE EFE 13 9 13 72 Analog Input Mo
20. Valve Type Jumper JU5 Output Cable Connector Lights 12 VDC 170 Ma max Fan 12 VDC 170 Ma max Anti Sweat 12 VDC 170 Ma max Defrost 12 VDC 170 Ma max Pulse Valve 1 24 VAC 26502022 Figure 6 2 Stepper EEV Case Controller Full installation of the case control kit requires five standard components 1 Case Controller Applicable Temperature Sensors 2 3 Input Cable 4 Output Cable 5 Power Module Items 1 and 2 are supplied as a single kit The input and output cables must be ordered separately depending on the power modules being used Case Control Hardware Overview 6 1 Table 6 1 lists the different case controller types and their part numbers Table 6 2 lists the available input and output cable configurations and their part numbers Description Part Number Liquid Pulse EEV Case Controller Kit 810 3140 Liquid Pulse EEV Case Controller no sensors 810 3141 Liquid Stepper EEV Case Controller Kit 810 3150 Liquid Stepper EEV Case Controller no sen 810 3151 SOrS Suction Stepper EEPR Case Controller Kit 810 3152 Hussmann Suction Stepper EEPR Case Controller Hus 810 3153 smann no sensors Suction Stepper EEPR Case Controller Kit 810 3154 CPC Suction Stepper EEPR Case Controller CPC 810 3155 no sensors Second Valve Kit pulse only Includes 510 3130 Coil Inlet Temperature Sensor Blue Leads 501 1125 Coil Outlet Temperature Sensor Red Leads 501 1126
21. 12 00 12 00 STA Case Te Status Disch Disch Disch Disch A TUS 01801 01 mp NONE Setpoint On Last Term OPEN Valve Koo OPEN Humidity X OPEN Antisw X ir 12 00 25 0 0 0 30 0 NONE 100 0 ODMENU SETPOINTS CCB Asw Lo Limit Frost Sensor t PREV J NEXT gt Asw Hi Limit 060 0 204 01 SDIC O1c 12 00 Revision 6 0B2L CCB STA TUS CCB 015DIC 01c SHORT Fan Relay 0 0 Lights Off OPEN OPEN 12 00 On On O MENU ALARMS CCB Extra Imp YES Extra2 Tmp YES T PREV gt NO SET DATA O1 80IC 01c 12 00 Refr Leak NO Leak Alm Lvl 1000 Leak Alm Diy 010m Door Alm Delay 015m SET T PREV 4 NEXT OFFSETS 008 01 501 01 12 00 Case Offset Q D Extra 0 0 Discharge 1 0 0 Extra2 Tmp 0 0 Discharge 0 0 Refr Leak 0000 Discharge 0 0 Discharge 0 0 STPTS Valve Type Hysteresis Steps per Sec Maximum Steps Op 301 8DIC Olc 12 00 UniPolar Stepper 005 gt 100 en 2500 D 4 RMCC Front Panel Screens 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 SENSOR CONTROL 12 00 1 Status 5 Logs 2 Setup 6 Alarm Overrides 3 Setpoints 7 Status amp Shut off Sched 9 1 0 Control Modules SELECT NUMBER ENU SENSOR STATUS 12 00 SELECT
22. NOTE There is no additional setup NO if you select T PREV J NEXT gt SET DATA O MENU 11 4 25 Advanced Defrost Options Hot Gas e Es CIRCUIT SETUP ADVANCED DEFROST OPTIONS Host Compressor Group gt SET DATA O MENU Hussmann PROTOCOL Advanced Defrost set points for Advanced Hot Gas Defrost are defined at the Advanced Defrost Options screen If controlling with an Electric De frost System see Section 11 4 26 Advanced Defrost Op tions Electric Host Compressor Group 1 4 Group Number 0 Disable 0 The Host Compressor Group field ties a specific com pressor group to the circuit To define the compressor group enter the appropriate Compressor Group Number or Suction Group Number in the Host Compressor Group field Group numbers are defined at the Compressor Set up screen see Section 11 2 6 Compressor Setup Hot Gas Defrost Type S tandard R everse Cy cle S There are two types of Advanced Hot Gas Defrost Sys tems Users may choose from the following types RMCC I amp O Manual system settings with a user defined ON or OFF value until the bypass is deactivated at this screen Run Time 0 Clear Run Time 0 A real time clock within the RMCC records the cumu lative runtimes of each output The cumulative runtime is the total number of hours each output has been activated for the duration the RMCC has
23. exo NEU o RENE 26513034 Figure 5 2 COM B Network Connections Communication and Power Connections 5 1 Connect the three wire COM C network cable to the REFLECS controllers and modem as shown in Figure 5 3 TO POWER TOPHONEJACK N DB25 TO REFLECS CONTROLLER CABLE V PN 535 1015 REFLECS POWER INTERFACE BOARD TB1 RS485 TB2 RS485 TB3 RS232 A OV A COMA COMB SHIELD 26513047 Figure 5 3 COM C Network Connection 5 Fincor Inverter Wiring Fincor brand inverters may be used to power variable speed compressors The following sections show how to set up a Fincor inverter to work with REFLECS I O boards Wiring is as shown in Figure 5 4 The terminal strips shown in the bottom of Figure 5 4 diagram correspond to the terminal strips in the lower right corner of the inverter s control board Consult the Fincor user s manual for more information about these terminals RMCCB8RO RMCC8RO RMCC8RO 4AO OUTPUT EMERGENCY INV x RESET VS COMP x STOP N C RELAY N C RELAY N O 16AI INPUT JUMPER TERMINALS oe 69 9 INVALM IF E STOP IS NOT i5 TO BE USED e Lx X 3 DAOC a 7 DOOK X ANON EXTERNAL JUMPER FAULT 26513073 Figure 5 4 Fincor Inverter Control Wiring Fincor Inverter Wiring Procedure 1 E STOP Termi
24. Power Connection Wiring Center Center tapped tapped ano 459A 800 Center Center tapped tapped Table 5 2 Power Requirements 5 7 1 Transformers for powering the input and output boards should be wired according to Figure 5 7 and Figure 5 8 depending on the number and type of boards being pow ered Power Transformers To select a power transformer for a board or a series of boards 1 Determine what the total VA is for the boards that will be powered by the transformer EX Two 8105 18 0 VA each and one 4AO 10 0 VA boards are to be powered by one transformer 2 x 18VA 1 x I0VA 46VA 2 Usea transformer that has a power rating higher than the total calculated VA see Fig ure 5 6 EX Three board transformer 56 VA is suf ficient 56 VA is greater than 46 VA RMCC I amp O Manual Three Six Board Ten Board Board 640 0043 640 0045 640 0048 0048 ELM 56 100 VA LM VA Rating Figure 5 6 Power Ratings for CPC Transformers FOR 208 VAC POWER SOURCE 26513001 FOR 110 VAC POWER SOURCE Figure 5 7 Wiring for 640 0043 Three Board and 640 0045 Six Board Transformer Communication and Power Connections 5 7 PINOUT 24 VAC OUTPUT CENTER FOR 208 230 VAC POWER SOURCE 120 VAC 24 VAC OUTPUT CENTER FOR 120 VAC POWER SOURCE 26513002 Figure 5 8 Wiring for 640 0048 Ten Board Transformer 5 7 1 1 Wiring the 16Al 8RO 4AO
25. Supht 1 the superheat of coil 1 Setpt the superheat set point for coil 1 Valve 1 the current valve opening percentage Case dF the case temperature in degrees Fahrenheit Coil 1 In the coil 1 in temperature Offset the coil 1 in temp sensor offset This may be changed with the HHT Coil 1 Out the coil 1 out temperature Offset the coil 1 out temp sensor offset This may be changed with the HHT This screen is identical to Screen 3 except it applies to valve 2 and coil 2 if applicable This screen is identical to Screen 4 except it applies to valve 2 and coil 2 if applicable Defr When in defrost this field shows the number of minutes and seconds the circuit has been in defrost This number will be equal to the fail safe time when not in defrost Failsafe the maximum number of minutes and seconds defrost mode will remain active Term the termination temperature sensor reading Setpt the termination temperature set point Defr 1 Defr 4 the first four scheduled defrost times Defr 5 Defr 6 the fifth and sixth scheduled defrost times Drip When in drain mode this field shows the number of minutes and seconds the circuit has been draining This number will be equal to the set time when not in drip mode Set Time the amount of time moisture on the coil is allowed to drain after defrost 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Humidity the humidity sensor reading 1 the percentage at
26. To define the defrost termination strategy enter the let ter corresponding to the desired strategy in the Defrost Ter mination field Defrost Termination Type N ormal P ulsed The Termination Type is also defined in the Defrost Termination field This type determines the status of the system after defrost is terminated Users may choose from the following Termination Types N ormal the RMCC will return to normal refrig eration operation P ulsed the circuit will remain in defrost mode for the defined Defrost Duration If during this time a termination is called for by either the Stat Inl Dsch Out or Rtrn Termination strategies the RMCC will remain in defrost and pulse the defrost heat on and off in an effort to keep the termination temperature reading equal to the Termination Temperature Set point See Section 11 4 46 Circuit Set Points 1 Add Edit Circuit The Termination Temperature has a fixed 2 dead band value for case control circuits The RMCC will shut off defrost heat when the case temperature ex ceeds the Termination Temperature and reactivate if the temperature falls 2 below the Termination Temperature When the defrost duration is over the RMCC will prevent refrigerant from entering the coil for the du ration specified in the Drain Time field see Section 11 4 46 Circuit Set Points 1 Add Edit Circuit The RMCC will then return to normal refrigeration operation Valve Control Strate
27. 11 56 Configuration access to the RMCC A detailed description of each access level is given in Table 11 1 on Section 11 1 Log On To change the passwords enter the desired password in each password level field After a new password is defined it may be used to log into the system at the corresponding lev el access ation of a bell light horn etc An alarm may also initiate an alarm dialout sequence and or the activation of the 485 Alarm Annunciator Panel Record Logons Y es N o N The Record Logons feature configures the RMCC to record the password level of users logging into the control ler When Record Logons is activated the RMCC will send a notice to the RMCC Alarm Log each time a users logs onto the RMCC from the front panel or through a remote connection Included in the log entry is the date time and password level Powerup Self Test Y es N o Y Itis recommended that the CRC test be enabled to pro vide a method for ensuring that the controller operat ing program has not been corrupted A power up self test also called a Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC is a self diagnostic the controller performs during system startup This test validates that the program running in the REFLECS controller has not been corrupted The CRC test searches the entire operating program and validates that the current values are the same as were orig inally uploaded This test takes approximately one minute to compl
28. 800 The 16AL 8RO 4AO and 8DO all require the use of a center tap The number of boards that need power will de termine the transformer size that is required see Section 5 7 1 Power Transformers It is important that the trans former size match the board s power requirement Figure 5 9 diagrams the wiring for three 16AIs SROs 4AOs or 8DOs or any combination of the four board types These boards all use a center tap configuration for grounding 5 8 Power Connection Wiring 16AI 8RO 4AO 8DO POWER TRANSFORMER SECONDARY CENTERTAP ___ 16AI 8RO 4AO 8DO 8IO ARTC NON CENTER 0V terminal connected to Earth ground GROUND 26513093 Figure 5 9 Wiring for Three 16AIs SROs 4AOs or 8DOs or Any Combination of 5 7 1 2 Wiring the 8 Board The 8IO board can be wired for power in three different ways 1 By itself with one transformer for power Figure 5 10 2 Incombination with a or multiple 16AI 8RO or 8DO boards Figure 5 11 3 Ona 24 V AC line with the ground in the sys 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 tem on either side of the power line or with no ground in the system at all Figure 5 12 16AI 8RO 4A0 8DO POWER TRANSFORMER SECONDARY POWER TRANSFORMER SECONDARY EARTH GROUND 26513095 Figure 5 10 Single 810 Board Wired to One Transformer When the 8IO board is used by itself it is satisfactory to wire the board with
29. Digital Value Combiner DVCombiner The DVCombiner cell s function is to read up to four digital input signals combine these signals into one value based on the combination strategy and send the com bined value to the Schedif cell Two different combination strategies may be specified by the user a primary combination strategy and an alter nate combination strategy The primary combination strat egy will be used whenever the Alt Combiner input is LOW When the Alt Combiner input is HIGH the alternate com bination will be used If an alternate combination strategy is not desired only the primary combination strategy needs to be defined Schedule Interface Combiner Schedif The Schedif cell gives users a method of modifying the combined value of the Digital Inputs based upon the occu pied or unoccupied state of the building Using a user de fined strategy the Schedif cell combines the input value RMCC I amp O Manual from the DVCombiner cell with the Occup input The re sult is then sent to the Min On Off cell While the Schedif cell s function is similar to the DV Combiner cell s function their combination strategies are not similar The Schedif cell s combination strategies are specially made for occupancy driven control and are not as logic based as the DVCombiner strategies Two different combination strategies may be specified by the user a primary combination strategy and an alter nate combination
30. gt SET DATA 12 00 Electric Stat NORMAL Temp Temp Disch Air No CIRCUIT SETPOINTS 1 Drain Time 000 fist Defrost End Defrost Brd Defrost NONE 1 SDIC Otc befr Duration 000 Control Temp Fan amp ASW Off Terminate Temp 000 0 D R Weighting 4th Defrost Sth Defrost 6th Defrost gt 5 12 00 000 0 000 0 CIRCUIT SETPOINTS 1 Lights Strategy Pump Down Delay lanti Sweat Control Dual Temp Shift Input L7NEXT SDIC Shut Down 1f Suction Grp Fail Dual Tmp Alarm Set Point Shif 01 gt SET DATA CIRCUIT SETPOINTS 1 Demand Defrost Demand Fail safe Time Alarm Time FCIRCUIT SETPOINTS 1 Cleaning Override Switc Cleaning Switch Type Cleaning Notice Enabled T PREV L NEXT SDIC OFF 000 h 000 h h NO Sw No He rs rs gt SET DATA NE itched gt SET DATA 12 00 oooh Input Name Case Location Log Interval 00 00 0 Bypass Sensor Type Offset T PREV 1 0 CIRCUIT INPUTS SETUP SDIC 10c gt SET DATA 12 00 CIRCUIT OUTPUTS SETUP Output Name Location 00 00 Log Interval 00 00 Bypass Norm Time 00000m T PREV L NEXT 00 Dfr 00 00 00 00 Norm 00000 gt SET DATA 12 00 00 s ALARM SETPOINTS Case Temp ALARM Hi Alarm NONE Hi Delay 0000 Lo A
31. 550 2500 KW Transducer 16AI E 02 and 4 20 mA Output to Input Board 550 2550 Above Any LINE VOLTAGE Available Point INPUT GONNECTIONS oon 16AIs Below v RES EN E 02 Pulse YA EET Accumulator Must be Con m nected to Point 1 pu 8 Avail able Input Point ARTC AnAux BATI Input PHASE LOSS MEME Wire positive transducer terminal to positive 24VDC supply Wire negative transducer terminal to odd numbered input terminal Wire negative 24VDC supply to even numbered input terminal Place 2500 resistor across odd and even numbered input terminals Ue uec PE Set input dip switch down Pulse Accumulator Output to Input Board 1 Ifthe input board is an 8IO or a 16AI version E 02 or greater connect the two KWH terminals to the input point polarity insensitive 2 Ifthe input board is a 16AI version less than E 02 connect the KWH terminals to board point 1 Set input switch 1 DOWN and set network switch TO INPUT BOARD 318 UP 3 Setinput dip switch down 2 OW VOLTS PHASE LOSS 28513086 Table 5 1 Sensor Wiring 5 6 Sensor and Transducer Wiring 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 5 7 Power Requirements Each board used with the RMCC has specific power re quirements These requirements determine how many boards may be wired to each transformer Power require ments for each board on the RMCC network are listed in Table 5 2
32. Output number on IRLDS to even number on 16AI Common on IRLDS to odd num ber on 16AI NOTE Individual commons MUST be wired for each point Gain 1000 Offset 0 Alarm at 4960 mV Output number on IRLDS to even number on 16AI Common on IRLDS to odd num ber on 16AI NOTE Individual commons MUST be wired for each point Black to 12V on 16AI PWR Green to odd no on input GND Yellow and red to even no on in put SIG Red to 12V on 16AI PWR Black to odd no on input GND Green to even no on input SIG Gain 175 Offset 0 On 20 Off 30 Alarm 15 with delay of 30 minutes Appendix B 1 Voltage to Typical P N Sensor Type Settings 207 1000 Refrigerant Lev L inear Gain 20 Red to 12V on 16AI PWR el Transducer Offset 0 Black to odd no on input GND Hansen Probe Alarm 10 with Green to even no on input SIG delay of 30 minutes 508 2000 N A Alarm 150 with Two blk wires to ACI and AC2 delay of 30 minutes Two gray wires to input polarity insensitive 809 1550 Refrigerant Linear Gain 200 Red to 12V on 16AI PWR Xducer Offset 0 Black and Green to odd no on in Alarm 250 ppm put GND White to even no on input SIG NOTE A 16AI board may only power one Refrigerant Transduc er Multiple transducers may be on one 16AI if external power source is used 800 1100 Pressure Trans 1 00 Alarm at 20 lbs Red to 5V on 16AI PWR 800 1200 ducers Eclipse 2 00 or above set
33. Similar to the I O network loop the host network shown in Figure 4 2 also uses an open loop configuration The primary function of the Host Network Loop is to allow single or multiple REFLECS Controllers to be connected together to one common 485 Alarm Panel The Host Net work is always labeled as COM B on the REFLECS Input and output boards cannot be connected directly to the host network NETWORK WITH CPC PES RUE Dv ALARM PANEL HOST NETWORK COM B 26513040 Figure 4 2 RS485 Host Communication Network COM 4 3 RS232 Remote Communica tion Network COM C The RS232 Remote Communication Network connects single or multiple REFLECS Controllers to a modem to provide remote access using a remote communication soft ware package In some configurations an RS232 Bus Am plifier may be installed to improve transmission rates and The REFLECS Networks 4 1 overall data quality Like the host network input and out put boards cannot be connected directly to the remote com munication network Figure 4 3 shows a typical remote communication network layout REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK COM C 26513045 Figure 4 3 RS232 Remote Communication Network COM m 4 4 1 All CPC I O and host bus communication components COM A and D and COM B have been designed to con form to RS485 standards Remote communication compo nents COM C have
34. off or ON on Run Time The accumulated run time hours of each compressor are shown in the Run Time field This value may be cleared at the Group 1 4 Setup screens Oil Pres The net oil pressure oil pressure reading suction pres sure reading is displayed in the Oil Pres field H Power The horsepower rating of each compressor is displayed as defined at the Group 1 4 Setup screens Proof If a proof input is defined under Input Definitions Sec tion 11 8 1 Input Definitions the Proof field will display If the compressor proof contact remains open for an amount of time equal to the Proof Delay defined in Sec tion 11 2 3 Group 1 Pressure Alarms Setup the field will read FAIL System Navigation 13 11 14 Alarms 14 1 Alarm Set Points ALARM SETPO NTS Tmp1 i Alarm i Delay Lo Alarm Lo Delay gt 5 Alarms Notices 99 100 N one N Delays 0 999 0 Alarm Control within the RMCC includes the genera set points an alarm or notice will be generated A notice is a low level warning that creates an entry in the RMCC Alarm Log and initiates no other signal An alarm is a high level warning that will appear in the RMCC Alarm Log and may be accompanied by a contact closure for on site oper ation of a bell light horn etc An alarm may also initiate an alarm dialout sequence and or the activation of the 4
35. 9 1 9 2 94 1 Control Strategies tod ee ROS ERE ere eie per 9 2 94 11 t Normal PID cero deh eed Pe er Ende Deer tiae cedat ite 9 2 9 412 Fixed Steps ee De umen Il ai eg et E t te had 9 2 94 2 Variable Speed Compressors eee ote ir o tr e e e I OR ETE ERU RH HOS bag eet 9 2 9 421 Normal Strate By oio odere ette eee tent ne ee m He ie ire erede de 9 2 9 4 2 2 Alternate Strategy ciere etr he ete me oe erbe e gana 9 3 9492 Bloating Set eet lyon Bee ei eee denter 9 4 9 5 CONDENSER CONTROL te aca ae ipe oia ee PR HN 9 4 9545 Control StFate BIOS ei che tte ttt t suede t t ee ttn 9 4 9 5 1 1 Air ClooledCondensetsz shu et ete e be bt t n e e te d ete e bete al e ette 9 4 975 12 Evaporative COndensets eed e deeem oe gene dude ue nee 9 4 9 5 2 E A ar aa er E E e 9 4 9 5 2 T Sinple Speed eee ee Oe aree reete eo ir 9 5 Ewo Speed es riesce 9 5 9 5 2 31 Variabl Speed Fans enn e ERN ERU PIER 9 5 9 5 3 Operation During tiep ee Ide
36. Black Yellow Purple 14 White White White Red Table 7 4 Valve Cable Wire Colors 7 7 Power Modules ize The case controller power module measures 16 25 inches long by 3 inches wide by approximately 3 25 inches deep The base plate has one 0 218 inch mounting hole lo cated at each corner Power The case controller power module should be connected to a 120 VAC single phase power source Complete wiring of the case controller power module is diagrammed in Fig ure 7 7 Follow all local NEC and UL wiring practices 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 DEFROST HOT DEFROST HOT j DEFROST HOT DEFROST OUT DEFROST OUT DEFROST OUT ANTI SWEAT HOT ANTI SWEAT OUT FANS HOT FANS OUT NC or NO LIGHTS HOT 4 LIGHTS OUT NC or NO HOT LINE NEUTRAL OUTPUT CABLE EARTH GROUND 26513067 Figure 7 7 Case Controller and Defrost Power Module Wiring Schematic 7 8 7 8 1 Sensor Location Discharge Air Sensor Green Leads In general the discharge air sensor should be located in the air stream leaving the evaporator coil but just before the air stream enters the food compartment of the refriger ated display case 7 8 2 Coil Inlet Sensor Blue Leads Proper location of the coil inlet sensor is critical since valve control is dependent upon accurate measurement of changes to evaporator liquid temperature The coil inlet sensor should be located on
37. C3 2 1 Dad DOM Cen used in conjunction with a temperature sensor If the dew DEWPOINT HUMIDITY OFFSETS point cell or relative humidity sensor is known to read high Dewpoint Offset 000 or low offsets may be specified in the Dewpoint Offset and Humidity Offset 000 Humidity Offset fields to correctly calibrate the sensors Users may enter a value from 20 to 20 or from 20 to 20 T PREV lt gt SET RMCC I amp O Manual System Navigation 11 21 11 4 9 Anti Sweat Outputs Setup 2 ANTI SWEAT OUTPUTS SETUP ON OFF Interval 010 sec lt gt SET Heater zone names and the on off interval of the anti sweat circuit are set up in this screen 11 4 10 Anti Sweat Circuit Setpoints 9 CIRCUIT SETPOINTS ALL OFF ALL ON during ALL OFF ALL ON Anti sweat circuits are controlled by comparing a mea sured or calculated dewpoint value to a range of dewpoints defined in the Anti Sweat Circuit Setpoints screen See Section 3 5 Anti Sweat Control for a complete explana tion of anti sweat control 11 4 11 Anti Sweat Overrides ANTI SWEAT OVERRIDES Screen Override Name PREV lt gt SET Manual and external anti sweat heater bypasses configured at the Anti Sweat Overrides screen 11 22 Circuit Defrost Control Al
38. Circuit Set Points 2 The field will display either OPN open or CLSD closed Demand The current status of the Demand Defrost Input is dis played in the Demand field if a Demand Defrost Sensor is defined at the Circuit Set Points 3 screen see Section 11 4 20 Circuit Set Points 3 The field will display either ON or OFF The Circuit Statistics screen displays daily status infor mation for both the refrigeration and defrost outputs Cycl The total numbers of refrigeration and defrost cycles initiated during the past seven days are displayed in the Cycl fields Run The total runtimes of refrigeration and defrost cycles for the past seven days are displayed in the Run fields see Section 11 4 18 Circuit Set Points 1 through Section 11 4 21 Circuit Set Points 4 1 2 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11 4 5 Anti Sweat Control Menu tem Description Page BEC ANTI SWEAT CONTROL 1 Status 4 Daily Logs s asad 5 0verrides Daily Logs Set int SELECT NUMBER 11 4 6 Anti Sweat Status Menu 1 1 Description Page 2 0utput Status Output Status SELECT NUMBER 11 4 7 Anti Sweat Setup 2 0utput Setup SELECT NUMBER 11 4 8 Dewpoint Humidity Offsets Anti sweat circuits are controlled by dewpoint Dew point in an anti sweat circuit s area may be determined ei EE EE E ther by a dewpoint cell or by a relative humidity sensor
39. Fan Off Delay B sec Fast Rec Fan On Delay sec Fast Rec Fan Off Delay sec T PREV gt SET DATA O MENU Fan On Delay 0 3600 sec 30 sec Before the RMCC turns on a condenser fan it will wait a number of seconds equal to the Fan On Delay Enter the desired value in this field Fan Off Delay 0 3600 sec 30 sec Before the RMCC turns off a condenser fan it will wait a number of seconds equal to the Fan Off Delay Enter the desired value in this field Fast Rec Fan On Delay 0 3600 sec 6 sec When the condenser is switched from normal to fast re covery mode the RMCC will wait a number of seconds equal to the Fast Rec Fan On Delay before activating all condenser fans Enter the desired value in this field Fast Rec Fan Off Delay 0 3600 sec 6 sec When the condenser is switched from fast recovery to normal mode the RMCC will wait a number of seconds equal to the Fast Rec Fan Off Delay before returning the condenser to normal operation Enter the desired value in this field 11 3 5 2 Single Speed Setup Screen 2 CONDENSER SINGLE SPEED FAN SETUP 12 00 Split Enable Split Type NE Force Split in Reclaim Unsplit to Split Delay Equalize Runtimes T PREV gt SET DATA Split Enable Y ES N O N The Condenser Split feature allows the RMCC to re duce or expand the condensing capabilities of the con
40. Log Interval 00 00 00 Bypass Norm Run Time 00000m gt SET DATA CPC SUCTION STEPPER SCREENS STATUS CASE SET POINTS Case 01 01 Status On Temp 007 0 Term 000 0 ENT Next tk Circuit lt gt Board O MENU 12 00 SELECT ITEM 12 00 Circuit number 1 01 SDIC 01c Enter Item CIRCUIT 01 STATUS SDIC O1c 12 00 SELECT ITEM 12 00 01 Case Boards O1 cCB O1 Enter Item STATUS CCB O1SDIC O1c 12 00 Case Temp NONE Setpoint 25 0 Status on Last Term 0 0 bisch Air OPEN Valve X 30 0 Disch Air OPEN Humidity NONE Disch Air OPEN Antisw X 100 0 Disch Air 4 OPEN ENT Next lt gt t CCLRIE SETPOINTS CCBH O1 SDIC O1c 12 00 Revision 6 0B2L Sensitivity 004 Update Rate 006 Asw Hi Limit 060 0 Asw Lo Limit 40 0 Frost Sensor NO EV J NEXT SET DATA STATUS CCB O1SDIC O1c 12 00 Frost SHORT Refr Leak 0 0 Door Switch Off Extra 1 OPEN Extra 2 Tmp OPEN Fan Relay On Lights i On ALARMS CCB OT SDIC O1c 12 00 Refr Leak NO Leak Alm Lvl 1000 Leak Alm Dly 010m Extra YES Extra2 YES Door Alm Delay 015m 4 J NEXT gt SET DATA OFFSETS 8401 5010 01 12 00 Case Offset 0 0 Extra Imp 0 0 Discharge 1 0 0 Extra2 Tmp 0 0 bischarge 42 0 0 Refr Leak 0000 bischarge 43 0 0 Discharge 4 0 0 EV 4 NEXT gt SET DATA
41. Manual Override N ormal O n O ff Normal sensor operation may also be bypassed manu ally regardless of the Alarm Override Input status A man ual override is a fixed ON or OFF override and is activated in the Manual Override field To activate a manual over ride enter the desired override value in the Manual Over ride field The selected sensor will remain in override mode until the user returns to this field and enters Normal 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Leave a Notice in Alarm Logs Y es N o The RMCC will record the date and time of each over ride to the Alarm Log when Y is entered in the Leave Notice in Alarm Logs field 14 6 Alarm Override Status Sensor Name 1 LIQUID LEVEL 2 REFR LEAK 3 AMBIENT 4 5 T PREV The status of all defined Sensor Alarm Overrides displayed at the Alarm Override Status screen Alarm Override Inputs are defined at the Input Definitions screens see Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions and are assigned to a sensor at the Alarm Overrides screen see Section 14 5 Alarm Overrides Users may view the Sensor Name that contains the displayed override the associated Alarm Override Input assigned to the sensor the status of the override the type of override defined to the displayed sen sor and if currently in override mode the time remaining in the override duration 14 7 Send to 485 Alarm Panel remi SEND TO 485 ALARM PANEL YES CH
42. Pressing U begins the Update command The update command is similar to the Initialization command in that it scans the network for all boards connected to the circuit However the update command retains all information that has already been received and only brings in new informa tion S end Pressing S begins the Send command The RMCC monitors case controllers and updates its information with that of the case Therefore the set points at the case should match with the set points at the RMCC If these set points do not correspond to each other users may manually send the RMCC set points to the case controller by selecting the Send command Circuit Assignment After initialization of the boards the boards must be as signed to a circuit by entering the desired circuit number in the CKT field When the circuit is defined the circuit name and type are automatically displayed in the Ckt Name and Ckt Type fields The total number of cases defined to the circuit is displayed in the CCB field Set points defined for each Case Controller Board are backed up restored and copied at the Utilities screen Backup Activating the backup feature retrieves the current set points and setup configuration of one or all Case Control lers within the circuit This information is stored within the RMCC and may be restored to any case with the Restore feature To backup a Case Controller enter the ID Number of the case to be backed u
43. Solid State Relay 221 7000 75 VA Transformer 140 0050 Second Valve Kit without 75 VA Transformer 510 3125 Includes Discharge Air Sensor Green Leads 501 1122 Coil Inlet Temperature Sensor Blue Leads 501 1125 Coil Outlet Temperature Sensor Red Leads 501 1126 Includes Discharge Air Sensor Green Leads 501 1122 Table 6 1 Case Controller Part Numbers 6 2 2 Input and Output Cables CPC produces a single input cable harness and three different output cable harnesses depending on the power module or valve type being used The input cable harness 335 3151 is supplied with a connector for connection to the case controller and con nector ends which mate to the temperature sensors supplied with the case controllers The output cable harness may be any of three types The full output cable harness is supplied without connectors 335 3156 for connection to non CPC power modules or with connectors 335 3158 for connection to CPC power modules which are supplied with female connectors A third output cable harness 335 3159 is provided if a Sporlan suction stepper unipolar valve is being used 6 2 Hardware Description Table 6 2 lists the harness configurations and their part numbers Description Part Number Input Cable Includes coil in and coil out for 335 3151 one valve discharge air defrost termination suction valve and network I O communica tion Output Cable Includes lights fans ant
44. The and Name fields display the sensor number and the sensor name Status If the sensor is controlling an output and if the output board and point location is specified at the Output Defini tions screen see Section 11 8 2 Output Definitions the status of the controlled output either ON or OFF will be displayed in the Status field 13 6 Alarms 13 6 1 Alarm Override Status ALARM OVERRIDE STATUS Sensor Name d LIQUID LEVEL REFR LEAK r 0 0 AMBIENT 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 P T PREV The status of all defined Sensor Alarm Overrides displayed at the Alarm Override Status screen Alarm Override Inputs are defined at the Input Definitions screens see Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions and are assigned to a sensor at the Alarm Overrides screen see Section 14 5 Alarm Overrides Users may view the Sensor Name that contains the displayed override the associated Alarm Override Input assigned to the sensor the status of the override the type of override defined to the displayed sen 13 7 Input Output Modules 13 7 1 Analog Input Module Status 29 ANALOG INPUT MODULE Name INPUT 01 Command NONE NONE NONE NONE 1 STATUS Value Alarm Count Count Tripped NONE T PREV Notice NONE Users may view the real time status of an Analog Input Module s outputs in the Analog Input Module Status screen The Value and Count outputs will appear as a
45. The kW peak is displayed in the Peak field and the time of the occurrence is displayed in the Time field 12 1 8 Daily Demand Log The Daily Demand Log displays a summary of the kW usage during the previous 24 hour periods KW usage for up to 48 days may be logged in the Daily Demand Log The date and total kW hours used in the window during the 24 hour period are listed Peak The peak power is the highest value of kW measured by the kW transducer during a specified period of time Time The time of the occurrence of the peak power is dis played in the Time field Demand The Demand field displays the cumulative number of hours the RMCC was in demand during the specified 24 hours 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 12 2 Graphs 12 2 1 Graph Control Screen 12 00 ntimes ntimes SE ECT NU BE Users may view RMCC log data in graphical format from the Graphs screens The Graphs menu characterizes all system logs in six different categories e Suction Groups all logs related to pressure control including suction and discharge and compressor op eration but excluding compressor and fan runtimes see below e Sensors the input values for sensors 41 48 e Circuits all logs for refrigeration circuits 1 48 CCB all logs for case control boards e Comp Runtimes bar graph of runtimes for all de fined compressors e Fans Runtimes bar graph of runtimes for all de fined condenser fans O
46. boards that are the same type are numbered together For example if a segment contains four 16AI boards and five 8RO boards the 16AIs are num one two three and four and the 8ROs are numbered one two three four and five Figure 4 9 provides a graph ic representation of board numbering Actual dip switch and rotary dial setup is described fully in Section 5 8 1 1 Dip Switches BOARD NUMBER BOARD TYPE 3 4 16AI 8RO 4 5 80 A NETWOR COM D NETWOR 26501054 Figure 4 9 Network Device Numbering 12 Baud Hate Dip Switches COM A and D only networks COM A B C D have specific baud rate requirements however only COM A and COM D require manual setting of the baud rate dip switch Currently the baud rate dip switch in network components may be set at either 4800 9600 19 200 and 38 400 Setting of the baud rate is accomplished using switch S1 on the REFLECS pro cessor board the RS485 alarm panel board and 4AO 8RO and 8RO FC output boards and switch 53 on the 16AT in put board The COM B baud rate is preset on the REFLECS and 485 Alarm Panel dip switch S1 at 4800 The 8IO board automatically adjusts to the required baud rate Actual baud 4 4 Network Dip Switches and Rotary Dials COM A and D only rate setup is described fully in Section 4 14 Baud Rate Settings 4 13 Network Settings For all boards except 8I
47. how to wire both kinds of liquid level sensors to a 16AI 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 When setting up the probe in the RMCC system soft ware specify the probe as a linear sensor with a gain of 20 and an offset of zero See Section 7 6 2 Setup and Section 7 6 4 Set Points for Linear sensor types only for specif ic software setup instructions 3 9 Leak Detectors CPC supplies both a refrigerant transducer 809 1550 and Checkit refrigeration system monitor 508 2000 for monitoring refrigerant leaks Each is installed by the refrig eration and equipment manufacturer If a replacement transducer or Checkit must be installed in the field com plete installation and operation instructions are available in either 026 1302 Refrigerant Transducer Installation and Operation Manual or 026 1303 Checkit Refrigeration System Monitor Installation and Operation Manual 3 10 Power Monitoring The current transformer watt hour transducer and transducer power supply are all required to perform power monitoring CPC uses standard off the shelf configurations of each of these products Installation instructions supplied with the units should be used for both the watt hour trans ducer and the transducer power supply A single current transformer should be located on each phase of the incom ing power supply of the motor room 3 11 Transformers Transformers are required for all input and output com munication boards and case controllers
48. level the RMCC will turn off all heat producing loads in cluding the fans and the anti sweat heaters This level is de fined in the Fan amp ASW Off field The 99 default value disables this feature Terminate Temp 99 994 The Termination Temperature set point is the tempera ture at which defrost should terminate if a certain strategy is chosen D R Weighting 0 100 0 If the Mixed Air strategy is chosen as the Circuit Tem perature Control strategy at the Circuit Setup 2 screen see Section 11 4 45 Circuit Setup 2 Add Edit Circuit the discharge to return air percentage is defined in the D R Weighting field Enter in the D R Weighting field the per centage of Discharge Air to be mixed with the remaining percentage of Return Air 1st 6th Defrost Circuit Defrost Times 00 00 23 59 RMCC software version 1 05 will not allow defrost to begin within 60 minutes after the conclusion of the previous defrost event Circuit defrost start times are established in the 1st 6th Defrost fields Defrost begins within the selected circuit at the times defined in these fields Up to six defrost times may be defined for each circuit When programming defrost start times note that the RMCC will allow overlapping of defrost times within cir cuits Overlapping defrost times may not be appropriate especially when running hot gas defrost systems 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11 4 47 Circuit Set Points 2 Add Edit Circui
49. ulating a sensor value or providing a control command to a physical relay are grouped together within a Module A module may be used alone or combined with other mod ules Unlike cells modules may be connected in many dif ferent ways depending on the needs of the user Figure 9 8 provides an example of the relationship be tween set points cells and modules Set points such as the limiting cut in and cut out set points shown are or ganized into cells These cells use their set points along with the cell s inputs to perform certain functions that gen erate output values These cells along with other cells fit into the fixed structure of a module where each cells func tions work together The module may then be connected via its inputs and outputs to other sensors output devices and I O modules in a variety of control applications 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 SET POINTS Occ Cut In 30 Occ Cut Out 20 High Limit 2 150 Low Limit 0 Unoc Cut In 25 Unoc Cut Out 15 v ae CELLS Limiter Cut In Cut Out High Limit 150 Occ Cut In 30 Low Limit 0 Occ Cut Out 20 Unoc Cut In 25 Unoc Cut Out 15 V MODULES Analog Input Module AVCombiner Inputs Alt Comb Override Limiter gt Filter Counter S
50. 11 2 TI 2 2 Bypass aoa a EE etre e RS Pe s e EY USERS UM UE E UE OERS 11 3 41 23 Group I Pressure Al rmsSetup i usc Rot A Hove tatu ed ese eodd 11 3 11 2 4 Pressure Alarms Notices Setup esee E EE a E EEK EEEE ET EEE EEE oan OE aS 11 5 11 23 CHECKIE Sensor Setup eia oH WEN bae ttg n RI ERREUR 11 5 11 26 Compressor Setup ais isa e t ert 11 5 TIAS Group T SCLup ios fic cares egere ee qp e nec 11 6 11 26 Pressure Setup nnen ege ete eet ee e Re trees 11 6 74 29 TWO Stage System Setup SE ette tte Pre Ee dee 11 7 11 2 10 Group 1 Pressure Set Points esee nni iet ee e e rb e pepe esce Ide eee dores 11 7 TE2 M Group 1 Variable S peed Set Points set eee rete me rr ee 11 8 11 2 12 Group 1 Floating Suction eei ise eee detiene pine lettere hee lace iae dere eoe bd eese ees 11 9 11 20137 Group T Strategy Setup aie ee e UR PUER e EPIRI be ett da 11 9 11 35 CONDENSER CONTROL RE E COR GN RITU tI IER 11 10 ALS UL Condens r Setups asso er dH t so ter RP RU St 11 10 11 3 2 Condenser Pressure Inputs Setup Air Cooled amp Temp Diff Strategies Only cesse 11 11 11 3 3 Condenser Evaporative Inputs Setup eese eee nene ener nhe entretenir tre enne 11 12 11 3 4 Condenser Fan Delays Setup Jessie tiber ete ie ee Ue teure Seg va crecen e 11 12
51. 11 2 6 Compressor Setup PRESSURE GROUPS SETUP Name Name Name Name Comps Comps Comps Comps gt 5 The RMCC is capable of simultaneously controlling up to four compressor groups with a total of 16 compressor RMCC I amp O Manual cates abnormal system conditions An alarm is always sent to the RS485 Alarm Panel and to the Alarm Log A notice is a low level warning that also indicates abnormal system conditions A notice is sent to the Alarm Log and may be sent to the 485 Alarm Panel if the RMCC is configured to do so To specify which type of alarm is to be generated when alarm conditions are met select the desired alarm type for each suction group at the Pressure Alarms Notices Setup screen Different alarm types may be selected for different groups as well as for different types of alarm conditions The Pump Down alarm feature defined at the Pressure Alarms Setup screen see Section 11 2 3 Group 1 Pressure Alarms Setup may also be disabled at this screen uid levels within the system The RMCC may be configured to generate an alarm and or a notice when the measured Checkit temperature rises to a defined value The value at which an alarm will be generated is de fined in the Alarm Setpoint field The value at which a no tice will be generated is defined in the Notice Setpoint field Delays are defined for
52. 11 4 20 Circuit Set Poinis 3 iie petere eer RR ERE Rede apt 11 29 1154221 Circuit Set Points F CO ERO TIE OR Ute ERR EE CE c Vd 11 29 11 4 22 Circuit Inputs Setup ise te om tH tet re te RR Pe ORE Ee eee s 11 30 11 423 Circuit Output Setup ee eee e aa i ees Ha eta ore ed discos ai pest t e tes 11 30 11 4 24 Advanced Defrost rira egeat ee rto almo oper ei re egeta 11 31 11 4 25 Advanced Defrost Options Hot Gas erret rennen entente nennen 11 31 11 4 26 Advanced Defrost Options Electric eere n enne trennen tenens 11 32 14 4 27 C se Controls sine aae A eU Re ECRIRE BEER ERA ioe 11 32 11 4 28 Circuit Set Points 5 neu eae pedea e rte mH OH OO RT Ree 11 32 11 4 29 CCB Set Point Screen 1 Liquid Pulse and Stepper 11 33 11 4 30 CCB Set Points Screen 1 CPC Suction Stepper 11 33 11 4 31 Set Points Screen 1 Hussmann Suction Stepper Only eese 11 34 11 4 32 Set Point Screen 2 Liquid Pulse and Stepper 1 11 34 11 4 33 Set Points Screen 2 Suction Stepper Only esses nennen enne 11 35 11 4 34 Set Point Screen 3 Liquid Pulse and Stepper 11 36 11 4 35 CCB Set Points Screen 3 Suction Stepper 1 eene nennen enne neen nennen 11 36 11 4 36 CCB Set Point Screen 4 Liquid
53. 16 Unoccupied Setpoint 9 15 9 16 output when in failure 9 16 overriding 9 16 PWM pulse width modula tion 9 17 defined 9 8 Digital Output Module 9 12 9 14 cells 9 13 Counter 9 14 Digital Value Combiner Minimum On Off 9 13 One Shot 9 13 Override 9 13 Proof 9 14 Schedule Interface 9 13 Select 9 14 inputs 9 12 Alt Combiner 9 13 Alt Schedule 9 13 Digital Inputs 9 12 Index 1 4 Occupied 9 13 Proof 9 13 9 14 Reset Count 9 12 9 14 Suspend Count 9 12 9 14 Use Alternate Logic Combination 9 13 modules inputs and outputs 9 9 Input Definitions 11 53 Inverter condenser fan reset count 11 16 reset delay 11 16 Fincor wiring 5 2 IRLDS hardware software settings B 1 J Jumpers Fail Safe Settings on 8RO 4 5 fail safe settings on 8RO 5 11 lights and fans on case controller 7 2 Terminating Resistance Settings 4 3 4 5 terminating resistance settings 5 12 valve type on case controller 7 2 L LED Indicator Lights 4 5 5 11 Legs See Wiring Legs and Segments Liquid Line Solenoid control of 9 6 Logging On 11 2 Logs anti sweat 12 1 CCB Logging Times 12 2 daily demand 12 2 hourly 11 59 hourly demand 12 2 logging setup 11 59 pressure control 12 1 sensor 12 2 standard circuit 12 1 Low Pressure Hysteresis Cutoff Set point Removed from Con denser Setpoints Screen 2 11 17 Manual Defrost standard circuits 11 23 Modems initialization strings 11 60 parity data bits 11 60 set
54. 17 Circuit Setup 2 the Control Temperature is the temperature that should be maintained within the circuit Degree units are deter mined by the unit selected at the System Units screen see Section 11 8 7 System Units System Navigation 11 27 Drain Time 0 240 minutes 0 Immediately following defrost an unacceptable amount of moisture may still be present on the evaporator coils When refrigeration begins this moisture may freeze and reduce system performance Dead Band 0 10 0 A dead band may be established around the Control Temperature and the Terminate Temperature set points The dead band is a value equally above and below the Con trol Temperature set point within which the temperature level is considered to be acceptable Establishing a dead band helps alleviate short cycling of the case expansion valves during refrigeration and for certain types of defrost alleviates short cycling of the defrost heat Terminate Temp 99 99 0 The Termination Temperature set point is the tempera ture at which defrost should terminate if Temp is chosen as the Defrost Termination Strategy at the Circuit Setup 2 11 4 19 Circuit Set Points 2 Eo E Selected circuits are overridden OFF for cleaning pur poses based on the configuration defined at the Circuit Set Points 2 screen This feature is optional within the RMCC therefore default values will not apply to this screen Cleaning Override Switch N
55. 2 6 Com pressor Setup Contr by T emperature P ressure P Select Temperature or P ressure to determine the method by which the RMCC will control the suction group in the Contr by field Setpoint 999 999 22 0 The Suction Pressure set point establishes the pressure or temperature the compressors within the suction group will maintain during normal operation Deadband 0 99 0 2 The dead band is the value equally above and below the set point within which the pressure or temperature level is considered to be acceptable This value should be based on the suction set point to reduce short cycling of the com pressors Delays Changing the compressor delays affects how quickly changes determined by the PID algorithm are used to control the compressors and unloaders It is recom mended that the delays be set to the default values 3 and 3 for the compressor and 5 and 5 for the unload er Time delays are specified measurements of time the RMCC must wait before activating or deactivating system components when a command is received for activation or deactivation System Navigation 11 7 Comp 0 240 seconds 3 The Comp Delay is the duration in seconds the compressors will remain off or continue to run when command is received from the RMCC Unldr 0 240 seconds 5 The Unldr Delay is the duration in seconds the unloader will delay before turning on or turning off de pend
56. 5 7 Standard circuit systems control by dewpoint only however this may be supplied either by a dewpoint probe or by an automatic calculation from tem perature and relative humidity sensor values The circuit s dewpoint temperature is compared to two user defined val ues the Off and On values If the circuit s dewpoint is lower than the Off set point all the anti sweat heaters will remain off If the cir cuit s dewpoint is higher than the On set point all the anti sweat heaters will be 100 on If the dewpoint falls between the Off and On set points the anti sweat heaters will pulse on and off for a percentage of a user de fined time window 1 999 seconds The percentage of time in which the heaters will be on depends upon where the circuit s dewpoint falls between the range of dewpoints formed by the Off and On set points The percent age is figured by using the following equation Figure 9 7 illustrates the operation of an anti sweat cir cuit with a time window of 10 seconds an All Off dewpoint of 20 F and an On dewpoint of 70 F If a dewpoint of 45 F is measured in the circuit the anti sweat heaters will operate at 5096 This is because the 45 F dewpoint is direct ly between the On and Off set point The heaters therefore will be on for five seconds and off for five sec onds A measured dewpoint of 30 F will result in the heat ers being on 20 of the time TALL
57. 50 however would open only half of that distance at the end of the control loop from 50 to 5596 Similarly an EEV with a valve filter value of 25 would open to 52 596 from 50 to 60 an EEV with a valve filter rating of 100 Type Default Min Max Description Value Case Temp From a a a Method of calculating case temperature disch Air return air mixed Mix Dsch 0 100 The weight given to the discharge air if mixed is selected Dead band 0 1 F 10 0 F Dead band around case temp set point Case Case Offset 99 F 99 F 99 F Varies a Varies a single case temp from the circuit case temp set point case temp Varies a single case temp from the circuit case temp set point the circuit case temp set point E Rate Set point EM 255 Determines how fast the valve will close when the case tem perature set point is reached Valve Filter 10096 0 100 Reduces the valve opening value supplied by the PID algo rithm Table 8 2 Liquid Side Temperature Control Parameters Suction Side Control controlled The case temperature is being monitored and the suction valve percentage is controlled via a suction al gorithm to maintain the set point The suction side param eters are shown in Table 8 3 The case controller controls case temperature from the suction side of the evaporator by controlling the valve opening percentage of the suction valve to regulate the suc tion pressure In suction side cont
58. 7 2 Refrigeration System Temperature Probes Sensors eee eene ener nennen nene 3 6 3 8 PUD EVEL SENSORS sU ERE ETUR EY GU ER RERO Te ER ERE A EE KE EET ERE 3 6 3 9 iere tec Eco e ven eive rie cere cv eec vies terres 3 7 3 10 POWER MONITORING a yn sete loves snl ck petite pe a e RE EXER Ne Ux 3 7 3 11 ZTRANSFORMERS etit nene 3 7 4 THE REFLECS eei coo aorta eoo datar to bas ee sonia boe apos Ia panini ena ea Dua osos sona deoa a enun ten eios aes us eoe snos pn 4 1 41 RS485 INPUT OUTPUT I O NETWORK COM AND 000200000000000000000000000000000000000 enn nennen 4 1 4 2 RS485 HOST n e deed eed ee eec ees 4 1 4 3 RS232 REMOTE COMMUNICATION NETWORK 4 1 AAs WIRING 2 diee ie pter EE bed 4 2 4 2 4 5 EBGS AND SEGMENTS te dee 4 2 4 6 LEG AND SEGMENT WIRE LENGTH ccsssssssccossssccccessnsncccecensnneccececenneesccecenneeecesceeneeecescesseeseesesssseeesescsenseesecesenee 4 2 4 7 NUMBER OF DEVICES PER SEGMENT ccccsssscccesesss
59. 75 40 0 When the Anti Sweat feature is activated in the selected circuit at the Circuit Setpoints 2 screen see Section 11 4 47 Circuit Set Points 2 Add Edit Circuit the anti sweat heater range for each case is defined in the Asw Hi and Lo Limit fields If the humidity is higher than the ASW Hi Limit the anti sweat heaters will remain on at all times If the humidity is lower than the Asw Lo Limit the anti sweat heaters will remain off at all times Between these set points the anti sweat heaters will cycle in a six second win dow according to the humidity level Frost Sensor Y es N o N If a Demand Defrost Sensor is installed at the selected case enter Y es in the Frost Sensor field Demand Defrost set points may then be defined at the Circuit Setpoints 3 screen see Section 11 4 48 Circuit Set Points 3 Add Edit Circuit 11 4 31 CCB Set Points Screen 1 Hussmann Suction Stepper Only CCB SETPOINTS CCB 01 SDIC O1c Revision 6 Asw Hi Limit Asw Lo Limit Frost Sensor T PREV J NEXT gt 5 Asw Hi Limit 25 100 60 0 Asw Lo Limit 0 75 40 0 When the Anti Sweat feature is activated in the selected circuit at the Circuit Setpoints 2 screen see Section 11 4 47 Circuit Set Points 2 Add Edit Circuit the anti sweat heater range for each case is defined in the Asw Hi and Lo Limit fields If the humidity is higher
60. 8 1 put Definitions Sensor Open An open circuit has been detected at a sensor input connection SENSO1 SENS48 see Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions Table 14 1 RMCC Alarm Log Notice and Alarm Messages RMCC I amp O Manual System Navigation 14 7 15 Hand Held Terminal Screens The operational status and settings of a Case Control Board may be viewed or changed by using a CPC hand held terminal HHT When an HHT is plugged into a CCB users may access a series of screens that display de frost anti sweat case light override door switch and valve status information Certain control parameters such as offsets set points and dead bands may also be changed in these screens The HHT may also be used to initiate manual defrost overrides and to manually bypass case lights The UP and DOWN keys on the HHT keypad are used to scroll through the screens The DOWN key scrolls for ward through the screens and the UP key scrolls backward The screens wrap around therefore users may jump from RMCC 1 amp 0 Manual the last screen to the first screen by pressing DOWN or from the first screen to the last screen by pressing UP Some screens will have fields that may be changed us ing the HHT To change the value in a field press the RIGHT arrow key A cursor will appear in the screen next to the first changeable field in the display Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired field and ent
61. AC Power Input Connection Network Connection LED Power Indicator Termination Resistance Jumpers Address and Baud Rate Dip Switch Fail Safe Dip Switch Output Connection 8 places Relay Fuses 8 places LED Relay Indicators 8 places 26501017 Figure 2 5 SRO FC Relay Output Board with Form C Contacts Hardware Overview 2 3 2 3 3 4 Analog Output Board Three 4AOs may be connected to an through the RS485 COM A and D networks The 4 Analog Output Board Figure 2 6 is config ured with four analog output connections that provide a variable voltage signal to any of four variable speed devic es that may be controlled by a single REFLECS L LJ 4 2 eg DOO AC Power Input Connection I O Network Connection LED Power Indicator Terminating Resistance Jumpers Address and Baud Rate Dip Switch Analog Outputs 4 places Divider Circuits 4 places Figure 2 6 4 Analog Output Board 2 3 4 8DO Digital Output Board Up to two 8DOs may be connected to an RMCC through the RS485 COM A and D networks The 8DO digital output board Figure 2 7 is similar to the SRO board except that instead of a relay that closes on and off each output generates either a high 12VDC or low OVDC signal The 8DO has eight outputs which may pulse up to 150mA at 12VDC The 8DO s primary func tions are to control anti sweat heaters 2 4 Sp
62. Alarm Panel is not con nected to the RMCC through the COM B Host Net work The host network is by default not active within the If one or more RMCCs are connected to a 485 Alarm Panel then the host network should be reset ON at the Reset screen 1 Off 2 Reset On 1 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 To reset the host network ON within the current RM CC select 2 for Reset ON at the Reset screen 11 8 19 Host Inputs K J 7 8 HOST NETWORK 12 00 Send all CCB Leak Detector Input data on the Host Bus N 11 8 20 1 Board Setup 1 0 BOARD MENU 1 ONLINE Status 2 Set Device s 3 Reset Each CCB has a single input that may be connected to a leak detector If desired CCBs can send data from the leak detectors to the RMCC over the Host Bus Network To enable this feature enter a Y in this field Tem Description ase 11 8 21 Set Device Numbers 1 0 BOARD DEVICE NUMBERS Number 8 0 Boards MAX Number 16AI Boards MAX Number Boards MAX Number 8 0 Boards MAX T PREV gt 5 Each RMCC supports up to 16 8 Boards up to eight 16AI Boards up to three 4AO Boards and up to two 8DO Boards To define the number of boards connected to the RMCC enter this number in the corresponding fields at the Set Device Numbers screen Defining these numbers al RMCC I amp O Manual lows the RMCC to calculate the number of boa
63. Circuit lt The first Case Controlled Circuit Status screen displays the current number of CCBs within the circuit the selected case number the current case status the current case tem perature and the last recorded termination temperature Case Boards The number of CCBs within the selected circuit is dis played in the Case Boards field Case The assigned case number of the selected case is dis played in the Case field The number lists first the circuit number followed by the case number Status The status of the selected board is displayed in the Sta tus field One of the following conditions will be displayed e On selected board is calling for a stage of re frigeration e Off the selected board is not calling for a stage of refrigeration RMCC I amp O Manual dewpoint value to the anti sweat set points and pulsing the heaters on and off for a percentage of the on off interval defined in Section 11 4 9 Anti Sweat Outputs Setup The fields in the Anti Sweat Status Screen show the current sta tus of the pulse either ON or OFF and the time remaining before the next status switch For example if a heater is operating at 5096 during an interval of four seconds the Status field for that heater will show ON for two seconds and OFF for two seconds Every time the Status field changes the Time Left field will reset to two seconds and count down to zero If a heater is being overridden ON
64. DOWN arrow key scrolls through the daily logs in reverse chronological order pressing the UP arrow key scrolls through the daily logs in chronological order The average daily ON time percentage for the anti sweat circuit is shown in the ON field Max Min DP The highest and lowest daily dewpoint values for the anti sweat circuit is shown in the Max Min DP fields 12 1 4 Standard Circuit Log fa ce 99 IT LO S 00 DFJ 01 TR The RMCC continuously logs circuit information ac cording to circuit input and output logging intervals and stores the information in the Standard Circuit Log This log and all options for generating graphs from the logged infor mation is displayed at the Logs Graphs screen When 9 Graph is selected the logging information is displayed in graphical form For information on navigating through and using the graph screens in the RMCC see Section 12 2 Graphs System Navigation 12 1 12 1 5 CCB Log Interval 015 The RMCC periodically records sensor readings and stores the information in the CCB Logs for each sensor The Logging Interval defines how often the data for each sensor are recorded The interval range is between 0 and 99 99 99 and is entered at the CCB Logging Times screen There is a limited amount of memory for logging there fore the smaller the logging interval the faster the logs will be overwritten The
65. ITEM 12 00 SELECT ITEM 12 00 SELECT ITEM 12 00 SELECT 12 00 ALARM OVERRIDE STATUS 12 00 SHUT OFF SCHEDULE 12 00 ANALOG INPUT MODULE 1 STATUS 12 00 Name Status Value CI co 01 SENSO 06 SENSO6 SENSO1 01 SENSO1 06 SENSO6 01 SENSO1 06 SENSO6 Sensor Name Ovrd St_ Type Time SHUT OFF TIME Name INPUT 01 0 LIQUID LEVEL OFF OPEN o 0 02 SENSO2 07 SENSO SENSO 02 SENSO 07 SENSO 02 SENSO2 07 SENSO 1 LIQUID LEVEL oO OFF FIX 00 00 FROM UNTIL Command NONE P LEAK OFF 004 0 03 SENSO3 08 SENSO8 SENSO3 03 SENSOS 08 SENSO8 03 SENSO3 08 SENSO8 2 REFR LEAK 00 OFF FIX 00 00 day time day time Value NONE D AMBIENT OFF 56 7 31 0 65 0 04 SENSO4 09 SENSO SENSO4 04 SENSO4 09 509 04 SENSO4 09 SENSO 3 AMBIENT 00 OFF FIX 00 00 00 00 00 00 Alarm NONE Notice NONE d 05 SENSOS 10 SENS10 SENSOS 05 SENSOS 10 SENS10 05 SENSOS 10 SENS10 4 00 OFF FIX 00 00 00 00 Count _ 5 Enter Item 5 00 OFF FIX H Count Tripped NONE Arrows to Move ENT PREV EXT MEN SENSOR SETUP 12 00 SENSOR SETPOINTS 72 00 BENSOR ALARM SETPOINTS 12 00 SENSOR LOGS 72 00 ALARM OVERRIDE SETPOINTS 12 00 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE 1 STATUS 12 00 3 01 Status OFF Name 01 Temp Eng Unit No 03_ AMBIENT DATE TIME TEMP 3 AMBIENT No 01 Name zAV OUTPUT 01 Type Temp Control Using Diff of D1 700 00 Type Temp Eng Unit dF 07 18 13 50 85 7 106 O OF 682 Di
66. LUE GREEN ORANGE POWER MODULE 24 VAC 1 ANTI SWEATS CONTROL LIGHTS CONTROL CCB GROUND 24 2 DEFROST CONTROL FANS CONTROL BROWN RED PURPLE WHITE WHITE BLACK YELLOW PURPLE RED BLACK 2099oo39o S ER zo mm STEPPER MOTOR 2 STEPPER MOTOR 1 STEPPER MOTOR 4 STEPPER MOTOR 3 QOOOOOOOOCOQOQOOOOOA 09060 26513024 Figure 7 6 Sporlan Stepper Valve Output Cable Harness 335 3159 Schematic Diagram Full Output Cable for Alco ESR Valve The CCB is designed to use the 24 V version of the Alco ESR Valve The 24 V version of the valve has 24VDC appended to the part number The ESR valve har ness from Alco comes in two versions with an in line molex connector the CPC harness P N 335 3159 can be used If the valve is purchased with the in line molex the CPC Output Cable Harness with Quick Connects 335 3158 must be used The connector must be cut off of the harness and the valve wired according to specifications in Table 7 4 Table 7 4 shows the relationship between the CPC out put cable colors and the associated valve cable colors 7 4 Power Modules Sporlan ALCO SEI ESV Liquid Liquid Stepper Stepper S EEV S EEV CDS CPC Unipo EEPR Wire lar Bipolar Color 24V 12V Ew me me _ Bu Gren Black 13 Black Black
67. Manual Defr Manual Term Ovrd Ac tive Ovrrd Phase Fail Phase Restored Power Failed Power Restored Proof Fan lt 99 gt Proof Failure Pump Down RM Level lt 999 gt Login Re set Run Proof Sensor Open Sensor Short Set points Corrupted Setpoint Restore Error Xducer Open Xducer Short alarms The Miscellaneous alarm type also includes all Hi and Lo alarms generated by Analog Input Modules Temperature Unit Deg C Deg F Deg F Temperature units may be shown in degrees Celsius or degrees Fahrenheit For degrees Fahrenheit enter an For degrees Celsius enter a Pressure Unit P PSI B BAR P Pressure units may be shown in PSI or Bars Pressing while in the Pressure Unit field will display pressures in PSI Pressing while in the Pressure Unit field will display pressures in Bars Date Format 0 Month Day 1 Day Month 0 To display dates in the month day year format press 0 while in the Date Format field To display dates in the day month year format press 1 while in the Date Format field Change Baud Rate when dial to 3 00 1 200 2 400 9 600 9 The baud rate of the dialout modem is specified in the Communications Setup screen shown on Section 11 8 10 Communications Setup The baud rate specified in the Communications Setup screen is the default baud rate used when the RMCC dials out If the device receiving the dia lout cannot read data at t
68. O Network Status screen displays the total num ber of CCBs connected to the network and the number of these boards that are on line Refer to Board Circuit As signment on Section 11 4 52 Board to Circuit Assignment for detailed network status information 13 2 5 Host Network Status n ost Net State ON Number Offline O RMCC 2 3 485A 1 The Host Network Status screen displays the status of the Host Network No modifications to the network may be made from this screen Host Net State The Host Network Status screen will not display the status of the controller currently being used The status of the host network is displayed in the Host Net State field If the network is defined properly on each controller this field should read OK If the network is im properly configured this field will read Reconfigure Fi nally if the network is reset OFF the field will read OFF If the field reads Reconfigure there is a problem with the configuration of the hardware For more information about hardware configuration see Section 5 Hardware Overview System Navigation 13 3 13 3 Circuits 13 3 1 Circuit Status CIRCUIT STATUS 01 Refr Defr Stats OFF OFF Status Refr LstChg 00 00 00 00 0 0 1 1 The first Circuit Status Screen displays the circuit cir cuit status sensor input information and output status in formation Stats The current Refrigeration and D
69. Off D R Weighting 4th Defrost Terminate Tem 1st Defrost 2nd Defrost 3rd Defrost 5th Defrost 6th Defrost gt SET DATA T PREV Set points for controlling each refrigeration circuit are defined at the Circuit Setpoints screens All case controls assigned to the selected circuit will be controlled by these defined set points Defr Duration 0 240 minutes The Defrost Duration is the maximum amount of time the selected circuit should remain in defrost If no Termina tion Type is defined or if termination conditions are not met the circuit will remain in defrost until the defined De frost Duration is complete Control Temp 99 99 The Control Temperature is the temperature that should be maintained within the circuit Degree units are deter mined by the unit selected at the System Units screen see Section 11 8 7 System Units Drain Time 0 240 minutes Immediately following defrost moisture may still be present on the evaporator coils When refrigeration begins this moisture may freeze and reduce system performance To establish a drain time which is the duration after defrost the system sits idle before returning to refrigeration enter a value between 0 and 999 seconds the Drain Time field 11 40 Circuit Defrost Control Fan amp ASW 50 99 When the temperature within the case exceeds a certain
70. PAGE Continuslly try to Clear FailurezNO Num Clear At CONDENSER 2 5 FAN FAIL SETUP 12 00 Try Other Speed On Fan Fail NO tempts Delay Between Clear Attempts 0030 i Continually try to Clear Failure no H t RMCC I amp O Manual Appendix D 0 1 CIRCUIT CONTROL 12 00 Standard Circuit 2 Case Control 3 Circuit Summary SELECT NUMBER ENU CIRCUIT CONTROL 12 00 1 Status 6 Logs Graphs 2 8et Points f Summary 3 Anti Sweat BlLight Schedules amp iAlarm Set Points 9 Setup 5 Manual Defrost 12 00 12 00 RNTI SWEAT CONTROL 12 00 MANUAL MODES 12 00 12 00 IRCUITS STATUS 12 00 Std Circuit number 1 Std Circuit number 1 Std Circuit number 1 01 02 Rfr Std Circuit number 1 NAME STATUS TMP Lite Group number 1 Std Circuit number 1 1 Status Daily Logs 03 04 Rfr 2 8etup 5 0verrides 05 Rtr 06 Rfr 3 5etpoints 07 07 09 Rfr 10 11 12 as ENT CIRCUIT STATUS 01 12 00 FCIRCUIT SETPOINTS 1 12 00 ALARM SETPOINTS 12 00 SELECT ITEM 12 00 SCHEDULE 1 CIRCUIT SETUP 1 1 Refr Defr Defr Duration 000 Control Temp 000 0 ALARM NOTICE 01 MDF J 01 TR From Until Event Stats OFF OFF Status Refr Drain Time 000 Dead Band 000 0 Hi Alarm NONE NONE loz MDF J O2 TR 00 00 00 00 Case Type 000 SPARE LstChg 00 00 00 00 Terminate Temp 000 0 Hi
71. PID percentage is recalculated at a constant rate called the update rate usually every 2 6 seconds 9 2 In order to set up a system that uses PID control several constants and parameters must be specified However most of these constants are pre configured with default val ues that do not need to be adjusted The two values that must be set up for all PID systems are the PID set point and the throttling range Programming PID The PID set point is the desired value of the control in put PID control constantly changes the PID output per centage in an effort to make the control input equal to the PID set point Throttling range sometimes called the throttle range is a band of values surrounding the PID set point The pro portional part of the PID output is determined by where the PID input falls within the throttle range a more detailed explanation is given below in Section 9 3 How PID Con trol Operates RMCC I amp O Manual 9 3 Most of the PID output percentage is determined by the proportional part of PID control which is determined by comparing the input to the set point and throttling range A simplified illustration showing how proportional mode works is given in Figure 9 1 How PID Control Operates THROTTLING RAN OUTPUT AT SETPOINT shown here as 50 26512028 Figure 9 1 PID Proportional Mode Diagram When the control input is equal to the PID set point the proportional p
72. PL 16Al 8RO 8BDO BOARD WEIGHT 0 50 LB 26501055 Figure 3 6 16AI 8RO 8DO Mounting Dimensions 8RO Form C Boards Without Enclosures Mountin The 8RO Form C board is slightly larger than the 16AI and 8RO boards and is not supplied with a snap track If the SRO FC is supplied without an enclosure it is supplied with 500 inch long metal stand off dowels which are Hardware Mounting 3 3 pressed into the mounting holes in the board Figure 3 7 shows the mounting dimensions for the 8 i M2 0 156 i TYP6PL 8RO FC BOARD WEIGHT 0 50 LB 26501019 Figure 3 7 SRO FC Mounting Dimensions 8lOs Without Enclosures Mounting 810 boards not supplied with an enclosure are supplied with 500 inch long metal stand off dowels that are pressed into the mounting holes in the board Figure 3 8 shows the mounting dimensions for the 8IO Board Figure 3 8 SIO ARTC Mounting Dimensions 4AO Boards Without Enclosures Mounting 4 boards not supplied with an enclosure are supplied with a snap track for easy installation The insulation sheet and I O board must be removed from the track and the track mounted using the 1875 inch mounting slots Figure 3 5 shows this installation procedure for 16AI and 8RO boards Installation for the 4AO board is identical Figure 3 9 provides mounting dimensions for the 4AO board 3 4 485 Alarm Panel TYP 4 PL 4AO BOARD WEIGHT 0 50 LB 26501009 Figure 3 9 4AO
73. Pressure Set Points 21116 GROUP 1 PRESSURE SETPTSCENA LED CONTROLLED Y PRESSURE SETPOINT 22 0 DEAD AND 00 2 T MIN TIME ON OFF T D COMP 000 5 0005 UNLD 0005 0005 T PREV DISCHARGE P 5 gt SET DATA O MENU Variable Speed Set Points GROUPS VARIABLE SPEED SETPOINTS Off on Failure N N N 12 00 band Variable speed compressors for RMCT suction groups are configured using this screen Deadband 0 99 5 0 The Deadband value is subtracted from a group s Suc tion Setpoint to determine the pressure below which all compressors will be shut off For example if the Suction Setpoint is 25 and the Deadband is 5 0 all compressors will shut off when the suction pressure goes below 20 Off de lays will still be applied RMCC I amp O Manual This screen is similar to the RMCC Group 1 Pressure Setpoints screen shown in Section 7 3 13 However the Strategy field is not present since the RMCT uses only the Normal strategy Also RMCT suction groups have no ON and OFF de lays instead the RMCT uses minimum ON and OFF times The Min Time Off and Min Time On fields are in the lower left corner of the screen 0 240 sec 0 sec compressors and unloaders in the group must remain on for the Minimum Time On duration and must remain off
74. RED C99 02 C9 EARTH GROUND 7 DEFROST TERMINATION 9 O 90 OG OY 90 eo SUCTION VALVE OUTPUT SUCTION VALVE OUTPUT RETURN RS485 PULSE EEV gt lt 422 BLACK YELLOW 2000000000000009 CABLE SHIELD OOODODODOOOOOQOOQOOO RMCC I amp O Manual Appendix E E 1 Appendix F Wiring for Case Controller Power Module Defrost Module and Sporlan EEPR Valve 335 3159 BLUE GREEN ORANGE BROWN RED PURPLE DEFROST HOT an DEFROST OUT DEFROST HOT DEFROST OUT DEFROST HOT n DEFROST OUT ANTI SWEAT HOT ANTI SWEAT OUT FANS HOT a eee FANS OUT NC or NO LIGHTS HOT 7v mc LIGHTS OUT NC or NO OO Qe HOT n 3E NEUTRAL 8 8 8 EARTH GROUND RMCC I amp O Manual WHITE WHITE BLACK YELLOW PURPLE RED BLACK SPORLAN EEPR GREEN BIPOLAR RED WHITE BLACK OOO OOO
75. RMCC Status screens available before logon include the following e Suction Group Status Section 13 9 2 Suction Group Status Condenser Status Section 13 1 1 Condenser Sta tus Sensor Status Section 13 5 1 Sensor Status Circuits Status Section 13 3 1 Circuit Status or Section 13 4 1 Case Control Circuit Status A complete explanation of what information is avail able at each status screen is available in the applicable sec tion 13 1 1 Condenser Status CONDENSER STATUS Discharge Current Setpoint 200 Reclaim OFF 12 00 PRESSURE Ambient Ki F1 F2 F3 F4 The Condenser Status screen displays the current status of each defined condenser fan In addition to each condens RMCC I amp O Manual er fan s ON or OFF status users may view the current dis charge temperature or pressure reading the current discharge temperature or pressure set point and the current reclaim status Discharge The Discharge field displays the discharge sensor s current reading the defined discharge set point and wheth er the discharge is being controlled by temperature or pres sure If any of these values are undefined a line of periods will be shown in the field Ambient The Ambient field displays the current outside temper ature reading If the RMCC receives no reading from an outside temperature sensor a line of periods will be shown in the field Reclaim The Reclaim field
76. SETPTS 8 07 5010 01 12 00 Valve Multplier 100 Combine Type Derivative Gain 0 0 gt 5 STEPPER STPTS CCB 01 SDIC O1c 12 00 Valve Type UniPolar Stepper Hysteresis 005 Steps per Sec 100 Maximum Steps Open 2500 LIQUID STEPPER SCREENS STATUS CASE S ET POINTS Circui t numbenr 1 a 12 00 SELECT ITEM 01 SDIC 01c Enter Item 12 00 CIRCUIT 01 Cas Case Status Temp Term 01 STATUS SDIC O1c e Boards 01 01 On 007 0 000 0 t lt gt 12 00 O MENU STA Case Te Status Coil In Super H Humidit ENT Nex TUS CCB 018DIC 01c mp 007 0 Setpoint on Last Term 005 Valve X eat 008 0 Setpoint y X Antisw X 1 lt gt 12 00 025 000 0 100 0 008 0 100 0 T PREV 1 ICCB SETPOINTS CCB O1SDIC O1c 12 00 Supht Setpnt 8 0 Revision 6 082 Sensitivity 4 Recovery 070 Max Revy Time 000 Asw Hi Limit 060 0 Lo Limit 40 0 Frost Sensor NO STA Disch Return Coil In Coil Ou TUS CCBHOTSDIC O1c 007 0 Setpoint Air OPEN Valve amp at 008 0 Setpoint 005 003 0 ENG a 12 00 epe yy 100 0 008 0 ALARMS 0 Coil 1 In Coil 1 Out Cort A Im Coil 2 Out T PREV 1 SET DATA Q MEN
77. Set Points 1 screen see Section 11 4 46 Circuit Set Points 1 Add Edit Circuit and is the temperature the RMCC will maintain in the circuit Status The status of the selected CCB is displayed in the Status field One of the following conditions will be displayed e On the selected case board is calling for a stage of refrigeration e Off the selected case board is not calling for a stage of refrigeration e Def the selected case board is calling for a stage of defrost Lost the selected case board cannot be found with in the defined circuit Last Term The temperature at which defrost was last terminated within the selected case is displayed in the Term field Coil In The current Coil In Temperature of the selected case is displayed in the Coil In field Valve When operating an Electronic Expansion Valve EEV the current valve percentage is displayed in the Valve field Super Heat The current superheat calculation for the selected case is displayed in the Super Heat field The term superheat is referring to the temperature differential across the evap orator coil coil outlet coil inlet Setpoint The current Superheat Set Point defined for the selected case is displayed in the Setpoint field This set point is de fined at the CCB Setpoints screen see Section 11 4 29 CCB Set Point Screen I Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only The Superheat Set Point is the superheat value the RMCC w
78. Support in the Dual Temp Shift Input field if a dual temperature case is defined within the circuit System Navigation 11 29 11 4 22 Circuit Inputs Setup 9 a CIRCUIT INPUTS SETUP Input Name Location Log Interval Bypass Sensor Type Offset T PREV gt SET DATA O MENU All Temperature Control Defrost Termination Clean ing Switch Extra or Dual Temp and Demand Sensor in puts defined within the RMCC are configured at the Circuit Inputs Setup screen This screen will display only those sensors defined at the Circuit Setup screens and only appli cable fields will be active Input Name The name of the defined sensor to be configured is dis played in the Input Name field Location BB PP BB Board PP Point The board and point number on the 16AI board where the selected sensor is located is defined in the Location field The network address of the 16AI board is defined by a network dip switch on the board Enter this number in the first Location field Each defined sensor is physically con nected to a specific point on the 16AI board This number is printed on the board above the input connection Enter this number in the second Location field 11 4 23 Circuit Output Setup ror ml CIRCUIT OUTPUTS SETUP Output Name Location Log Interval Bypass Run Time
79. Switch Settings 4 15 Fail Safe Dip Switch Settings CPC uses two fail safe devices on its output boards a dip switch and jumpers These two devices are used to pro vide fail safe operation of equipment in the event of either power loss or network communication loss The use of these devices differs depending on the board or controller Boards using Form C contacts do not have fail safe de vices since the contacts are wired for the position required during power loss but have a dip switch which illuminates the LED relay indicator depending on the contact position The 8RO has both a fail safe dip switch S2 to force the contacts open or closed if the network fails and a jumper for each output JU4 through 1 that forces the contact open or closed during a power loss Figure 4 13 shows the possi ble settings for the dip switch and jumpers SWITCH 1 AND JUMPER JU4 FOR RELAY 1 THE SWITCH SETTING SHOWN ALLOWS THE RELAY TO CLOSE ON LOSS OF COMMUNICATION THE 1 JUMPER SETTING ALLOWS THE RELAY TO CLOSE ON A POWER LOSS oh EINER S2 FAILSAFE Noo 2 THE SWITCH SETTING SHOWN DEG NEUEN ALLOWS THE RELAY TO OPEN ON N N O T SWITCH 2 AND JUMPER JUS FOR RELAY LOSS OF COMMUNICATION THE JUMPER SETTING ALLOWS THE RELAY OPEN ON A POWER LOSS S2 FAILSAFE NCD JUS SWITCH 3 ANI U6 FOR RELAY
80. TTI3 5 Condenser Single Speed Setup SCreelis ER a E Eee pt repe terere gera 11 12 11 3 5 1 Single Speed Setup Screen 1 E 11 3 5 2 Single Speed Setup Screen 2 es ae ee 11 3 5 3 Condenser Fan Fail Setup iet tere eee e ere Ed em 11 3 6 Condenser Two Speed Fan Setup sese eee nennen Sea Ee entes nete nene eene 11 14 11 3 6 1 Two Speed Setup Screen 1 11 3 6 2 Two Speed Setup Screen 2 m 11 3 6 3 Condenser Fan Fail Setup 11 3 6 4 Condenser Two Speed Fan Fail Setup 11 3 7 Variable Speed Set p Screens e e o e XO E Ve e ones 11 3 7 1 Condenser VS Fan Setup 11 3 7 2 Condenser Fan Fail Setup 11 3 7 3 Condenser VS Fan Fail Setup 11 3 6 Condenser Setpoints Screen 1 4 3 sape a seite e a sl ee EUN 11 3 9 Cond nser Setpoints Screen 2 esu esas eror arte pepe derer 11 3 10 Condenser Split Setpoints cid ea en e E ORE GE ES ERE HERR QURE HR DO NIE H3 Run Pimes a E EE ERR vi Table of Contents 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 LE 3 12 Bypass eias Hap ee kel e et ey e e ak ea id e ego era deep eve e i a ee ae p t ees tee 11 19 11 4 CIRCUIT 5 11 19 HA Standard Circuit eoo e eR GE bn exu eder
81. The current temperature readings of discharge sensors one through four are shown in the Disch Air 1 Disch Air 4 fields Valve 96 When operating an Electronic Expansion Valve EEV the current valve percentage is displayed in the Valve 96 field Humidity 96 When the CCB s Anti Sweat feature is active the cur rent status of the selected humidity probe is displayed in the Humidity field Antisw 96 The Anti Sweat percentage is displayed in the Antisw field This percentage is the cycle rate of voltage pulsing to the case s anti sweat heaters 13 4 4 CCB Status 2 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only CCB 01SDIC O1c CCB STATUS Setpoint Valve X Setpoint For liquid pulse and liquid stepper circuits this status screen displays the current sensor readings and set points of the values important to controlling the EEV Disch Air The current Discharge Air Temperature within the se lected case is displayed in the Disch Air field Setpoint The current Discharge Air Temperature Set Point de fined for the selected case is displayed in the Setpoint field Return Air The current Return Air Temperature within the selected case is displayed in the Return Air field Valve When operating an Electronic Expansion Valve EEV the current valve percentage is displayed in the Valve field A case may be controlled with up to two expansion valves Status information about the second valve is dis played at the C
82. The transformer should be located within 10 feet of the board itis powering preferably within the board enclosure CPC supplies four types of transformers for standard refrigeration applica tions three board transformer six board transformer 10 board transformer and SIO ARTC transformer The multi ple board transformers may not be used to power 8IO or ARTC RMCC I amp O Manual Hardware Mounting 3 7 4 The REFLECS Net works The REFLECS uses four separate networks 1 The RS485 Input Output I O Network COM A connects the controller to the input and output communication boards 2 The RS485 Host Bus Network COM B connects multiple controllers to a 485 alarm panel 3 The RS232 Remote Communication Network COM C connects multiple controllers to a modem thus allowing remote communication 4 The RS485 Input Output I O Network COM D is an additional I O network that connects the controller to the input and output communication boards The following sections provide an overview of the ba sic network components and their function Wiring require ments for each of the networks is provided in Section 4 4 Wiring 4 1 RS485 Input Output I O Net work COM A and D The 5485 Input Output I O network connects all in put and output communication boards together in an open communication loop This loop connects the REFLECS to multiple input and output communication boards and ter minates at
83. VARIABLE SPEED SETPOINTS 12 00 FLOATING SUCTION 12 00 TYPE amp f 01 02 00 C01 NORM COS NORM C11 NORM High Suct 45 0 Dly 060m Dchg Alm 4 Group 1 L Contr by PRESSURE Float on off OFF P IAEN STENE STRATERY TENN STATUS 02 NORM C NORM 12 NORM Low Suct 01 0 bly 060m Proof Dly 030 2 Group 2 1 Name 4Comps 00 DISCHARGE VS MINIMUM SPEED 0900 rpm INTERVAL M 15 1 GROUP 1 RUN TIM 605 NORM OS NORM 15 NORM Pump Down 00 5 Dly 010s 3 Group 3 2 Name 00 Trip Point 350 0 VS MAXIMUM SPEED 1800 rpm SUCTION 030 0 MIN SUCTION 020 0 D EROUP gt OIL PRE 0 NORM C09 NORM C15 NORM Automatic Oil Reset NO 4 Group 4 3 Name 00 Trip Delay 005 MAX INCREASE RATE 2000 rpm minute Use Circuit 01 S EROUP 5 H POWE C05 NORM 10 NORM 15 NORM Copeland Oil System Window 010 sec 63 Log Interval 5 Name 00 s Autoreset 050 0 MAX DECREASE RATE 2000 rpm minute Delay Floating After Defrost 10 min A 6ROUP 4 PROOF s Below Trip Point Altern Strategy OFF on Failure N Extern Shift 000 0 z i UU 8ET DAT gt SET DATA O MENU gt SET DATA T PREV 4 gt SET DATA GROUP2 STATUS 12 00 COMPRESSOR BYPASS 12 00 PRESSURE ALARMS SETUP 12 00 GROUPT SETUP 12 00 VARIABLE SPEED SETPOINTS 12 00 ION 12 00 FGROUPT STRATEGY SETUP 12 00 TYPE amp 01 02 03 04 05 High Suct 45 0 Dly 060m Dchg Alm Y TYPE CMP 01 02 03 04 05 ST HP STATU
84. VS COMP 4 in the system software see Section 7 9 2 Output Definitions 6 External Fault Place a jumper across termi nals 25 and 26 7 Fault Input The Fincor inverter sends a signal to a 16AI when an inverter fault oc curs Wire the 16AI point to terminals 30 and 32 on the inverter The 16AI board and point address must be set up as an inverter alarm VS INVALM input in the system software see Section 7 9 1 Input Definitions Dip Switches Figure 5 5 shows how dip switches JD and JE on the inverter control board must be set Jumper JD must be set to the ENABLE position to allow the RMCC to control the inverter Jumper JE must be set to the DISABLE position 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 to disable the FWD REV and JOG keys on the inverter keypad DISABLE ENABLE ENABLE JE 8 DISABLE 26513070 Figure 5 5 Fincor Inverter Dip Switch Settings Various Temp Sensors and Probes Connect to Input Point by Board Type 16AI Any Available Point 8 Avail able Input Point ARTC Any Temp or Aux Input 5 6 Sensor and Transducer Wir ing Table 5 1 shows some typical sensor and transducer connections For a complete list of hardware and software setup in structions refer to Appendix B Sensor Hardware Soft ware Setup Table ODD EVEN TERMINAL TERMINAL 1 Connect one lead to the odd numbered terminal and the other lead to the even numbered
85. Valves eae D 7 _ Case Type the four letter case type code See Section 11 4 16 Circuit Setup 1 for a complete table of codes Rev the software revision number Status the system is operating in either of five modes refrigeration on On refrigeration off Off defrost on MDfr recovery mode Rcvy or override mode Ovrd Time the current time in 24 hour format Setpt the current control temperature set point This may be changed using the HHT CaseOffset the sensor offset for the control temperature This may be changed using the HHT Valve 1 the current opening percentage of the valve Ctrl Temp the current calculated control temperature reading Disch 1 Disch 4 the current readings of discharge air temperature sensors one through four Defr the defined defrost duration Failsafe this shows the demand defrost fail safe time Term the termination temperature sensor reading Setpt the termination temperature set point Humidity the humidity sensor reading Aswt the percentage at which the anti sweat heaters are operating Max the humidity above which the anti sweat heater will remain on at all times Min the humidity below which the anti sweat heater will remain off at all times Lights the current status of the case lights Pressing RIGHT followed by one of the com T gh mands below allows users to bypass the case lights Turn 1 Auto Pressing 1 will return the c
86. WITH A 10 HP RATING AND A HIGH FAN WITH A 40 HP RATING FAN OFF HIGH FAN ON ____LOW FAN ON Condenser PID Output from 0 to 100 y 0 100 25 Cut on Cut off Value 10 HP 40 HP lt _ lt iE Condenser PID Output _BOTH HIGH FAN OFF from 100 to 0 FANS LOW FAN ON OFF Figure 9 5 Diagram of Two Speed Condenser Operation Two speed fan operation may be further fine tuned by specifying on off delays low to high and high to low tran sition delays specified start speeds and durations and min imum on off durations 9 5 2 3 Variable Speed Fans Variable speed fan control simply interprets the 0 100 PID output given by the condenser control algorithm as 0 100 of the fan s maximum output The percentage at which the fan cuts on and off is determined by the fan s maximum and minimum RPM The RMCC divides the minimum RPM by the maximum RPM to yield a percent age any PID output above this value means the fan will be on and any PID output below this value means the fan will be off An example of how variable speed condenser control works is shown in Figure 9 6 In this example the Mini mum Fan RPM is set to 900 and the Maximum Fan RPM is set to 1800 As the PID output rises from 0 to above the cut on cut off value Minimum Maximum RPM or 50 the fan activates and begins operating at 900 RPM the fan s defined Minimum Speed When the PID output is between the cut on cut
87. a condenser that has either a single set of fans that may operate at two different speeds or two sets of single speed fans with different horsepower ratings Generally two speed condenser control cycles the fans from off to low and from low to high as the PID output goes from 0 to 100 Likewise fans cycle from high to low and from low to off as the PID output goes from 10096 to 096 Single Speed Fans Two speed condenser fans change speeds at three dif ferent PID output values 0 the cut on cut off value de termined by taking the ratio of the low speed fans horsepower vs the high speed fans horsepower and 100 For example if the low fan s horsepower rating is 10 and the high fan s horsepower rating is 40 the cut on cut off value would be 25 10 40 see Figure 9 5 If the fan is currently off 096 and the condenser calls for 10 of the fan the low fan will not come on until the condenser calls for 25 of the fan At a call for 2596 the low fan will come on and remain on until the condenser calls for 100 fan At the call for 100 fan the high fan will turn on and the low fan will turn off If the condenser calls for 80 fan the high fan will re main on even though the percentage is lower than 100 The high fan will continue to run until the condenser calls for 2596 fan At a call for 2596 fan the low fan will turn on and the high fan will turn off RMCC I amp O Manual TRIP DIAGRAM FOR A LOW FAN
88. a defrost cycle within a selected circuit enter 1 in the appropriate circuit field RMCC I amp O Manual whichever is greater Enter the minimum amount of time the heater will remain OFF in this field Anti sweat override inputs must be configured in the Input Definition screen see Section 11 8 1 Input Defini tions They are listed in the Input Definitions screen as in puts ASC 1 through ASC 8 OVRD Standard Circuit Control Alarm Set Point screens are also accessed by selecting the Setup Command from the Standard Circuit Control Menu For descriptions of these screens see Section 14 1 Alarm Set Points End Both manual and scheduled defrost cycles may be man ually deactivated at the Manual Defrost screen When de frost is manually deactivated the circuit is returned to normal refrigeration after the programmed termination drain time is completed To manually deactivate a defrost cycle within a selected circuit enter 2 in the appropriate circuit field Start Override In addition to the activation and deactivation of defrost circuits may also be manually overridden OFF at the Man ual Defrost screen When a manual override is activated the selected circuit will shut down until the override is de activated at this screen To activate a manual override with in a selected circuit enter 3 in the appropriate circuit field Emergency Defrost Pressing 4 initiates an emergency defro
89. accomplished using either a pulse type valve using pulse width modulation or a stepper valve The superheat control algorithm is identical for either valve type Once a valve percentage has been determined this value is fed to the valve output algorithm The valve output algorithm converts the valve percentage into the ap propriate control value depending on the valve type being used For a pulse valve the control value is a duration the valve will be fully open within a fixed period of time For a stepper valve the valve is the number of steps the valve opening must be adjusted to move from the current opening to the new required opening Control of the coil s superheat applies to liquid side valve control only Type Default Min Max Description Value 50 0 F 120 F Current coil inlet temperature ColOu 50 0 F 120 F Current coil outlet temperature Desired Superheat Speo 1 F FF 19F Valve Multiplier 10096 1046 100 Set point point Setpoint 4 0 9 16 255 Sets throttling range and integral gain Sensitivity Target coil differential Multiplier applied to output Used to support overcapacity valves Vave Output 0 100 Calculated valve required to reach maintain set point Table 8 1 Superheat Control Parameters 8 2 Liquid Side Control The case controller controls case temperature from the liquid side of the evaporator through simple ther
90. content of the setup screens that follow the first screen are largely dependent upon the Control Strategy and Condenser Fan Type settings chosen in the first screen The condenser fans are set up at the Output Definitions screen see Section 11 8 2 Output Definitions Control Strategy A ir Cooled T emp Diff E va porative A The method of determining the control value used by the condenser s PID control algorithm is specified in the 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Control Strategy field There are three strategies to choose from Air Cooled The control value is read directly from the control source chosen in the Control Source field see below e Temp Diff The RMCC takes a pressure value from the control source chosen in the Control Source field see below and converts this pressure value to a temperature value based on the selected Refriger ant Type see below e Evaporative The RMCC uses a combination of pressure or temperature values from up to five sources The method the RMCC will use to combine the values must be entered in the Control Using field see below Note that when this strategy is se lected Inputs becomes locked in as the de fault value for the Control Source field Control Source D ischarge I nlet O utlet D The temperature sensor or pressure transducer used to control the condenser fans may be mounted in either of three places on the condenser s discharge line on th
91. either sent to the proper 8RO relay or an existing signal is discontinued Through the use of this relay signal refrigeration control functions that can be properly maintained by a simple contact closure se quence are effectively operated by the REFLECS Like the 16AI input board the 8RO board is easily in stalled and operated within the CPC network environment RMCC I amp O Manual because of its straightforward design Several of these fea tures are shown in Figure 2 4 AC Power Input Connection Network Connection LED Power Indicator Termination Resistance Jumpers Address and Baud Rate Dip Switch Fail Safe Dip Switch Output Connection 8 places Fail Safe Jumpers 8 places Relay Fuses 8 places Figure 2 4 8RO Relay Output Board 2 3 2 8RO Form C Board A maximum of sixteen SROs and SRO FCs may be connected to an through the RS485 COM A and D networks The 8RO Relay Output Board with Form C contacts Figure 2 5 is identical in function to the standard 8RO Relay Output Board except that it uses relays with form C contacts and does not use fail safe jumpers wiring the con tacts as either normally open or normally closed creates the fail safe condition The 8RO FC is slightly larger than the standard 8 therefore specific mounting instructions for the SRO FC provided in Section 3 2 O Boards and En closures should be used Kick UCU sga leget ea eT
92. either the first or second pass through the evaporator Preferably the sensor should be placed six inches into the evaporator on the first pass Place the coil inlet sensor with the curved surface against the pipe and secure with a Panduit low temperature cable tie number PLT2S M120 or equivalent The tie should be positioned in the groove on the top surface of the sensor A second tie should be used to secure the lead to the pipe for additional support Sensors located on refrigerant tubing should be insulat ed to eliminate the influence of the surrounding air A self adhering insulation that will not absorb moisture is recom mended to prevent ice accumulating at the sensor location For orientation of the sensor on the coil see Figure 7 8 RMCC I amp O Manual 7 8 3 Coil Outlet Sensor Red Leads Proper location of the coil outlet sensor is critical since valve control is dependent upon accurate measurement of changes to evaporator discharge gas temperature The coil outlet sensor should be located on a horizontal section of the suction line near the evaporator outlet Follow the mounting instructions listed for the coil inlet sensor For orientation of the sensor on the coil see Figure 7 8 26509022 Figure 7 8 Sensor Location 7 9 Complete wiring of the Case Controller Case Control ler Power Module and optional Defrost Power Module is shown in Appendix E Wiring for Case Controller Power Module Defrost Modu
93. field Termination Sensors Strategy Min Max Avg Avg If all termination sensors are digital sensors defrost will terminate when all sensors are CLOSED The Termination Sensors Strategy field determines how multiple termination sensors will be combined into a single termination control value Users may choose from the following strategies e Avg the average of the temperature sensor readings is used to control termination e Max the highest temperature sensor reading is used to control termination e Min the lowest temperature sensor reading is used to control termination Temperature Strategy F ull E PR Valve The Temperature Strategy field determines how the re frigeration solenoid will operate within this circuit Users may choose from the following two strategies 11 4 18 Circuit Set Points 1 T PREV L NEXT gt SET DATA Set points for controlling each Standard Circuit are de fined at the Circuit Setpoints screens RMCC I amp O Manual Full the refrigeration solenoid is being used to control refrigeration in this circuit When Full is se lected this solenoid will open and close in an effort to maintain the Control Temperature within the cir cuit The Control Temperature is defined at the Cir cuit Setpoints screen see Section 11 4 18 Circuit Set Points 1 EPR Valve a mechanical EPR or other regulating device is being used to control refrigeration in this circuit
94. field The real time clock within each RMCC records the cu mulative runtimes of each condenser fan These runtimes are displayed at the Condenser Runtimes screen The cu mulative runtime is the total number of hours each fan has been activated for the duration the RMCC has been con nected or since the last clear runtimes command The clear runtimes command clears the cumulative runtimes for each fan To reset the runtimes for any fan move the cursor to the desired fan runtimes and press the blue key then the R key 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11 3 12 Bypass Any defined condenser fan may be bypassed for a fixed duration at the Condenser Bypass screen A fixed bypass overrides the system condenser fan settings with a user de CONDENSER BYPASS fined ON or OFF setting until the bypass command is re F1 F2 F5 turned to normal at the Condenser Bypass screen NORM NORM NORM 7 8 9 To activate a condenser bypass specify O n or NORM NORM NORM for each defined condenser fan to be bypassed To deacti vate a condenser bypass change the On or Off status to the Normal command and the selected condenser fan will re sume controlling with its original settings gt SET DATA 11 4 Circuit Defrost Control Cem Desorption Page CIRCUIT CONTROL 1 Standard Circuit 2 Case Control 5 Circuit Summary SELECT NUMBER 11 4 1 Standard Circ
95. fields The RMCC will automatically set the Day for the entered Date System Navigation 11 55 Passwords 6 Character Limit Choose a different password for each level of access If all passwords are defined the same users will only be able to log in at 100 level access The RMCC system requires a password for all users to enter into and modify the system There are four levels of 11 8 4 System Options Additional Delay After Defrost 0 240 minutes 0 When the RMCC exits a stage of defrost the RMCC will wait a specified Defrost Delay before reactivating alarms Notice on Defrost Timeout Y es N o N Some circuits may be set up with defrost termination strategies that cause them to exit defrost when a certain Termination Temperature is exceeded within the case Re gardless of strategy or termination temperature a circuit will operate in defrost mode no longer than the defined De frost Duration Power Fail Alarm Notice A larm N otice N The RMCC will generate a notice or an alarm when there is a power failure within the system A notice is a low level warning that alerts users of abnormal facility or con trol system conditions notice creates an entry in the RMCC Alarm Log An alarm is a high level warning that also alerts users of abnormal facility or control system con ditions An alarm will appear in the RMCC Alarm Log and may be accompanied by a contact closure for on site oper
96. for the Minimum Time Off duration Off on Failure Y or N N See the description of Off on Failure given in the RMCC Variable Speed Set Points screen on Section 7 3 14 Group 1 Variable Speed Set Points Max Speed 0 9999 rpm 1800 rpm The maximum rpm of the variable speed compressor must be entered in the Max Speed field Note that unlike the RMCC Variable Speed Set Points screen on Section 7 3 14 Group 1 Variable Speed Set Points there is no Minimum Speed field The RMCT auto matically assumes that the minimum speed of the variable speed compressor is 50 of the maximum speed therefore when the Max Speed is 1800 rpm the minimum speed will be 900 rpm Users may not alter the value of minimum speed Also note that unlike the RMCC there are no fields in which to insert maximum speed increase and decrease rates In the RMCT increase rates are determined by the in verters driving the compressors Appendix A A 3 Appendix B Sensor Hardware Software Setup Table How to Use This Table Table B 1 lists all sensors commonly used in an RMCC setup by both name and part number The table divides sen sor setup for each sensor into five different steps each of which is represented by a column in the table The columns are as follows Input Dip Switch the position of the 16AI or 8IO dip switch rocker that corresponds to the input point to which the sensor will be connected Refer to Sec tion 5 12 Input Type Di
97. ging and graphing features that allow the user to view accurate real time information about system conditions The RMCC may be configured to control a refrigera tion system using traditional pressure control of up to four suction groups and as many as 22 compressors orit may be used to interact with CPC s case controller for complete control of refrigerated case valves superheat fans lights defrost and anti sweat heaters All other refrigeration system components must be con nected to the RMCC for proper monitoring and control of the system The RMCC has connections for I O host and remote communication components Compressors con densers refrigerated cases and sensors and transducers while not directly connected to the RMCC are accessed by the controller through the communication boards described below Installation of the RMCC consists of mounting the unit in an easily accessible location communication boards additional RMCCS alarms panels and remote communica tion equipment must be wired to the RMCC Network switches must be set to give the RMCC a relative address on the I O network A 120 208 volt power supply is re quired to provide power to the unit Finally the RMCC must be configured based on the refrigeration components to be controlled The RMCC consists of a rugged steel enclosure con taining a processor board and Power Interface Board PIB The Processor Board Figure 2 1 contains the LCD screen
98. gt SET DATA O MENU Setpoint 99 999 200 0 The Setpoint value is the discharge pressure or temper ature or temperature differential as is the case with TD condensers the RMCC will attempt to maintain during condenser control See Section 3 3 Condenser Control for more information about condenser control Throttle Range 0 99 4 0 The Throttle Range value forms an operational range for the condenser fans that is equally above and below the 11 16 Condenser Control 11 3 7 3 Condenser VS Fan Fail Setup CONDENSER VS SPEED FAN FAIL SETUP 12 00 Inverter Reset Count 0035 Inverter Reset Delay 0030 gt SET DATA 0 Inverter Reset Count 0 240 attempts 3 at tempts In order for the RMCC to automatically reset failed inverters an inverter reset output must be defined in the Output Definitions screen on Section 11 8 2 Out put Definitions When an inverter failure is detected on the condenser fans inverter alarm input see Input Definitions on Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions the RMCC will attempt to reset the inverter The Inverter Reset Count is the number of re set attempts the RMCC will make before bypassing the failed compressor off Inverter Reset Delay 0 3600 sec 30 sec When the RMCC is set up to make multiple attempts to reset failed inverters the Inverter Reset Delay is the num ber of seconds between each inverter reset attempt S
99. manual bypass by entering ON or OFF in the heater s Screen Override field When bypassed in this manner the anti sweat heater will remain ON or OFF until a user terminates the bypass by entering NORM in the heater s Screen Override field 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Input OVR Time Min 0 240 min 0 min Anti sweat heaters may also be overridden OFF by closing an external input When this input is closed the heater will remain OFF for as long as the output is closed or for an amount of time equal to the Input OVR Time Min 11 4 12 Alarm Set Points 11 4 13 Manual Defrost T PREV gt SET DATA In the Manual Modes screens the status of circuits 1 48 are shown in the field to the right of the number Rfr for re frigeration Dfr for defrost etc Defrost for each defined circuit within the RMCC may be manually activated or de activated by entering a command in the circuit s field 1 Defrost 2 End 3 Start Override 4 Emergency Defrost Rfr Defrost When defrost is manually activated defrost will run within the selected circuit for the defrost duration defined at the Circuit Set Points 1 screen see Section 11 4 18 Cir cuit Set Points 1 Defrost termination strategies defined at the Circuit Setup 2 screen see Section 11 4 17 Circuit Setup 2 are ignored After the defrost duration has been completed the circuit will return to normal refrigeration af ter the defined Drain Time To manually activate
100. multiplied by the filter ratio which is a percentage between 0 and 100 The result of this multiplication is the filtered output value Note that if the filter ratio is at 100 or if the Filter cell is disabled the input is not mod ified by the Filter cell The Filter output value is the final Analog Input Mod ule Value This value is also sent to the Process Alarm cell and the Cut In Cut Out cell for use in alarm generation and digital output control Process Alarm The Process Alarm cell reads the Analog Input Module Value from the Filter cell and compares it to the notice and alarm set points defined by the user When an alarm condi tion is detected the Process Alarm cell sends digital values tothe Alarm or Notice outputs and sends an alarm message to the RMCC Alarm Log RMCC I amp O Manual Different set points may be specified for occupied or unoccupied building states The Process Alarm cell reads the digital state of the Occup input to determine which set of set points to use HIGH occupied LOW unoccupied If the input exceeds a high set point or falls below a low set point for an amount of time greater than the specified delay period the corresponding Alarm or Notice Output will turn ON The Alarm Disable and Notice Disable inputs when HIGH force the Alarm and Notice Outputs OFF Cut In Cut Out The Cut In Cut Out cell s function is to read the Analog Input Module Value from the Filter cell compare it to a
101. of a 100 HP compressor rack were called for one or more compressors totalling 15 HP would be activat ed The normal control strategy varies both the number of compressors and run duration to achieve proper system performance To initiate the normal control strategy the user provides the RMCC with the number of compressor stages within the group the stage type compressor vari able speed unloader and the horsepower of the stage 9 2 Pressure Control 9 4 1 2 Fixed Steps As an alternative to the normal suction pressure control strategy the RMCC allows the user to build a specific con trol method for a pressure group using fixed steps To initiate the fixed steps strategy a matrix is built by the user that tells the RMCC when each compressor should be cycled on or off Because the RMCC can only cycle the compressors based on that matrix the ability to match available compressor capacity to the refrigeration needs of the system is greatly reduced If the fixed steps strategy is selected only 10 compres sor stages may be defined per group 9 4 2 Variable Speed Compressors Each of the four suction groups may have one variable speed compressor The chief advantage of having a vari able speed compressor in a compressor rack is that a vari able speed compressor can operate at a wide range of horsepowers whereas a standard compressor may only op erate at 10096 or 096 capacity Variable speed compressors thus allow t
102. off value and 100 the fan op erates at a percentage of the Maximum Fan RPM dictated by the PID output value i e 65 of Maximum RPM when the output is 65 maximum RPM when the PID is 100 etc The fan continues to operate in this manner until the PID output drops below the cut on cut off percentage at which time the fan deactivates Software Overview 9 5 Figure 9 6 Diagram of Variable Speed Condenser Operation To fine tune condenser fan operation users may speci fy on off delays minimum ON OFF times and maximum RPM increase and decrease rates for variable speed con denser fans 9 5 3 Operation During Reclaim During heat reclaim it may be preferable to raise or shift the condenser set point to increase the temperature of the refrigerant in the system The RMCC provides a user definable shift value that may be added to the condenser set point This change is made when the RMCC receives a sig nal from the RMCC s defined Reclaim input that heat re claim has been initiated 9 5 4 Condenser Split Single Speed Fans Only In cold conditions it may be preferable to reduce the op erational capacity of the condenser by either limiting the number of fans that maybe activated or by activating a valve which reduces the effective condensing area of the coil The RMCC provides a user defined set point at which signal is sent to the condenser to initiate split A different set point is definable for heat reclaim
103. offset value may be entered at the CCB Offsets screen to calibrate selected sensors to actual conditions To offset a displayed sensor enter an offset value be tween 9 and 9 or between 0 ppm and 99 ppm for the re frigerant leak sensor in the appropriate fields 11 4 35 CCB Set Points Screen 3 Suction Stepper Only TEETAN CCB OFFSETS CCB 01 SDIC O1c Case Offset 2 Extra1 Tmp Discharge 1 Extra2 Tmp Discharge 2 Refr Leak Discharge 3 Discharge 4 T PREV 4 NEXT gt SET DATA At times a sensor may provide a reading that reads low er or higher than the known condition being monitored An offset value may be entered at the CCB Offsets screen to calibrate selected sensors to actual conditions To offset a displayed sensor enter an offset value be tween 9 and 9 or between 0 and 99 ppm in the appropri ate fields 11 4 36 CCB Set Point Screen 4 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only gt SET DATA Case Deadband 0 12 7 0 6 The Case Dead Band is a value equally above and be low the Control Temperature Set Point defined at the Cir cuit Set Points screen see Section 11 4 46 Circuit Set Points 1 Add Edit Circuit When the case temperature exceeds the dead band refrigeration will be activated with in the case When the case temperature falls below the dead band the refrigeration valve closes according to the Close Rate Percentage define
104. or OFF by a manual or external bypass an asterisk will appear to the right of the Status field The Time Left field will display BPSS for manual bypasses and the time left in minutes for external bypasses e Def the selected board is calling for a stage of de frost Lost the selected board cannot be found within the defined circuit Temp The current case temperature is displayed in the Temp field This temperature is calculated according to the Tem perature Control Strategy defined at the Circuit Setup 2 screen see Section 11 4 45 Circuit Setup 2 Add Edit Cir cuit Term The current Termination Temperature sensor reading is displayed in the Term field 13 4 2 CCB Status 1 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only 22 4 STATUS 01SD C 01 Setpoint ast Term Val eX Setpoint Antisw X eat umidity For liquid pulse and liquid stepper CCBs this status screen displays current information about case sensor read ings and set points System Navigation 13 5 Case Temp The current temperature in the selected case is dis played in the Case Temp field This temperature is calcu lated according to the Temperature Control Strategy defined at the Circuit Setup 2 screen see Section 11 4 45 Circuit Setup 2 Add Edit Circuit Setpoint The current Control Temperature Set Point is displayed in the Setpoint field This set point is defined at the Circuit
105. speed compressors 11 6 variable speed Alternate strategy 9 3 VS HP on Edge 9 3 Normal strategy 9 2 flowchart 9 2 variable speed compressors 9 2 Processor Board features 2 2 Pulse Valves EEVs See Case Con trol valve control Pulse Width Modulation analog output modules 9 17 anti sweat control 9 7 R Reclaim condenser operation during 9 6 condenser set point shift 11 16 Recovery mode 8 4 REFLECS defined 2 1 RMCC I amp O Manual functions of 2 1 list of controllers 2 1 standard components 2 1 REFLECS Networks Baud Rate Dip Switch Settings 4 5 Fail Safe and Relay Dip Switch Settings Output Boards 4 5 RS232 Remote Communication Network Terminating Resistance Jumpers 4 3 Refrigeration Circuits See Circuit Control Refrigeration Monitor and Case Con trol number of compressor groups controlled by 11 5 number of compressor stages controlled by 11 5 Refrigeration Monitor and Case Con trol See RMCC Remote Communication Network See RS232 Remote Commu nication Network RMCC mounting 3 1 RMCC functions of 2 1 RMCT A 1 differences between RMCC and RMCT A 1 PIDA control 1 variable speed operation A 1 variable speed setup A 3 Rotary Dials network board numbering 4 4 function of 4 4 Settings for 8IO 4 4 settings for 8IO 5 11 RS232 Bus Amplifier defined 2 6 features 2 6 location 3 5 mounting 3 5 RS232 Remote Communication Net work 4 1 defined 4 1 wiring 4 1 5 2 RS485 Host Bu
106. strategy The primary combination strat egy will be used whenever the Use Alt Comb input is LOW When the Use Alt Comb input is HIGH the alter nate combination will be used If an alternate combination strategy is not desired only the primary combination strat egy needs to be defined Min On Off The Min On Off cell gives users a method of assuring that the Digital Output Module s Command Output re mains ON for a minimum amount of time and or OFF for a minimum amount of time regardless of the input value read from the Schedif cell Every time a change of state is detected in the input val ue the Min On Off cell begins to actively measure the length of time the input remains in its current state If the input switches from ON to OFF before a user specified Minimum On duration is reached the output signal being sent from the Min On Off cell will not reflect the input s change of state it will remain ON until the Minimum On duration has passed If the input is still OFF when the dura tion is over the output will switch OFF The reverse is true with the Minimum Off duration If the input signal switches ON before the Minimum Off du ration is reached the output signal from the Min On Off cell will remain OFF until the duration has passed One Shot Some applications for the Digital Output Module re quire digital pulses instead of ON OFF logic The One Shot cell when enabled reads the ON OFF output from the Min On Off c
107. than the ASW Hi Limit the anti sweat heaters will remain on at all times If the humidity is lower than the Asw Lo Limit the anti sweat heaters will remain off at all times Between these set points the anti sweat heaters will cycle in a six second window according to the humidity level Frost Sensor Y es N o N If a Demand Defrost Sensor is installed at the selected case enter Y es in the Frost Sensor field Demand Defrost set points may then be defined at the Circuit Setpoints 3 screen see Section 11 4 48 Circuit Set Points 3 Add Edit Circuit 11 4 32 CCB Set Point Screen 2 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only CCB ALARMS CCB 01SDIC O1c Refr Leak Leak Alm Lvl Leak Alm Dly Coil 2 Out Bypassed Vlv Door Alm Delay SET DATA T PREV Case alarm control includes the generation of alarms when the RMCC detects coil in or coil out sensor failures or when it detects a refrigerant leak An alarm is a high lev el warning that creates an entry in the RMCC Alarm Log and may be accompanied by a contact closure for on site operation of a bell light horn etc An alarm may also ini tiate an alarm dialout sequence and or the activation of the 485 Alarm Panel 11 34 Circuit Defrost Control The alarm configuration for each case is defined at the CCB Alarms screen Coil 1 In Y es N o Y To generate an alarm when the RMCC detects a Coi
108. the RMCC must wait before shutting down the compres sors after the Trip Point is reached Autoreset 2 99 Ib 50 0 After the trip point has been reached and the RMCC has shut down all compressors the compressors are au tomatically reset when the discharge pressure falls to an acceptable level This reduction in pressure is defined in the Autoreset field This value must be lower than the Trip Point Therefore if the trip point is set to 350 pounds and the autoreset value is 50 pounds the com pressors will reset at 300 pounds Max Decrease Rate 0 9999 2000 The Maximum Decrease Rate is the maximum rate at which the speed of the compressor may be decreased Altern Strategy Y es N o N Normal compressor operation dictates that a variable speed compressor be the first compressor on and the last compressor off in a compressor group Users may define an alternative strategy to bring on whichever compressor is most closely matched to the current system suction pres sure demanded by entering Y for Yes in the Altern Strat egy field Off on Failure Y es N o N The Off on Failure feature allows the user to define the compressor status when an inverter failure is detected with in the system When an inverter failure is detected by the inverter alarm input defined at the Input Definitions screens see Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions the RMCC will attempt to reset the inverter three times Note that fo
109. the EEV to a fixed valve percentage This percentage is the Bypassed Valve Per centage The fail safe function maintains an adequate de gree of refrigeration during alarm situations Door Alm Delay 0 120 minutes 15 If a Door Switch is defined at the Circuit Set Points 4 screen see Section 11 4 49 Circuit Set Points 4 Add Edit Circuit the Door Alarm Delay may be defined in the Door Alm Delay field The Door Switch disables refriger ation turns off fans and turns on all lights within the walk in cooler When switched again any calls for refrigeration and fans are reactivated and all lights are turned off How ever if the switch is not switched back after the designated Door Alarm Delay an Open Door Alarm will be generated and the cooler will return to normal operation 11 4 33 CCB Set Points Screen 2 Suction Stepper Only CCB ALARMS 01 501 01 Refr Leak Leak Alm Lvl Leak Alm Dly Extra1 Tmp YES Extra2 YES Door Alm Delay T PREV J NEXT gt SET DATA Refr Leak Y es N o N To activate an alarm when a defined amount of refrig erant is detected by a leak sensor enter Y es in the Refr Leak field Leak Alm Lvl 1 100 100 The Leak Alarm Level is an amount of refrigerant that when detected by a leak sensor activates an alarm Enter the Leak Alarm Level in parts per million in the Leak Alm Lvl field RMCC I amp O Ma
110. the actual kW and send a voltage range defined by a minimum and maximum voltage Maximum and Minimum Voltage 0 12 Enter the minimum and maximum voltage sent by the kW transducer in the appropriate fields Power at Maximum 0 3200 To translate the voltage reading into a kW reading cor rectly the RMCC requires the kW reading when the maxi mum voltage is being supplied Enter the kW value in the maximum voltage in the Power at Maximum field The RMCC assumes the minimum voltage represents a value of Zero Cem Besipion Wwe wes 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11 8 1 Input Definitions rotary dials on the 8IO board The number entered in the Board Number field is used by the RMCC in conjunction Er E 4 with the Point address defined below to locate the selected INPUT DEFINITION Sensor 0 Pt 1 16 Each input sensor is physically connected to a specific point on an input communication board The point numbers T PREV J NEXT gt SET DATA are printed on the board above the input connections This point address is used by the RMCC in conjunction with the board address to locate the selected sensor 0 0 0 0 All inputs connected to the 16AI or 8IO boards con figured at the Input Definitions screen Each input is iden tified according to its board and point addre
111. the defrost time If an input is configured as a demand defrost input the CCB will check the demand defrost state before entering the defrost state If no demand defrost is present the CCB will not enter the defrost state unless overridden by an emergency defrost command Defrost control is configured through the RMCC Refer to Section 7 System Navigation 8 4 Defrost Control 8 5 When the CCB is powered up either for the first time or after a power failure it sits idle for a period of 72 sec onds before beginning case control During this time the CCB waits for communication with an RMCC to begin If communication with the RMCC is begun the CCB starts normal case control at that time If after 72 seconds no communication is established with the RMCC the CCB as sumes that no RMCC is available and begins control on its own If the CCB is controlling a stepper valve the valve is fully closed during start up to ensure that the position of the valve is known when normal control is reestablished After start up recovery is initiated System Start Up 8 6 System Recovery Mode The CCB may exit recovery mode early and begin normal superheat control if after 24 seconds super heat is greater than 150 percent of the superheat set point Recovery occurs when the valve has been fully closed because either the temperature set point was satisfied or be cause of defrost or system start up recovery sequence is neces
112. the last input or output board on the network The term daisy chain is sometimes applied to this open loop arrangement The REFLECS is configured to monitor and control two separate RS485 input output communication net works These two networks are labeled as either COM A or COM D Each network is capable of supporting up to 31 separate input or output boards plus the single REFLECS controller This means that a single REFLECS can monitor or control up to sixty two individual input or output boards Figure 4 1 shows the I O network configurations The concept of a loop is critical to operation of the I O network The REFLECS cannot properly interact with the input and output boards unless the boards are connected and identified within the confines of the loop The I O net work is always identified as COM A or COM D on the con troller Input and output communication boards are configured with a RS485 network connection only which can be used to connect the board to either COM A or COM D In addition to the primary loop arrangement a single star configuration may be connected to the loop A more in RMCC I amp O Manual depth explanation of CPC network wiring practices is pro vided in Section 4 4 Wiring NETWORK COM A or D CPC input OR OUTPUT BOARD 26513041 Figure 4 1 Network Loop Wiring Configurations 4 2 RS485 Host Network COM B
113. the type network modem used with the remote network Refer to the modem user s manual for specific baud rate information Parity N one O dd E ven N Data Bits 7 or 8 8 The following two fields represent the Parity and Data Bits values The RMCC automatically calculates the appro priate settings required for the remote network to commu nicate properly according to the specified baud rate settings Refer to the modem user s manual for specific Parity and Data Bits information Initialization String Enter String Modems are initiated by receiving an attention code followed by the appropriate command or set of commands the modem should implement This command set or ini tialization string is different for most modem vendors The 11 8 11 Modem Initialization CPC supplies a standard 9600 baud modem for use with the RMCC RS232 COM C network however most stan dard modems with a baud rate of at least 9600 are suffi cient The RMCC stores communication settings for 11 60 Configuration initialization string for the modem operating within the re mote network is defined in the Initialization String field The RMCC stores modem settings for several frequent ly used types of modems Initialization strings for these modems may be copied to the Initialization String field at the Modem Initialization screen see Section 11 8 11 Mo dem Initialization Send Now Y es N o N Response To
114. types supported 8 4 demand defrost operation 8 4 early recovery based on super heat 8 4 fail safe conditions 8 6 fail safe operation 8 6 fan control 8 5 fan operation during defrost 8 4 light control 8 5 for walk in boxes 8 5 liquid side temperature control 8 recovery mode 8 4 sensor failure calculation of coil inlet tem perature 8 6 coil inlet 8 6 coil inlet and coil outlet 8 6 coil outlet 8 6 discharge air 8 6 evaporator control during 8 Sporlan valve settings 8 3 start up mode 8 4 suction side temperature control 8 2 superheat control 8 1 valve control 8 2 8 4 pulse valve 8 3 stepper valve 8 3 8 4 wash mode control 8 5 Case Controller case controller power module features 6 2 6 3 differences between pulse and stepper 6 1 dimensions of 7 1 input cable harness 6 2 mounting 7 1 optional inputs and outputs 7 2 output cable harness 6 2 power module types 6 2 power requirements 7 1 prohibition against use of center tap 7 1 pulse type features 6 1 standard components 6 1 stepper type features 6 1 valve control capabilities 8 3 Case Lights light schedules standard circuit 11 24 light strategy 11 41 CCBs See Case Controller Checkit Sensor Index 1 1 hardware software settings B 2 set points 11 5 setup 11 5 Circuits Case Control 11 32 alarms CPC suction stepper extra temp 11 35 leak alarm delay 11 35 leak alarm level 11 35 refrigerant leak 11 35 liquid pulse stepper coil sen
115. 0 on the dial 5 8 1 2 LED Indicator Lights Each board contains a LED Power Indicator Light This light indicates if the board is receiving power It also indi cates if the board is on line with the network by sending a pulsing signal 5 9 Fail Safe and Relay Dip Switch Settings CPC uses two fail safe devices on its output boards a dip switch and jumpers These two devices are used to pro vide fail safe operation of equipment in the event of either power loss or network communication loss The use of these devices differs depending on the board or controller Boards using Form C contacts do not have fail safe de vices since the contacts are wired for the position required during power loss but have a dip switch which illuminates the LED relay indicator depending on the contact position 5 9 1 8RO The 8RO has both a fail safe dip switch S2 to force the contacts open or closed if the network fails and a jump er for each output JU4 through JU11 that forces the con tact open or closed during a power loss Figure 5 14 shows the possible settings for the dip switch and jumpers SWITCH 1 AND JUMPER JU4 FOR RELAY 1 THE SWITCH SETTING SHOWN ALLOWS THE RELAY TO CLOSE ON LOSS OF COMMUNICATION THE JUMPER SETTING ALLOWS THE RELAY H H TO CLOSE ON A POWER LOSS JUS FOR RELAY 2 THE SWITCH SETTING SHOWN 2 7 8 ALLOWS THE RELAY TO OPEN ON No 4 LOSS OF COMM
116. 0 Network Address Settings for Dip Switch S1 or S3 on I O Boards Numbering 810 Boards The 8IO board uses rotary dials to set the network ad dress instead of dip switches The rotary dial S1 is used to define the output portion of the board Therefore the board may only be defined as board 1 through 9 Likewise dial 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 S2 is used to define the input portion of the board and may be set from 1 to 9 LED Indicator Lights Each board contains a green LED Power Indicator Light This light indicates whether or not the board is receiving power It is also a good indication if the board is on line when the LED pulses 4 14 Baud Rate Settings The COM A and D networks may be set to either 4800 9600 19 200 or 38 400 baud Positions one and two of the dip switch located on the processor board of the RMCC are used to set the baud rate A different baud rate setting may not be set for the COM A and D networks Positions six and seven on dip switch S1 of the 4AO 8RO and 8RO FC and switch S3 of the 16AI are used to set the baud rate for the communication boards This baud rate should match the setting for the RMCC Figure 4 11 shows the possible baud rate settings and dip switch posi tions for the COM A and D networks COM B COM AAND D BAUD RATE BAUD RAE PRESET AT 4800 COM AAND D BAUD EN ERR dut 8RO AND 8RO FC SWITCH S1 16 SWITCH 3 7 8
117. 000 0 Power at Maximu 0500 0 KW 00 00 00000 00000 00 00 CONFIGURATION 12 00 ll Input Definitions 5 Xducer Setup B Output Definitions 6 Host Network B System Information 7 1 0 Brd Setup Remote Communication 8 8 Comm INPUT DEFINITIONS 72 00 OUTPUT DEFINITIONS 72 00 SYSTEM INFORMATION 12 00 COMMUNICATIONS SETUP 72 00 TRANSDUCER OFFSETS 12 00 HOST NETWORK MENU 12 00 170 BOARD MENU 12 00 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION 12 00 Input Bd Pt Input Bd Pt Output Bd Pt Output Bd Pt Unit Name REFRIG MOINTOR amp CONTROL knit fs 01 Baud Rate 9600 N 1 ONLINE Status 3 Reset 1 ONLINE Status 3 Reset prs 00 00 tme 00 00 01 00 OG 02 00 00 Date 01 10 96 Time 05 20 WED nitialization String Group 1 Suction 00 0 2 Set Device s 2 Set Device s Enable Satellite Mode N DSCH PRESS 00 OO DsScH TEMP 00 00 CMPO3 00 00 04 00 00 ab axbeW Group 2 Suction 00 0 SPARE 00 00 SPARE 00 00 05 00 00 lt 06 00 00 Passwords 1 100 3 300 For Help Go To the Next Screen Group 3 Suction 00 0 Disconnect Message NO CARRIER SPARE 00 00 00 00 CMPOT DO 00 8 00 00 2 200 4 400 Send Now NO Reset at Midnight Group 4 Suction 00 0 Response Discharge Press 00 0 EPREV NEXT gt SET DATA __ gt SET DATA 0 H PREV I NEXT gt
118. 0000 00000 00000 00000 08000 00000 NORM NORM NORM NORM NORM NORM Inlet Pres Offset 00 0 Inlet Pres Offset 00 0 Curr Ambient Reclaim OFF Control Source DISCH RGE Throttle Range 0005 Outlet Pres Offset 00 0 Outlet Pres Of fset 00 0 Curr FANS Control Type PRESSURE Shift During Reclaim 000 0 ni 18 9 4200 12 7 8 8 10 12 10 2 3 46 7 8 29 10 11 12 Condenser Fan s Type SINGLE SPEED 80000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 NORM NORM NORM NORM NORM NORM T PREV gt 5 gt SET DATA gt SET DATA T PREV 1 gt SET DATA T PREV gt SET DATA CONDENSER PRESSURE INPUTS SETUP CONDENSER SETPOINTS 12 00 CONDENSER FAN DELAYS SETUP 18 00 CONDENSER FAN DELAYS SETUP 12 00 Inlet Pres Offset 00 0 Curr hi Fast Recovery Setpoint NONE Fan Minimum On Time 000 Fan Minimum Qn Time 000 Outlet Pres Offset 00 0 Curr E 5 Fast Recovery Hystersis 002 0 Fan Minimum Off Time 000 Fan Minimum Off Time 000 Low Pressure Cutoff Setpoint Low Pressure Cutoff Hystersi T PREV 4 NEXT gt SET DATA T PREV SET DATA 4 1 gt 5 T PREV 1 gt 5 T PREV J NEXT gt SET DATA CONDENSER FAN DELAYS SETUP 12 00 i CONDENSER SETPOINTS SINC LE CONDENSER 2 SPEED FAN SETUP 12 00 CONDENSER VS FAN SETUP 12 00 Fan Minimum Qn Time 00 1 Unsplit Setpoint Fan High Output 2 pd Relay 2 VS Min
119. 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Refrigeration Monitor and Case Control Installation and Operation Manual E Q CLL COMPUTER PROCESS CONTROLS 1640 Airport Road Suite 104 Kennesaw GA 31044 Phone 770 425 2724 Fax 770 425 9319 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED The information contained in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate However Com puter Process Controls Inc assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained herein In no event will Computer Process Controls Inc be liable for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages resulting from any defect or omission in this manual even if advised of the possibility of such damages In the interest of continued product development Computer Process Controls Inc reserves the right to make improvements to this manual and the products described herein at any time without notice or obligation THIS PRODUCT IS AN FCC CLASS A DIGITAL DEVICE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equip ment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with this instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio com mu
120. 05 Input Output or I O Control is a method of controlling refrigeration and building control using user configured modules that both interpret and manipulate data from input components and monitor and control mechanical equip ment The traditional approach to component control is through the use of applications Applications are boiler plate programs that provide the user with a fill in the blank method of controlling common building functions Such systems are flexible only in that the existing inputs out puts settings and set points are configured by the user the ability to manipulate and customize the control framework is nonexistent when using the applications approach Most standard refrigeration circuit control condenser control and lighting schedule control functions still use the applications approach These common control functions require the ability to simultaneously control many compo nents with similar or different set points While applications are a quick easy to understand way to control conditions within a building they do suffer from a lack of flexibility Many of today s refrigeration control environments require a greater degree of latitude that al lows for complex overriding and scheduling features not available with the traditional applications approach 9 8 Sensor Control I O Control while sacrificing the boilerplate ease of ap plications provides the user with the ability to completely cu
121. 1 Wash Mode Parameters 8 10 Fail Safe Mode Liquid Side Control Only Under the following conditions the CCB will enter fail safe mode 1 Corruption detected in case and circuit set points The CCB will revert to the default settings as de scribed in the tables within this section 2 Unrecoverable sensor failure s The CCB will cal culate a sensor value or use a default setting as de scribed below 8 10 1 Evaporator Control During Tem perature Sensor Failure During a temperature sensor failure the case controller must compensate for the lost data by either performing a calculation to define an alternate value or using data al ready defined at an alternate source The case controller is designed to compensate for several sensor failures coil in let coil outlet both coil inlet and outlet and discharge air Coil Inlet Sensor Failure If the coil inlet reads open or short or if the coil inlet temperature reading is 20 F above the control set point for 10 minutes the case controller will go into sensor bypass During sensor bypass the case controller calculates the coil inlet temperature as follows Coil Inlet Coil Outlet Control Set Point 12 Example 8 6 Fail Safe Mode Liquid Side Control Only Case Set Point 20 Coil Inlet Open or Short bypass Coil Outlet 15 15 20 12 7 calculated inlet temperature Coil Outlet Sensor Failure If the coil outlet reads open or short or if
122. 102 Rev 4 08 12 99 CIRCUIT CONTROL 12 00 1 Standard Circuit 2 Case Control SELECT NUMBER O MENU CIRCUIT CONTROL 12 00 1 Circuit Status 6 Logs Graphs 2 Circuit Set Points 7 Summary 31 Set Points BlLight Schedules amp iRlarm Set Points 9 Setup 5 Manual Defrost SELECT NUMBER 12 00 12 00 ELECT ITEM 12 00 12 00 ANUAL MODES 12 00 FCIRCUIT STATUS 1 12 00 BET UP MENU 12 00 Circuit number 1 Circuit number 1 501 01 Circuit number 1 SDIC O1c Circuit number 1 STATUS TERM Lite Group numbe 1 Refr 0 0 1 Add Edit Circuit 4 Bd Pt Assignment 2 Refr 0 0 2 Board Cct Assgn 5 0111 3 Refr 0 0 3 CCB Logging Times Anti Sweat Setup 4 Refr 0 0 Enter Item 5 Refr 0 0 CLROEsC CIRCUIT 01 STATUS SDIC O1c 12 00 FCIRCUIT SETPOINTS 1 SDIC O1c 12 00 SELECT ITEM 12 00 ALARM SETPOINTS 5010 01 12 00 SELECT ITEM 12 00 SCHEDULE 1 OFF 12 00 01 Case Boards befr Duration 000 Control Temp 000 0 01 CCB 01 Case Temp ALARM NOTICE 1 8010 01 From until Event o Bath Event SEE FOLLOWING PAGE Case 01 01 rain Time an Hi Alarm NONE NONE i Status On Terminate Temp 000 0 D R Weighting N A Hi Delay 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 0 00 00 SETUP SCREENS Temp 007 0 8 Defrost 4th Defrost Lo Alarm NONE NONE 00 00 00 00 0 00 00 Term 000 0 Defrost NONE 5th Defrost Lo Delay 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 0 00 00 3rd Defrost 6th De
123. 10s OIL SENS 1800 rpm Automatic Oil Reset NO OIL PRES 2000 rpm minute 5 2000 rpm minute PROOF OFF on Failur N i P REV NEXT gt SET DATA PREV gt 5 gt 5 gt SET DATA 0 of Q 12 00 SUCT DCHG SETPOINT FLOAT T Suction NONE NONE NONE Discharg A A NONE NONE NONE NONE Pump Dow A A A A NONE NONE NONE NONE Qil Fail NONE NONE NONE NONE Phase N NONE NONE NONE T PREY 1 NEXT 8ET A gt SET DATA CheckIt SENSOR SETUP 12 00 PRESSURE LOGGING INTERVAL 12 00 PRESSURE SETUP 12 00 Alarm Setpoints 150 Delay 030 m Phase Y Notice Setpoint 135 belay 030 m Force Comp On During Defr Y Disabled During Hot Gas N Delay 000 m ALL Groups 00 03 00 Run Comp During Reclaim Y Disabled During Reclaim N One Comp Always Remain 00 1 Grp2 N Grp3 N gt 5 gt T PREV 4 NEXT gt SET DATA TWO STAGE SYSTEM SETUP 12 00 Low Suction Group 0 High Suction Group 0 gt SET DATA oe eB TWO SPEED VARIABLE SPEE SETUP SCREENS SETUP SCREENS TU CONDENSER SETUP CONDENSER SETPOINTS CONDENSER RUNTIMES Te 00 CONDENSER BYPASS Te 00 CONDENSER PRESSURE INPUTS SETUP 12 00 CONDENSER PRESSURE INPUTS SETUP 12 00 Control Value sas PRESSURE Ei Fo r6 Fe F3 F4 F5 F6 Setpoint 200 0 Control Strategy AIR COOLED Setpoint 800 0 0
124. 11 14 Condenser Control attempt is unsuccessful the RMCC shuts off the fan After a specified number of attempts are made to clear the fan see below the fan will be considered failed and will be bypassed OFF Num Clear Attempts 0 240 0 The number of clear attempts the RMCC will make be fore considering a fan to be failed is entered in this field Delay Between Clear Attempts 0 3600 sec 30 sec The Delay Between Clear Attempts value is the number of seconds the RMCC will wait between clear attempts No Relays Neither relay will be closed during high speed operation Relays 1 and 2 must be defined as C1 2S REL 1 and 25 REL 2 in the Output Definitions section see Section 11 8 2 Output Definitions Fan Low Output 1 2Spd Relay 1 2 2Spd Relay 2 0 Both Relays N o Relays 1 The relay or relays chosen in the Fan Low Output field are closed when the RMCC calls for low speed output on the condenser fans Options for this field are the same as for the Fan High Output field above except the default setting is 2 Spd Relay 1 Fan Off Output 1 2Spd Relay 1 2 2Spd Relay 2 0 Both Relays N o Relays N The relay or relays chosen in the Fan Off Output field are closed when the RMCC calls for the condenser fans to be turned off Options for this field are the same as for the Fan High Output field above except the default setting is No Relays Start Spee
125. 11 2 Main Menu MAIN MENU 12 00 1 Pressure Control 2 Condenser Control 3 Circ Defr Control 4 Sensor Control 5 Status 6 Power Monitor 7 Configuration 8 Graphs 9 Alarms SELECT NUMBER ENT LOGOFF 11 2 1 Pressure Control PRESSURE MENU 12 00 1 Status ress Setpts Speed Setpts Setpts ixed Steps trategy Setup 6 P 2 Bypass 7 V 3 Alarms 8 Float 4 Logs 9 F 5 Comp Setup S SELECT NUMBER 11 2 Log On hovel password Actions Alowed Level Password Actions Allowed 1 100 Manual Defrost Acknowledge and Reset Alarms Bypass Compressors and Fans 2 200 Level 100 plus Adjust Set Points Clear Alarm Logs 3 300 Level 200 plus Perform Setup Functions 4 400 Level 300 plus Unit Configuration Edit System Information Edit Communication Informa tion Table 11 1 Password Levels and Available Tasks Cem Besson Pave dC Page 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 tem Desorption Pase Compressor Setup Variable Speed Compressor Set Points 8 Floating Suction Set Points 09 Fixed Steps Strategy Setup 11 2 2 Bypass COMPRESSOR BYPASS 01 NORM CO6 NORM NORM 1 C02 NORM c03 c04 c05 T PREV gt SET DATA The bypass commands for compressors are retained by the RMCC even if pow
126. 13 1 13 2 power demand status 13 10 pressure control 13 11 sensor 13 8 override 13 9 14 3 standard circuit 13 4 inputs 11 20 statistics 11 20 summary 13 4 variable speed compressors 13 3 Stepper Valve Control See Case Control valve control Suction Groups See Pressure Con trol Superheat Control 8 1 System Configuration Guide 10 1 Define Inputs 10 2 System Settings date time and day 11 55 T Terminating Resistance Jumpers 4 3 Transducers Discharge Pressure setup 11 61 Transducers Oil Pressure offsets 11 61 setup 11 61 Transducers Pressure See Sensors Pressure Transducers Index 1 6 Transducers Refrigerant See Sen sors refrigerant transduc ers Transformers Wiring Six Board 5 7 Wiring Ten Board 5 8 Wiring Three Board 5 7 wiring to case controller 7 2 U UltraSite defined 2 6 list of user guides 2 7 Units Engineering 11 57 11 58 Unloaders See Compressors unload ers W Wiring 4 2 legs and segments 4 2 number of devices per seg ment 4 2 wire lengths 4 2 Power Connections Transformers 5 7 power requirements for I O boards 5 7 Specifications 5 1 Transformers 5 7 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99
127. 2 00 PEWPOINT HUMIDITY OFFSETS 12 00 CIRCUIT INPUTS SETUP 12 00 Input Name Tmp1 Irmi bewpt F CALL ON 65 0 ALL OFF 25 0 Dewpoint Offset 00 0 F Location 00 00 00 00 Percent ON during ALL OFF 0 Humidity Offset 00 0 X Log Interval 00 00 00 00 00 00 ALL ON 100 Bypass NONE NONE Current Today Sensor Type Temp Digit ON Time 100 0 Offset 0000 0 0000 0 4 MENU MEN T PREV 4 ANTI SWEAT OUTPUTS STATUS 72 00 ff ANTI SWEAT OUTPUTS SETUP 12 00 CIRCUIT OUTPUTS SETUP 12 00 Override ON OFF Interval 010 sec Output Name Dfr Name Status Time Left Name Location 00 00 00 00 1 000 n Log Interval 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 000 2 Norm Norm E 000 5 Run Time 00000 00000 4 000 ae REV f ALARM SETPOINTS 12 00 1 ALARM NOTICE Hi Alarm NONE NONE Hi Delay 0000 0000 Lo Alarm NONE NONE Lo Delay 0000 0000 gt SET DATA ADVANCED DEFROST 1 12 00 Setup Advanced Defrost Options NO NOTE There is no additional setup if you select NO 1 gt SET DATA O MENU CIRCUIT SETUP 1 12 00 ADVANCED DEFROST OPTIONS Host Compressor Group 0 Hot Gas Defrost Type Standard Compressor Start Delay 02 Defrost Suction Setpt 10 0 gt SET DATA CIRCUIT SETUP 1 12 00 DEFROST LOAD SHEDDING OPTIONS Host Compressor Group 0 Electric defrost Amps 0000 gt 5 D 2 RMCC Front Panel Screens 026 1
128. 2 00 5 Reset Host Inputs 11 8 16 0n Line Status Refer to the description of the Host Network State in Section 13 2 5 Host Network Status 2716112 HOST BUS DEVICES This Controller is Device 1 Alarm If Another Device Fails N Test Host Net for New Devices N This Controller is Device 1 16 1 Each RMCC must have a defined device number when more than one RMCC is being used No two RMCCs may have the same device number If other non RMCC RE FLECS controllers are connected to the host network each 11 8 18 Reset 11 62 Configuration Cie Pase Presta must be identified as well Device numbering for each RE FLECS type always begins with the number 1 To define a device number for the current RMCC enter the appropriate device number in the Device field RMCC unit numbers should be assigned in numerical order starting with one Alarm If Another Device Fails Y es N o N To activate an alarm if a controller stops communicat ing select Y es in the Alarm If Another Device Fails field Test Host Net for New Devices Y es N o N The RMCC is capable of searching for any new device defined to the host network To activate this feature select Y es in the Test Host Net for New Devices field After all REFLECS controllers have been wired and configured test each host net for new devices Do not select Reset if a 485
129. 4 29 CCB Set Point Screen 1 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only 25 zu Hla j r 2J CS gt 5 The Electronic Expansion Valve EEV is an electroni cally controlled expansion valve that is cycled via pulse width modulation PWM The EEV regulates the opera tion of the evaporator based on superheat measurements from two sensors located at the inlet and outlet of the evap orator Set points for the control of the evaporator are de fined at the CCB Set Points screen Superheat Set Point Supht Setpnt 3 247 8 0 The term superheat refers to the temperature differen tial across the evaporator coil coil outlet coil inlet The Superheat Set Point is the superheat temperature the RMCC will maintain within the selected case Degree units are determined by the unit selected at the System Units screen see Section 11 8 7 System Units Revision The current CCB software revision is automatically displayed in the Revision field Sensitivity 0 9 4 Sensitivity is a value that either increases or decreases the reaction of the EEV to superheat changes The lower the sensitivity the slower the reaction time the higher the sensitivity the faster the reaction time For a more detailed explanation of sensitivity see Section 5 3 1 3 Valve Con trol Recovery 10 100 70 System Recovery mode occurs when the valve has been fully closed because either the temperature set point was satisfie
130. 5 3 1 3 Valve Control Network whether the host network is ON or OFF Sensitivity the valve s sensitivity value This may be changed using the HHT See Section 5 3 1 3 Valve Control for a complete definition of sensitivity Kd x10 the derivative gain value for the valve multiplied by ten See Section 11 4 37 CCB Set Points Screen 4 CPC Suction Stepper Only for a complete definition of derivative gain UpdateRate the valve s update rate See Section 5 3 1 2 Temperature Control for more in formation Ctrl Type the method the CCB uses to combine the discharge air sensors into a control tem perature value Pressing RIGHT followed by a 0 1 or 2 will define the combination strat egy 0 AVG The control temperature is the average of all the discharge sensor readings 1 MIN The control temperature is the lowest of all the discharge sensor readings 2 MAX The control temperature is the highest of all the discharge sensor readings Case Type the case type number See Section 11 4 16 Circuit Setup 1 for a complete list of case types and their corresponding numbers This may be changed using the HHT Case the CCB number 15 8 Hand Held Terminal Screens 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 15 4 Hussmann Suction Stepper HHT Screens Case Type the four letter case type code See Section 11 4 16 Circuit Setup 1 for a complete table of codes Rev the software revision number Status the system is op
131. 6 2 1 The RMCC may be configured to wait a specified time period before reentering refrigeration to allow the evapora tor coil to dry Drain Time 9 6 2 2 Pump Down Delay The RMCC may be configured to pump down the evap orator coil for a specified period to ensure that refrigerant is not present in the coil when defrost begins 9 6 2 3 Demand Defrost The RMCC may be configured to monitor a Demand defrost optical sensor When the RMCC reaches a sched uled defrost time it first determines if the sensor has detect ed frost buildup on the coil If no frost is detected the defrost time is skipped At each subsequent defrost time the sensor is checked and the same determination is made by the RMCC A fail safe time may be entered to ensure that defrost is initiated if the sensor is malfunctioning 9 7 In a case controlled refrigeration system each Case Control Board is capable of operating a single anti sweat heater Independent of the Case Controllers however the RMCC is also capable of controlling a single circuit of up to eight heaters which may be used in standard refrigera tion circuits or for other applications Anti sweat control in Anti Sweat Control RMCC I amp O Manual non case controlled RMCC networks requires a Pulse Modulating Anti Sweat Control panel P N 809 1105 Case controlled anti sweat may control the case heaters using either the humidity or dewpoint value see Anti Sweat Control page
132. 7 Set Floating Suction Set Points Groups 1 4 are Accessible from this Screen Section 11 2 12 Group 1 Floating Suction 8 Define Group Control Strategy Groups 1 4 are Accessible from this Screen Section 11 2 13 Group 1 Strategy Setup 10 3 Setup Condensers 1 Condenser Setup Section 11 3 1 Condenser Setup 2 Define Condenser Input amp Output Pressure Section 11 3 2 Condenser Pressure Inputs Setup Air Cooled amp Temp Diff Strategies Only 3 Define Condenser Fan Delays Section 11 3 4 Condenser Fan Delays Setup 4 Setup Condenser Fan Single Speed Condenser Fan Section 11 3 5 Condenser Single Speed Setup Screens Two Speed Condenser Fan Section 11 3 6 Condenser Two Speed Fan Setup Variable Speed Condenser Fan Section 11 3 7 Variable Speed Setup Screens 5 Define Condenser Fan Fail For Single Speed Fans Section 11 3 5 3 Condenser Fan Fail Setup For Two Speed Fans Section 11 3 6 3 Condenser Fan Fail Setup 6 Define Condenser Split Setpoints Single Speed Condenser Fans Only Section 11 3 10 Condenser Split Setpoints RMCC I amp O Manual System Configuration Guide 10 1 10 4 Setup Standard Circuits 1 Setup Standard Circuit Screen 1 Section 11 4 16 Circuit Setup 1 Screen 2 Section 11 4 17 Circuit Setup 2 2 Define Standard Circuit Set Points Screen 1 Section 11 4 18 Circuit Set Points 1 Screen 2 Section 11 4 19 Circuit Set Points 2 Screen 3 Section 11 4 20
133. 85 Alarm Panel Sensor alarm set points are defined at the Alarm Set points screen This screen will display only those sensors defined at the Circuit Setup screens Alarm delays are also defined at this screen When the RMCC generates an alarm or a notice it must wait the specified time delay before ac tivating the alarm sequence Pressing the down arrow key will allow users to specify tion of alarms or notices when specific control values ex ceed HI and LO alarm set points When the current input sensor reading exceeds the user defined HI and LO alarm alarm and notice set points for other sensors 14 2 Case Control Alarm Set Points Refer to the description of Alarm Set Points in Section 14 1 Alarm Set Points 14 3 Case Control Alarm Set Points Add Edit Circuit Refer to the description of Alarm Set Points on Section 14 1 Alarm Set Points DAMM a i 14 4 Sensor Alarm Setpoints Alarm Control within the RMCC includes the genera tion of alarms or notices when specific control values ex ceed HI and LO alarm set points When the current sensor reading exceeds the user defined HI and LO alarm set points an alarm or notice will be generated These Sensor Alarm Set Points are defined at the Sensor Alarm Setpoints screen S 44 4 AENT SENSOR ALARM SETPOINTS No 03 Name AMBIENT Type Temp Eng Unit dF 0100 Low 0055 NONE Low NONE Alarms HI Notices HI GH GH
134. 99 At times a sensor may provide a reading that reads low er or higher than the known condition being monitored An offset value may be entered in the Offset field to calibrate the sensor to actual conditions When an offset is made to a sensor that value is then displayed in all status screens and the actual or raw value will no longer appear 11 5 3 Set Points for Linear sensor types only n T SENSOR SETPOINTS LINEAR INPUT 4 01 Status ON Name Stay ON 000 min Eng i f 01 00 Using Diff Of 0 of 0 0 Offset Gain 0 ON D pLy 10000 gt 5 OFF 0 T PREV J NEXT If the Sensor Type chosen in Section 11 5 1 Setup was set to IRLDS this version of the Sensor Setpoints screen will appear All other sensor types use the Sensor Setpoints screen as shown in Section 11 5 4 or Section 11 5 2 The Sensor Setpoints Linear Input screen allows users to set up a generic linear sensor by specifying a gain an off set and cut on cut off set points Stay ON for 0 240 min 0 min The number entered in the Stay ON For field is the min imum number of minutes the sensor s output must remain on after the ON set point is reached Eng Unit 5 characters max The RMCC reads a signal from the sensor and com pares the signal to the sensor type to determine the correct analog value Therefore units of measure ar
135. Alarms Notices Setup The RMCC will generate an alarm and shut down all compressors when the measured suction pressure falls to a specified Pump Down set point Compressors will remain shut down until the suction pressure rises to the Suction Pressure Set Point defined at the Group 1 4 Pressure Set Points screens see Section 11 2 10 Group 1 Pressure Set Points Define the Pump Down Suction Pressure set point in the Pump Down field Dly 0 240 seconds 10 The Pump Down Delay is the specified duration the measured suction pressure must remain below the Pump Down set point before the RMCC will generate an alarm Automatic Oil Reset Y es N o N In screw compressor applications where low oil condi tions are common it may be advantageous to provide an automatic reset whenever a low oil condition is recognized through a digital sensor closure When a low oil condition occurs the associated compressor will be shut down for 20 seconds After 20 seconds the RMCC will read the digital sensor relay again If the low oil condition remains the as sociated compressor will be turned on for 20 seconds The RMCC will run this oil pressure safety cycle three times On the third low oil pressure occurrence the RMCC yields alarm and safety control to the mechanical safety device in stalled on the compressor and turns the compressor off If at any time during the pressure safety cycle the RMCC finds normal oil pressure the associated co
136. Bad Message A problem has been detected on the I O Network Check System Now The alarm set point for a sensor defined as a Checkit monitor has been exceeded for the user defined delay duration see Section 11 2 5 Checkit Sensor Setup Check System Soon The notice set point for a sensor defined as a Checkit monitor has been exceeded for the user defined delay duration see Section 11 2 5 Checkit Sensor Setup Coil In A coil inlet sensor value is being generated by one of the sensor failure conditions described in Sec tion 5 3 1 10 Fail Safe Mode Liquid Side Control Only Coil Out A coil outlet sensor value is being generated by one of the sensor failure conditions described in Sec tion 5 3 1 10 Fail Safe Mode Liquid Side Control Only Coil2 In A coil 2 inlet sensor value is being generated by one of the sensor failure conditions described in Sec tion 5 3 1 10 Fail Safe Mode Liquid Side Control Only Coil2 Out A coil 2 outlet sensor value is being generated by one of the sensor failure conditions described in Section 5 3 1 10 Fail Safe Mode Liquid Side Control Only Condenser VS Fan Proof A failure has been detected in a variable speed condenser fan proof Condenser VS Inv Fail A failure has been detected in the inverter of a variable speed condenser Defr Timed A defrost event has timed out based on the defrost duration set point see Section 11 4 17 Circuit Setup 2 or Section 11 4 46 Circuit Set Points 1 Add Edit
137. CB Status 3 screen RMCC I amp O Manual Super Heat The current superheat calculation for the selected case is displayed in the Super Heat field The term superheat refers to the temperature differential across the evaporator coil coil outlet coil inlet Setpoint The current Superheat Set Point defined for the selected case is displayed in the Setpoint field This set point is de fined at the CCB Setpoints screen see Section 11 4 49 Circuit Set Points 4 Add Edit Circuit The Superheat Set Point is the superheat value the RMCC will maintain within the selected case Coil In The current Coil In Temperature within the selected case is displayed in the Coil In field Coil Out The current Coil Out temperature within the selected case is displayed in the Coil Out field 13 4 5 CCB Status 2 Suction Stepper Only Esta E e fo STATUS 01SD C 01 12 00 Fan Relay On ights On For suction stepper CCBs this status screen displays the current status of the demand defrost sensor s refriger ant leak sensor door switch extra temperature sensors fan relay and case lights Frost When the Demand Defrost feature is activated at the Circuit Set Points 3 screen see Section 11 4 48 Circuit Set Points 3 Add Edit Circuit the current status of the Demand Defrost Sensor is displayed in the Frost field Refr Leak The current reading from the refrigerant leak sensor is displ
138. Circuit Demand Time Out The duration since the last defrost event has exceeded the Demand Defrost alarm time see Section 11 4 20 Circuit Set Points 3 or Section 11 4 48 Circuit Set Points 3 Add Edit Circuit Device ONLINE A defined communication board that was previously not responding has come back on line Dialout Unsuccessful A user defined dialout sequence has failed Dig Alarm Override ON A contact closure has been detected at an input configured as a digital override input see Section 14 5 Alarm Overrides Discharge Tripped The discharge pressure has exceeded the user defined discharge trip point for a duration exceeding the trip delay see Section 11 2 10 Group 1 Pressure Set Points Fan 99 Proof A failure has been detected in a single speed condenser fan proof FP Level 999 Login User has logged into the system at the front panel at the 100 through 400 level Hi Humidity The high alarm value for a sensor defined as type has been exceeded for the user defined alarm delay duration see Section 14 4 Sensor Alarm Setpoints Hi I O Module A high alarm set point for an Analog Input Module has been exceeded Refer to P N 026 1002 Ultr aSite RMCC Supplement Section 21 1 Viewing Alarms High Avg Temp The average temperature of all cases within a CCB case circuit is high See Section 14 1 Alarm Set Points High Speed Proof A failure has been detected in the high speed fan proof of a double speed co
139. Circuit Set Points 3 Screen 4 Section 11 4 21 Circuit Set Points 4 Define Circuit Inputs Section 11 4 22 Circuit Inputs Setup Define Circuit Outputs Section 11 4 23 Circuit Output Setup Setup Advanced Defrost Section 11 4 24 Advanced Defrost abr oa ede Setup Advanced Defrost Option Hot Gas Section 11 4 25 Advanced Defrost Options Hot Gas Electric Section 11 4 26 Advanced Defrost Options Electric 10 5 Setup Case Control 1 Define CCB Set Points Screen 1 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only Section 11 4 29 CCB Set Point Screen 1 Liquid Pulse and Step per Only CPC Suction Stepper Only Section 11 4 30 CCB Set Points Screen I CPC Suction Stepper Only Hussmann Suction Stepper Only Section 11 4 31 CCB Set Points Screen I Hussmann Suction Stepper Only 2 Define CCB Set Points Screen 2 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only Section 11 4 32 CCB Set Point Screen 2 Liquid Pulse and Step per Only Suction Stepper Only Section 11 4 33 CCB Set Points Screen 2 Suction Stepper Only 3 Define CCB Set Points Screen 3 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only Section 11 4 34 CCB Set Point Screen 3 Liquid Pulse and Step per Only Suction Stepper Only Section 11 4 35 CCB Set Points Screen 3 Suction Stepper Only 4 Define CCB Set Points Screen 4 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only Section 11 4 37 CCB Set Points Screen 4 CPC Suction Stepper Only Stepper Only Section 11 4 38 CCB Stepper Set Points Scre
140. Command Output turns ON The initial value of the Count output is entered by the user as well as the amount the Count output is incremented every time an ON is detected If desired the Count cell may also be configured to turn on a digital output whenever the Count value exceeds a user specified Trip Setpoint This digital output called the Count Tripped output may be connected to a relay on an alarming device or it may be used as an input for another I O Module The Count output value is reset by sending a signal to the Reset Count input The user specifies whether the count will be reset when the Reset Count is ON OFF or transi tioning from ON to OFF When the appropriate type of sig nal is read from the Reset Count output the Count output reverts to the initial value specified by the user Counting may be suspended via the Suspend Count in put While this input is ON the Counter will not increment the Count output regardless of the state of the Command output Select The Select cell s primary function is to send either of two values to the Proof cell the output value from the Min On Off cell or the final Command Output value from the Override cell In most cases the final Command Output value would be used for proof checking since this Output will be mir roring the Proof input However for relays or modules that are controlled by digital pulses supplied by the One Shot cell the pulse from the output will not mat
141. Ct HERO Od reef 12 1 12 1 5 CCB Log Interval is sinrin aioir tete tese ERE Ue SUN e Ee ENE eet saepe Ea vede et ote 12 2 12 1 6 Sensor O98 ease Een po p Rp intere 12 2 127 Hourly Demand ea ve ER Ped RR Re e OE ee EORR 12 2 12 1 8 Daily Demand ter per pO PU I t E RH Pe E e a RR ER eed 12 2 viii Table of Contents 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 ADD E EE 12 3 12 2 1 Graph Control Screen eate oe eo ape iren seine ERI a 12 3 12 2 2 Graph View eed eio etr mde ER d ve ie m R E 12 3 LEE EM NBI LEO D ESTE 13 1 13 T MAIN STATUS SCREEN tete rtr x CR PERDU EEUU RE REOR REFUND LEE aE E 13 1 TILT CONDENS CP SIGHS css RE da an gena ui a 13 1 13 2 STATUS MENU ji erri ee ERIS PU ER CEP Ee EDAD EDEN RR SEEN RUE HERR eS 13 2 13 2 L MIM Status ose ent tete uerit quita bie tete ite cte au hte 13 2 132222 Status ftre ett ordre ger eae ERE ERO N 13 3 13 2 3 Variable Speed Status eec OPERE I SERE ERE doves Foe rede 13 3 13 2 4 I O Network Status I O Board Status eese eene nennen 13 3 13 2 5 t taie RATA NEA ERAS 13 3 13 3 CIRCUDITSA nti RE RO DERE E E RE ERU UE EROR RR 13 4 d MI Bu 13 4 132322
142. Delay 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 Enter Defaults No ist Defrost 4th Defrost NONE Lo Alarm NONE NONE Circuit Temp 0 0 0 0 End Defrost Sth Defrost NONE Lo Delay 0000 0000 Master 114 Line Solenoid None Term C 3rd Defrost 6th Defrost NONE Enter Ite a EE 1 gt SET DATA O MENU O MENU O MENU T PREV 1 gt SET DATA O MENU CIRCUIT INPUTS 01 12 00 FCIRCUIT SETPOINTS 1 12 00 12 00 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 12 00 CIRCUIT SETUP 1 12 00 Temp Cleaning Override Switch None NONE 0 682 Date Defrost Type Hot Gas Term Cleaning Switch Type Switched 000h NONE 1 00 00 Defrost Termination Type Stat NORMAL Wash Switch Cleaning Notice Enabled No NONE 3 00 00 Termination Sensors 0 Demand NONE 5 00 00 Temperature Strategy Full NONE 7 00 00 Temp Sensors Strategy 0 Avg NONE Fans On During Defrost No 4 gt SET DATA 1 4 gt SET DATA 1 4 gt SET DATA O MENU CIRCUIT STATISTICS 12 00 FCIRCUIT SETPOINTS 1 12 00 GRAPH CONTROLS FCIRCUIT SETPOINTS 1 12 00 CYCL Su Mo We Th Fr Sa befr Duration 000 Control Temp 000 0 R r o 0 o 0 o 0 o Demand Sensors 0 gt lt Scroll brain Time 000 Dead Band 000 0 Dir 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Demand Fail safe Time 000 hrs Go to current Temp 000 0 RUN A
143. ECKIT iYES SENS LO COMP PRES YES MISC gt 5 T PREV J NEXT If a Send Notices to 485 Alarm Panel field is set to YES both alarms and notices for the alarm types with in the category will be filtered Users may keep notices from being sent to the panel by setting the Send Notic es field in Section 11 8 3 to N Using the Send to 485 Alarm Panel screen users may choose which alarm types to send to the 485 Alarm Panel Alarm types within a category marked with a YES will be RMCC I amp O Manual Name The and Name fields display the sensor number and the sensor name respectively Ovrd The Ovrd field displays the number of the alarm over ride input assigned to each sensor St The St field displays the operational status either ON or OFF of the alarm override for each sensor Type The Type field shows whether the alarm override is fixed or timed for each sensor Time For timed overrides the amount of time remaining in the override duration is shown in the Time field sent to the 485 Alarm Panel alarm types within a category marked with a NO will not be sent to the alarm panel The ten different alarm filter categories and the alarm types within each category are listed below For additional information on alarm types see Table 14 1 on page 5 e Ckt Hi Circuit High This alarm type includes the Hi Temp and
144. G RANGE o m Hom DOD I 5 5 26512007 Figure 9 2 Typical PID Control SITE The RMCC controls temperature within the cases of a circuit by varying the suction pressure of a compressor group based on a user defined suction set point The suc tion pressure is adjusted by cycling compressors on or off or in the case of variable speed compressors adjusting the speed of the compressor The RMCC is capable of simultaneously controlling up to four compressor groups with a total of 16 compressor stages designated for any single group However no more than 22 compressor stages may be defined for a single RM Each compressor group may contain a single variable speed compressor and the RMCC is capable of controlling multiple stages of unloading within each group 9 4 1 Control Strategies The RMCC provides two methods for controlling suc tion pressure normal and fixed steps CPC recommends using normal control whenever possible since it provides a greater degree of control over the suction group 9 4 1 1 Normal PID Control The normal control strategy is a method of managing the suction group using PID control Normal control mea sures the suction pressure compares it to the suction pres sure set point and generates a PID output percentage from 0 100 This percentage corresponds to the percentage of total compressor horsepower that will be activated For ex ample if 15
145. HP In this field enter the horsepower of the fan or the total horsepower if more than one fan that is active when the condenser is operating at low speed 11 3 7 Variable Speed Setup Screens The following screens are accessible only if the Con denser Fan s Type field is set to Variable Speed Single and two speed setup screens are described in the Condens er Single Speed Fan Setup and the Condenser Two Speed Fan Setup sections on Section 11 3 5 Condenser Single Speed Setup Screens and Section 11 3 6 Condenser Two Speed Fan Setup respectively RMCC I amp O Manual High Speed HP 0 240 HP 100 HP In this field enter the horsepower of the fan or the total horsepower if more than one fan that is active when the condenser is operating at high speed 11 3 6 3 Condenser Fan Fail Setup CONDENSER FAN FAIL SETUP Fan Fail Enable Fan Fail Delay 10005 Continually try to Clear Failure 0 Num Clear Attempts Delay Between Clear Attempts 0030 sec T PREV gt SET DATA Refer to Condenser Fan Fail Setup on Section 11 3 5 3 Condenser Fan Fail Setup 11 3 6 4 Condenser Two Speed Fan Fail Setup C2 Es CONDENSER 2 SPEED FAN FAIL SETUP 12 00 Try Other Speed On Fan Fail NO gt SET DATA O MENU Try Other Speed On Fan Fail Y es N o N The Try Other Speed On Fan Fail feature allows the RMCC to com
146. Hi Avg Temp alarms e Checkit This alarm type includes the Check Sys tem Now and Check System Soon alarms e Sens Hi Sensor High This alarm type includes the Hi Sens and Hi X Ducer alarms generated by Sensor Control Sens Lo Sensor Low This alarm type includes the Lo Sens and Low Avg Temp alarms generated by sensor control Sens Fail Sensor Fail This alarm type includes the IRLDS Fault Sensor Fail Sensor Short Sensor Open Xducer Short and Xducer Open alarms System Navigation 14 3 e Comp Pres Compressor Pressure Alarms This alarm type includes the Auto Reset Discharge Tripped Hi Suction and Oil Pressure alarms e Refr Leak Refrigerant Leak This alarm type in cludes the Leak alarm CCB Sens CCB Sensors This alarm type includes the Coil In Coil Out Coil2 In and Coil2 Out alarms e Network This alarm type includes the Bad Check sum Bad Message Device ONLINE Host Bus Network Down Missed Token and No Response alarms Miscellaneous This alarm type includes all other alarm messages not covered in the first nine catego ries These include the Condenser VS Fan Proof 14 8 Alarms 129 Description 7ack 9reset Rclear switch Omenu The RMCC Alarm Log is similar to other RMCC Logs in that it records specific occurrences within the RMCC ac cording to the user defined logging interval and stores the information for later review Specifical
147. IMES F1 F2 F3 00000 00000 00000 7 8 9 1 00000 00000 00000 11 18 Condenser Control Ambient Split Temp 50 99 N one 50 The Ambient Split Temperature is the temperature at which the condensing capabilities of the condenser are re duced or split either by limiting the number of fans that may be operated or by activating a valve which reduces the effective cooling area of the coil Configuration of condensers during split operation is defined at the Condenser Setup screen see Section 11 3 1 Condenser Setup Ambient Split Temp During Reclaim 50 99 N one N When heat is being reclaimed it may be desirable to have the condenser split at an ambient temperature higher than the Ambient Split Temperature set point Degree units are determined by the unit selected at the System Units screen see Section 11 8 7 System Units Ambient Split Temp Deadband 0 99 N one 4 0 The dead band is a value equally above and below both the Ambient Split Temperature and the Reclaim Ambient Split Temperature set points within which the ambient out side temperature is considered to be acceptable This value ensures the condenser does not drop in and out of split mode when the ambient outside temperature hovers around the split temperature set point To define an ambient split temperature dead band enter a value between 0 and 99 F in the first Dead Band
148. INSTALLATION 5 2 eerie err 7 1 CASECONTROLEER iiie cse uer ete teer eee ves belt eee eedem eee doe pre cue 7 1 74 E 7 1 7 2 SPOWER E EE 7 1 T3 JUMPER SETTINGS 5 acer RI RETINERI DORUM GI ee 7 2 7 2 7 5 OPTIONAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS les reae veedeesueel desessunettedes 7 2 TOs CABLE HARNESSES 5 exces IER 7 3 7 6 1 Input Cable esis eene ladite ente e tite eel eerie eta 7 3 iv Table of Contents 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 46 2 Output Cables di d tae ra e io e tire gie a toe ep etae Rp hd 7 3 7 37 POWER noui IT e HERR EREMO EGER RR HERR EFLENT 7 4 797 SENSOR LOCATION e AO aae reete cui aee mp EE eee 7 5 7 8 1 Discharge Air Sensor Green Leads 7 5 7 6 2 Coil Inlet Sensor Blue Leads 3 eed aede ban a e ei EG i ite t 7 5 7 6 3 Coil Outlet Sensor Red Leads esee seen entere enne ennt ener senten sosie nre 7 5 RI A dem E 7 5 8 CASE CONTROL SOFTWARE OVERVIEW 1 sta
149. INV4 RESET SCHEDULE 1 SCHEDULE 4 GRPI LLS GRP4 LLS CRCTO1 DFR CRCT48 DFR CRCTO1 RFR CRCT48 CRCTO1 FAN CRCT48 FAN ASW 1 ASW 8 VS COMP 1 VS COMP 4 C1 VS FAN VS ALM C1INV RST C1 FAN CON C1 2S RELI C1 2S REL2 Contacts close when an inverter fault condition occurs see Section 11 2 11 Group 1 Vari able Speed Set Points Table 11 6 List of Outputs Configurable at the Output Definitions Screens 11 8 3 System Information 01 10 96 05 20 100 gt lt 5 T PREV General information such as defining identifi ers the power up self test summer and winter start dates and user passwords is defined at the RMCC System Infor mation screens The System Information screen is the first of six screens where such information is entered RMCC I amp O Manual Unit Name 25 Character Limit The Unit Name is a user defined identifier that is used to identify the specific RMCC on modification and status screens within UltraSite Enter unique name in the Unit Name field Date Time Day 01 01 00 12 31 99 00 00 24 00 The RMCC contains a real time clock that is used when logging information to the various logging screens It is im portant that the system date and time be accurate Many RMCC applications use the system date and time to record important information To set this clock enter the current date and time in the Date and Time
150. Light Schedules Refer to the description of Lighting Schedules on Sec tion 11 4 14 Light Schedules 13 2118 11 4 43 Setup 7e 1 Add Edit Circuit 4 Bd Pt Assignment 2 Board Cct Assgn 5 Utilites CCB Logging Times 3 CCB Logging Times 6 Anti Sweat Setup Board Point Assi 1143 oard Point Assignment 6 Anti Sweat Setup 11 44 11 4 44 Circuit Setup 1 Add Edit Circuit Refer to the description of Circuit Setup 1 on Section 11 4 16 Circuit Setup 1 2 1 eee 11 38 Circuit Defrost Control 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11 4 45 Circuit Setup 2 Add Edit Circuit G2 9 1 s CIRCUIT SETUP 1 Defrost Type Defrost Termination Type Termination Sensors Temperature Strategy Temp Sensors Strategy Fans On During Defrost T PREV LzNEXT case control circuits are set up at the Circuit Setup screens Each defined circuit is set up separately at these screens If the Enter Defaults feature is activated at the First Circuit Setup screen see Section 11 4 16 Circuit Setup 1 the default settings for the defined case type should be dis played in all fields at the Circuit Setup 2 screen Defrost Type H ot Gas E lectric R everse Air T imed The defrost type for the selected circuit is defined in the Defrost Type field and should be defined according to the case type Enter one of the following d
151. Liquid Level Connect to Input Point by Board Type 16AI Any Available Point 8IO Any Avail able Input Point Connect RED power wire to 12VDC TO 12V source on input ON BOARD board A Connect BLACK ground wire to odd numbered terminal Connect GREEN sig nal wire to even num bered terminal Set input dip switch down v ODD TERMINAL TERMINAL 207 1000 Refrigerant Level Trans ducer Hansen Probe 16AI Any Available Point 8IO Any Avail able Input Point Wire BLACK ground wire from GND sensor ter minal to odd num bered board terminal TOODD TOEVEN Wire GREEN sig TERMINAL TERMINAL nal wire from SIG NAL sensor terminal to even numbered board ter lt minal TO 12 VDC Wire RED power ON BOARD wire from POWER sensor terminal to 12VDC terminal on board GREEN SIGNAL Set input dip switch down 203 1902 Dew Point Probe Table 5 1 Sensor Wiring RMCC 1 amp 0 Manual 16AI Any Available Point 8 Avail able Input Point ARTC An Aux Input Connect the WHITE and GREEN wires to ACI and AC2 power terminals Connect BLACK ground wire to odd numbered board terminal Connect RED signal wire to even num bered board terminal Set input dip switch up Communication and Power Connections 5 5 Connect to Input Point P N by Board Type
152. Mounting Dimensions 3 3 Location 485 Alarm Panel The 485 Alarm Panel is used to alert store personnel to system problems that require immediate attention there fore it is important to mount the panel where it will be vis ible and easily accessible Mounting The 485 Alarm Panel is supplied with four mounting holes in the rear panel of the enclosure These holes are ac cessible without removal of any boards inside the enclo sure Figure 3 10 shows the enclosure dimensions and weight 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 i 485 ALARM PANEL i REAR OF ENCLOSURE WEIGHT 4 LB 26509004 Figure 3 10 485 Alarm Panel Mounting Dimensions 3 4 Location RS232 Bus Amplifier Although there are no specific location requirements for installation of the RS232 Bus Amplifier it is recom mended that the amplifier be located close to the bussed CPC controllers to prevent data loss over long cable lengths It is also recommended that the bus amplifier be lo cated adjacent to the modem and if present the local com puter terminal to provide easy access to all components necessary for building control In some cases location of the modem and local termi nal will not allow location of the bus amplifier to both the modem and local terminal and the CPC controllers Since data loss is possible when multiple CPC controllers trans mit data over long cable lengths it may be necessary to connect the CPC controllers to a remot
153. NALOG OUTPUT MODULE 01 BYPASS Name OUTPUT 01 Enable Value Time 000 NORMAL 10005 minutes Ov State UNKNOWN Time Left 00000 sec T PREV j4 NEXT gt 5 The Value output of the Analog Output Module may be overridden using this screen Name 15 characters max AV OUTPUT module number If desired enter a name for the analog output module in the Name field Enable Yes No N The Enable field allows users to turn an individual An alog Output Module on or off without having to use Ultra Site Entering Yes in this field enables the current module entering No in this field turns off the module Value 0 100 0 The value to which the Value output will be overridden is entered in the Command field 11 50 Sensor Control e Timed The output will be overridden to the value chosen in the Command field for the amount of time entered in the Time field see below This override may also be terminated by selecting Normal in the Command field Time 0 68 minutes 5 minutes The value entered in the Time field will be the number of minutes a timed override will last Ov State The Ov State is a read only field that shows the current state of the Command override either Fixed Timed or Normal Time Left The Time Left field is a read only field showing the amount of time left in a timed override When no timed override is being carried out the Tim
154. O boards the network dip switch labeled S1 or S3 for the 16AI board is used to set the unique board number of the unit and the baud rate The 8IO uses rotary dials to set the board number of the unit 4 13 1 Network Addresses Board numbering is accomplished using the first five rockers on dip switch S3 on the 16AI board the first five rockers on dip switch S1 on the SRO and 8RO FC boards and two rotary dials on the 8IO board Dip Switches Each of the first five rockers of either S1 or 53 is given a value which is twice as large as the value for the rocker to the left of it The first rocker is given a value of one With these five rockers a board may be given any value between 1 and 31 however network restrictions limit the actual number of boards that may reside on both the COM A and COM D networks at one time These restrictions are given in Section 4 7 Number of Devices per Segment Use Fig ure 4 10 to determine the switch settings for 16 1 8RO and 8RO FC boards If a pulse type input is connected to a 16AI Board with software older than version E 02 the input must be con nected to point one and rocker number eight on the board s network dip switch and must be configured to the ON or up position Figure 4 1
155. ON SETPT 80 DEG F 50 DEWPOINT 45 DEG F OFF ALL OFF SETPT 20 DEG F Osec 5 sec 10 sec T ALL ON SETPT 80 DEG F DEWPOINT 30 DEG F ALL OFF SETPT 20 DEG F Osec sec 10 sec 26512014 Figure 9 7 Illustration of Anti Sweat Control Each anti sweat heater output may be configured to override OFF when a defined contact closure is detected Software Overview 9 7 Anti sweat heaters may also be overridden manually from the RMCC front panel or by using UltraSite ensor contro The RMCC can monitor a total of 48 generic sensors configured by the user Section 7 6 Sensor Control provides the set points and setup functions necessary to customize a generic sensor input Users may select from several sensor types and may make adjustments to gain and offset to ensure accurate values are read by the RMCC On off and delay values entered at the sensor set points screen Section 7 6 5 determine when a generic output will be activated A generic sensor input is tied to a generic sensor output by defining a board and point for the sensor output under Section 7 9 2 Output Definitions m RMCC Input and Output Modules are not program mable from the RMCC front panel I O Modules may only be programmed using UltraSite version 1 31 or greater For specific I O Module programming instruc tions see the UltraSite User s Guide RMCC Supple ment P N 026 10
156. POWER OR STEPPER MOTOR 3 OPTIONAL VALVE POWER OR STEPPER MOTOR 4 CCB GROUND STEPPER MOTOR 5 QOOOOQOOOOQOQOOOOOD 26513022 Figure 7 4 Output Cable Harness Without Quick Connects 335 3156 Schematic Diagram CASE CONTROLLER BLUE GREEN ORANGE POWER MODULE 24 VAC 1 BROWN ANTI SWEATS CONTROL LIGHTS CONTROL RED CCB GROUND 24 VAC 2 177 PURPLE DEFROST CONTROL FANS CONTROL f 9 WHITE WHITE BLACK YELLOW PURPLE RED PULSE VALVE 1 OR STEPPER MOTOR 1 BLACK PULSE VALVE 1 OR STEPPER MOTOR 2 YELLOW OPTIONAL VALVE POWER OR STEPPER MOTOR 3 OPTIONAL VALVE POWER OR STEPPER MOTOR 4 STEPPER MOTOR 5 QOQOOOOQOOOOQOQOOHOOOD 26513023 Figure 7 5 Output Cable Harness With Quick Connects 335 3158 Schematic Diagram Case Control Installation 7 3 Full Output Cable for Sporlan Suction Stepper Bipolar Valve CPC s case controller full output cable harness 335 3159 is designed for use with a stepper valve case control ler controlling a Sporlan suction stepper bipolar valve The connector is constructed with 18 AWG color coded wire with a 16 pin male end connector for connection to the case controller an 8 pin male end connector for connec tion to a CPC power module and a 4 pin female end con nector for connection to the Sporlan valve The schematic diagram for this cable is shown in Fig ure 7 6 CASE CONTROLLER
157. Points Case Control Circuit set points are also accessed by se lecting the Setup command from the Case Circuit Control 11 32 Circuit Defrost Control The RMCC assumes that power wiring is designed for a maximum load equal to all compressors running at the same time When defrost is initiated the defrost output is delayed for one minute During this time a compressor control algorithm determines how many amps are available to run the defrost output and interlocks one or more com pressors if required to make more current available for de frost Compressors bypasses take priority over load shedding if a compressor is bypassed ON it will not be deactivated by this feature Also if the One Compressor Always Re main On feature is enabled for the compressor group see Section 11 2 8 Pressure Setup one compressor will re main on even if the Advanced Defrost calls for all compres sors to be deactivated Enter the circuit s compressor group or suction group number in the Host Compressor Group field or enter a zero to disable the feature 1 4 Group Number 0 Dis able Enter the number of amps being drawn by the defrost heaters in the Electric Defrost Amps field 999 999 em Pese e tesGehs Summary 8 Light Schedules Lx Setup Menu For descriptions of these screens see Section 11 4 46 Circuit Set Points 1 Add Edit Circuit 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11
158. Pulse and Stepper Only seen 11 36 11 4 37 CCB Set Points Screen 4 CPC Suction Stepper 11 37 11 4 38 CCB Stepper Set Points Screen Stepper Only essere nennen enne eene 11 37 11 4 39 Manual Defrost i a eret a eee hee sas b e e 11 37 11 440 bis marier n OPE ete d e n ederet tea 11 38 JURE UENIT dg ERE 11 38 71 4 42 Light Schedul s eme aa ERR Deae e p ep PED 11 38 IU RT M 11 38 11 4 44 Circuit Setup 1 Add Edit Circuit 11 36 114 45 Circuit Setup 2 Add Edit Circuit iere p te Rt EXER ERG TELS DR XE ERE NR AES 11 39 11 4 46 Circuit Set Points 1 Add Edit Circuit 11 40 11 4 47 Circuit Set Points 2 Add Edit Circuit eee eese esee nennen nennen tenete nere 11 41 11 4 48 Circuit Set Points 3 Add Edit Circuit eee eese seen nennen nennen nennen enne enne 11 42 11 4 49 Circuit Set Points 4 Add Edit Circuit receret anaE E E EER AES EE EES 11 42 11 4 50 Circuit Inputs Setup 1 Add Edit Circuit esee eterne nennen nennen nennen 11 42 11 4 51 Circuit Outputs Setup Add Edit Circuit eese eee enne entree nnne tnter 11 42 11 4 52 Circuit Assignment sime p dr eer Her RR det ERR e E se
159. RES YES CCB SENS YES MISC gt lt 5 T PREV If a Send Notices to 485 Alarm Panel field is set to YES both alarms and notices for the alarm types with in the category will be filtered Users may keep notices from being sent to the panel by setting the Send Notic es field in Section 11 8 5 to N Using the Send to 485 Alarm Panel screen users may choose which alarm types to send to the 485 Alarm Panel RMCC I amp O Manual DAYLIGHT SAVINGS MODE 1 Auto 2 Manual 3 None Auto The RMCC contains a real time clock that is used when logging information to the various logging screens When the current time changes to standard time or to daylight saving time the RMCC s clock should be modified accord ingly Time changes occur twice a year in most areas Methods for defining how the system will change its set tings for daylight savings time are defined in the DAY LIGHT SAVINGS MODE field The clock may be configured to change according to the standard USA Daylight Savings Time dates according to a user defined date or for areas that do not participate in day light savings time the clock will not be modified DST MANUAL SET START 01 01 00 12 31 99 04 05 DST MANUAL SET END 01 01 00 12 31 99 10 25 If the Manual method is chosen in the DAYLIGHT SAVINGS MODE field the RMCC will modify the sys tem time on the specified dates RMCC system se
160. RM OVDI ALARM OVD8 see Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions and Section 14 5 Alarm Overrides Ovrrd A contact closure has been detected at an input defined as a clean switch CLEANSW see Section 11 2 8 Pressure Setup and Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions Table 14 1 RMCC Alarm Log Notice and Alarm Messages 14 6 Alarms 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Notice Alarm Description Message Phase Fail A contact closure has been detected at an input defined as a phase loss device PHASE LOSS see Section 11 2 8 Pressure Setup and Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions Phase Restored A open contact has been detected at an input defined as a phase loss device PHASE LOSS see Sec tion 11 2 8 Pressure Setup and Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions Power Failed Power loss detected at the unit Pump Down The measured suction pressure has fallen below the user defined Pump Down set point see Section 11 2 3 Group 1 Pressure Alarms Setup RM Level 999 Login User has logged into the system from a remote location at the 100 through 400 level RMCC has been reset without a power loss Run Proof A contact closure has been detected within the proof delay duration at an input defined as a com pressor proof device 01 PRF CMP22 PRF see Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions and Sec tion 11 2 3 Group 1 Pressure Alarms Setup Sensor Short A short has been detected at a sensor input connection SENSO1 SENS48 see Section 11
161. RMCC will use the Minimum Condensing Setpoint as the control set point Evaporative condensers may use a combination of one or more sensor values as a control value Some of the com bination strategies used in evaporative condenser control namely Average AVG and Minimum MIN may not yield appropriate control values for use in Fast Recovery because a high pressure in one sensor might have little or no effect on the control value Since the Fast Recovery fea ture is designed to keep discharge pressure from going too high it might be a better option to use the maximum sensor value as the control value for Fast Recovery To use the highest sensor value as the Fast Recovery control value select Max in this field To use the same con trol value that is used in condenser fan control select Ctl Value Low Pressure Cutoff Setpoint 99 999 or NONE NONE The Low Pressure Cutoff Setpoint is the lowest con denser control input value at which the condenser control fans will be allowed to operate If the condenser control value falls below this set point all condenser fans will be deactivated EXCEPT those in bypass The RMCC uses a Low Pressure Cutoff Hysteresis de fault value of 2 0 to determine the control input value above which the RMCC will exit recovery mode The Low Pres sure Cutoff Hysteresis is added to the Low Pressure Cutoff Setpoint For example if a condenser s discharge pressure is 49 psi when the Low Pressure Cutof
162. Rev 4 08 12 99 2 39 Output Communication Boards When a REFLECS receives data from the 16AI board it interprets that information based on current stored set points System changes required as a result of this exami nation are then made through one of several output commu nication boards CPC offers four different output boards for refrigeration system control 1 8RO Relay Output Board 2 8RO FC Form C Relay Output Board 3 4AO Analog Output Board and 4 8DO Digital Output Board 2 3 1 8RO Board The 8RO Relay Board is a general purpose board capa ble of supplying an output signal through any of eight stan dard contact relays A maximum of sixteen SROs and SRO FCs be connected to an RMCC through the RS485 COM A and D networks To function the 8 board must be connected through the RS485 I O network to the REFLECS When properly installed the 8RO receives an electrical impulse from the REFLECS which either opens or closes any of eight con tact relays Output definitions within the REFLECS soft ware allow the user to configure the 8RO board to interact with any refrigeration system component The 8RO board is the direct link between the REFLECS and refrigeration system component operation Information gathered by the controller from the 16AI board or 810 board is checked against current stored set points If differ ences in the received input data and the set point informa tion are detected a signal is
163. S C16 NORM C20 NORM Low Suct 01 0 DLy 060m RUN TIME VS MINIMUM SPEED 0900 rpm O1 0 RUN 17 NORM C21 NORM Pump Down 00 5 DLy 010s OIL SENS VS MAXIMUM SPEED 1800 rpm MIN SUCTION 020 0 02 0 OIL PRE C18 NORM C92 NORM Automatic Oil Reset NO OIL PRES MAX INCREASE RATE 2000 rpm minute bs 0 H POWE 19 NORM HPIAMPs s MAX DECREASE RATE 2000 rpm minute er Defrost 10 0 0 PROOF PROOF s Altern Strategy N OFF on Fai lur N 0 05 0 EV g NEXT gt SET DATA PREV gt SET DATA Press H for Help lt GRP3 PRESSURE ALARMS 12 00 GROUP2 SE VARI SETPOINTS 12 00 12 00 9 0 To Toggle Compr 12 00 High Suc 5 0 Dly Dchg Alm TYPE CMP 01 02 03 04 Contr by xit Prev Hest Low Suct 01 0 RUN TIME VS MINIMUM SPEED 0900 rpm cLRI Clear Step Last Step Pump Down 00 5 DULY OIL SENS VS MAXIMUM SPEED 1800 rpm MIN SUCTION 020 0 D Insert Step D Delete Step Automatic Oil Reset OIL PRES MAX INCREASE RATE 2000 rpm minute HPIAMPS MAX DECREASE RATE 2000 rpm minute er Defrost 10 min Max Number of Steps for This group 20 PROOF 1 8 y N OFF on Failur 0 REV 4 NEXT ET DATA PREV gt SET DATA T PREV 4 NEXT gt SET DATA GRP4 PRESSURE ALARMS SETUP 12 00 GROUPS SETUP SETPTSCENABLED 12 00 SETPOINTS 12 00 12 00 High Suct 45 0 01 060 Dchg Alm Y TYPE CMP 01 02 03 04 L Contr by PRESSURE Low Suct 01 0 Dly 060m RUN T ME vs 0900 rpm Pump Down 00 5 Dly 0
164. S may be accessed through UltraSite using pop up dialog boxes that duplicate information displayed on the screen of the controller Changes made to set points in the dialog boxes are immediately transferred to the unit Con trol of the system using the new parameters is instanta neous 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Although most users will make alterations to the system using the front panel of the REFLECS individuals who have access to a laptop computer may find it easier to enter data especially during start up using UltraSite A list of the available UltraSite user guides are listed below Pato Desorption 026 1002 UltraSite User s Guide 026 1003 UltraSite User s Guide BEC Supplement 026 1004 UltraSite User s Guide BCU Supplement 026 1005 UltraSite User s Guide RMCC Supplement Table 2 1 UltraSite User s Guides RMCC I amp O Manual Hardware Overview 2 7 3 Hardware Mounting Hardware Mounting provides all information necessary to assemble a refrigeration system control network 3 1 Refrigeration Monitor and Case Control Location The operating environment of the is 20 F 28 9 C to 120 F 48 9 C and 0 to 95 humidity non condensing The Refrigeration Monitor and Case Control RMCC is the main controller of the CPC refrigeration control net work As such it is the component most accessed by store managers and service technicians The RMCC should be located in an easily access
165. TE signal wire to even numbered terminal Connect BLACK ground wire to odd numbered terminal Connect the bare SHIELD wire to odd numbered terminal Set input dip switch down WHITE TO gt EVEN 4 TERM BLACK TO ODD TERM SHIELD BARE WIRE TO ODD TERMINAL STANDARD TRANSDUCER 203 5750 Relative Humid ity Sensor 16AI Any Available Point 8IO Any Avail able Input Point ARTC An Aux Input SHIELD 7 CONNECTED TO GND _ la TO ODD TERMINAL CONNECT SHIELD JUMPER POWER ITO 12VDC TO EVEN TERMINAL Wire the P sensor terminal to 12VDC supply on board Wire the GND sensor terminal to odd numbered terminal Wire the OUT sensor terminal to even numbered terminal Jumper sensor terminal to sensor terminal GND Set input dip switch down 206 0002 Light Level Table 5 1 Sensor Wiring 16AI Any Available Point 8IO Any Avail able Input Point ARTC An Aux Input 5 4 Sensor and Transducer Wiring Wire GREEN ground wire to odd numbered termi nal Wire YELLOW and RED signal wires to even numbered termi nal Wire the POWER wire to a 12VDC source on input Set input dip switch down TO ODD board TERMINAL v vs TO EVEN TERMINAL TO 12VDC ON BOARD 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 207 0100 Analog
166. U 18DIC lc 12 00 Refr Leak 1 NO Leak Alm Lvl 1000 Leak Alm Diy 010m Bypassed Vlv 1 030 Door Alm Delay 015m CCB STA Disch Return Coil In Coil Ou ENT Nex TUS CCBHOTSDIC O1c 007 0 Setpoint Air OPEN Valve 2 at2 008 0 Setpoint 27 005 t2 003 0 1 lt gt 12 00 OE Sa 100 0 008 0 ODMENU ICCB OFFSETS CCB Case Offset 0 0 Discharge Return 0 0 Coil 1 In 0 0 Coil 1 Out 0 0 1 STA Frost Refr Le Door Sw Fan Rel Lights TUS CCB O1SDIC O1c OPEN ak 100 0 itchi OFF ay ON ON t lt gt B 12 00 ICCB SETPTS CCB Case Deadband Valv Multplier Close Rate Differential Gain Coil Out Fan Lock EERETS gt 5 O MENU 01801 01 12 00 Coil 2 In 0 0 Coil 2 Ou 0 0 Refr Leak 0 0 gt 5 O MENU 01801 01 12 00 0 0 100 000 FOR xh out 0100 STEPPER STPTS CCBH Valve Type Hysteresis Steps per Sec Maximum Steps Ope T DATA OTSP IC Olc 12 00 UniPolar Stepper 005 100 n 2500 T DATA HUSSMANN SUCTION STEPPER SCREENS CASE SET POINTS STATUS Circui t numbenr 1 a 12 00 SELECT ITEM 01 SDIC 01c Enter Item 12 00 CIRCUIT 01 Cas Case Status Temp Term ENT Nex 01 STATUS SDIC O1c e Boards 01 01 On 007 0 000 0 t lt gt
167. UNICATION THE JUMPER SETTING ALLOWS THE RELAY TO OPEN ON A POWER LOSS Nc FAILSAFE 5 JUS ITCH 3 ANI JUG FOR RELAY 3 THE SWITCH SETTING SHOWN 8 IS SPECIFICALLY FOR UNLOADERS lox WITCH 4 L CLOSES THE RELAY ON 5 OF COMMUNICATION THE JUMP ER OPENS THE RELAY ON LOSS OF S2 FAILSAFE 26501031 Figure 5 14 8RO Board Fail Safe Dip Switch and Jumper Settings 5 9 2 8 and 8RO FC The 8IO and 8RO FC have a dip switch 52 which in dicates the state of the relay NC or NO When the relay is RMCC I amp O Manual set normally closed the appropriate LED relay indicator one through eight is illuminated Dip switch rockers one through eight should be set to the up position if the relay is wired normally closed and down if the relay is wired nor mally open 5 10 Baud Rate Dip Switch Settings The ARTC 8 and 8RO FC have dip switch S2 which indicates the state of the relay NC or NO When the relay is set normally closed the appropriate LED relay in dicator one through eight is illuminated Dip switch rock ers one through eight should be set to the up position if the relay is wired normally closed and down if the relay is wired normally open 5 10 1 COM A and D Networks The COM A and D networks may be set to either 4800 9600 19 200 or 38 400 baud Positions one and two of the dip switch loca
168. When EPR is selected the refrigeration so lenoid will only be used to activate or deactivate re frigerant flow during calls for defrost Temp Sensors 0 6 0 Enter the number of case temperature sensors within the selected circuit in the Temp Sensors field Temp Strategy 0 Average 1 Max 2 Min 0 When multiple temperature sensors are being used to measure case temperature the RMCC must be told how to calculate the controlling temperature reading from the dif ferent sensors Users may choose from the following strat egies 0 Average the average of the temperature sensor readings is used to control case temperature 1 Maximum the highest temperature sensor read ing is used to control case temperature 2 Minimum the lowest temperature sensor read ing is used to control case temperature Fans On During Defrost Y es N o N To continue normal operation of fans during defrost enter Y es in the Fans On During Defrost field Enter N o to shut off all fans during defrost Defr Duration 0 240 minutes 0 The Defrost Duration is the maximum amount of time the circuit should remain in defrost If no Termination Type is defined or when termination temperature is not met the circuit will exit defrost when the defined Defrost Duration is complete Control Temp 99 99 0 When controlling the selected circuit based on the Full Temperature Strategy see Section 11 4
169. a Reha 11 43 RMCC I amp O Manual Table of Contents vii 11 4 53 Board Point Assignment oe e o n lee Te ok P edet d e d retos ren 11 43 14 94 Utiliti S emer eene eom 11 43 71 45 CANES WAL Setup ise ett etn E ATENE KTE EET E eS 11 44 11 4 56 Circuit SUMM TY iiis aie tete tap re Rr Dr a iere go 11 44 I1 SENSOR CONTROL s etos teret E ql 11 45 LTDA o p nae one pU neg IRR 11 45 11 5 2 Set Points all sensor types except IRLDS and Linear eese eee 11 46 11 5 3 Set Points for Linear sensor types 11 47 11 5 4 Set Points for IRLDS sensor type E N 11 48 11559 Shut Off Schedule one euni ei rr RO P Pre n ep 11 49 715 06 Shut Off Schedule 2 I oe t tte oe E RE UIS 11 49 H 5 7 Input Output Control sie ee Rt e PR Epp retreat 11 49 115 8 Analog Input Module Bypass ec e ee Gn e e pesci e tb e te NER ee Y eee 11 49 11 5 9 Analog Output Module Bypass asi ete te rte etant i geri e de ri 11 50 11 5 10 Digital Output Module Byp ss ec dette e e Reed 11 51 E176 x MAIN S TATUS nM EI PLAT IUE IINE AUT 11 51 7 POWER MONTOR iiie enc t
170. ace field will add logging points to other logs generated within the RMCC as shown in Table 11 7 If the Hourly Log is deactivated the RMCC Demand Control Hourly Log will not be generated Used The percentage of log space currently being used within the RMCC is displayed in the Used field Users may not ex ceed 100 The remote communication capability within the RMCC allows the user to communicate with a site from a remote location Remote communication with a site con trolled by the RMCC is accomplished using UltraSite CPC s remote communication software package To use this RMCC function the communication network must be connected to a modem some systems may require that a RS232 Bus Amplifier be installed before the modem in the communication line Remote communication network settings are defined at the Communications Setup screen System Navigation 11 59 Unit 1 38 The Unit Number for each RMCC is the number Ultra Site uses to determine the specific RMCC controller from which information is being received No two REFLECS controllers may have the same Unit number Forthe specified RMCC to communicate properly with the remote communication software the Unit Number must be entered in the Unit field Baud Rate 3 00 1 200 2 400 9 600 9 Most standard Hayes compatible modems with a baud rate of at least 9600 will operate properly with the RMCC network The baud rate should be set according to
171. alarm pan el can only communicate at 4800 baud 5 10 3 COM C Network The COM C baud rate setting is established within the remote communications screens in the RMCC and is relat ed to the speed of the modem being used at the supermar ket The RMCC can communicate at 300 1200 2400 and 9600 baud It is recommended that a baud rate of 9600 be used for remote communication S p ian Jumper Settings Each device on the network has a set of three terminat ing resistance jumpers JU1 JU2 JU3 These jumpers are critical to network operation If a device is at the beginning or end of the COM A or COM D network or if the device is at the hub of a star the terminating resistance jumpers must be set to the up position If the device is any where else on the network set the jumpers down Refer to Section 4 10 Terminating Resistance Jumpers COM A COM B and COM D Only for more information m Settings The 16AI and 8IO Boards have input type dip switches that are used to establish the type of inputs connected to the board On the 16AL switches S2 and S1 contain all the rockers that correspond to each of the 16 inputs shown in Figure 5 16 On the 8IO switch 54 contains eight rockers that represent inputs one through eight If asensor requires voltage to operate the input type dip switch rocker must be set to the DOWN position Sensors that require no voltage must have their input type dip switch rockers se
172. alarm value for a sensor defined as either 1 2 or 5 for the user defined alarm delay duration see Section 14 4 Sensor Alarm Setpoints Low Humidity The sensor reading has fallen below the low alarm value for a sensor defined as type for the user defined alarm delay duration see Section 14 4 Sensor Alarm Setpoints Low Temp The circuit control temperature has fallen below the low alarm value for an input defined as a circuit temperature sensor 01 TEMP 48 TEMP see Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions for the user defined alarm delay duration see Section 14 1 Alarm Set Points Low Term The circuit control temperature has fallen below the low alarm value for an input defined as a circuit defrost termination sensor 01 TEMP 48 TEMP see Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions for the user defined alarm delay duration see Section 14 1 Alarm Set Points Manual Defr A manual defrost has been initiated at the Manual Defrost screen see Section 11 4 13 Manual De frost or Section 11 4 39 Manual Defrost A defrost event has been terminated at the Manual Defrost screen see Section 11 4 13 Manual De frost A defined communication board cannot be located Oil Pressure The oil pressure in a compressor has risen above the oil pressure defined at the group setup screen see Section 11 2 7 Group 1 Setup OVRD ACTIVE A contact closure has been detected at an input defined as an alarm override ALA
173. alarms 0 240 minutes 30 and for notices 0 240 minutes 30 in the Delay fields Disabled During Hot Gas Disabled During Re claim Y es N o N The Checkit sensor monitors the system for all temper ature increases regardless of cause Therefore Checkit may detect normal flash gas occurrences as a result of hot gas defrosts or heat reclamation When the Checkit sensor is disabled during Hot Gas de frost the RMCC must wait a specified amount of time after the completion of the defrost before accurate measure ments of the liquid level can be made stages designated for any single group when using standard control However no more than 22 compressor stages may be defined for a single RMCC When using the Fixed Step Strategy activated at the Group 1 4 Pressure Set Point screen see Section 11 2 10 Group 1 Pressure Set Points up to 10 compressors may be assigned to a suction group To establish a suction pressure group enter the desired name in the Name field Each pressure group name may be no more than 15 characters long The number of compres sors within the defined group is entered in Comps field The RMCC is capable of simultaneously controlling up to 16 compressor stages designated within any single System Navigation 11 5 group However no more than 22 compressor stages may be defined for a single RMCC 11 2 7 Group 1 Setup GROUP1 SETUP
174. an ON sta tus from both sensors to activate Demand Defrost If either of the two sensors relay OFF Demand Defrost will not be activated Demand Fail safe Time 0 240 hours The Demand Fail safe is the maximum duration the RMCC will keep the circuit out of defrost when a contact closure is not received from the Demand Defrost sensor in stalled in the case This time should be the maximum dura tion in hours the case should remain in normal refrigeration mode without a stage of defrost When controlling defrost using defrost times set within the RMCC defrost will occur at the defined defrost time following the demand fail safe time Alarm Time 0 240 hours The RMCC will activate an alarm in the Alarm Log when defrost has not occurred in the selected circuit for the defined Alarm Time delay the Defrost and Master Liquid Line Valves are also closed Dual Tmp Alarm Set Point Shift 99 99 0 This setting does not change the temperature set point within the case it only offsets the alarm set point by the amount specified in the field The Dual Temperature Alarm Shift Set Point is the val ue added to the defined Circuit Alarm Temperature Set Points when a contact closure is detected from the Extra in put The Circuit Alarm Temperature Set Points are defined atthe Alarm Set Points screen see Section 14 1 Alarm Set Points Dual Temp Shift Input 0 None 1 Dual Temp Support 0 Enter 1 for Dual Temp
175. and a dead band may also be established 9 5 5 Fail Safes 9 5 5 1 Under certain conditions the system pressure may in crease too quickly above the condenser set point to be re duced effectively by normal condenser control The RMCC provides a user definable fast recovery rate set point at which the condenser fans are cycled on to reduce system pressure Fast Recovery for Air Cooled and Temp Diff Con denser Strategies When an Air Cooled or a Temperature Differential con denser control strategy is being used see Section 9 5 1 Control Strategies the RMCC uses the discharge pressure transducer as the input source for Fast Recovery In other words Fast Recovery will initiate whenever the discharge temperature rises above the Fast Recovery set point Fast Recovery 9 6 Circuit Control Fast Recovery for Evaporative Condensers Unlike Air Cooled or Temperature Differential con densers the Evaporative strategy does not use the dis charge pressure transducer in Fast Recovery Evaporative condensers use the same combination of up to five sensors that is used in condenser fan control However users have the option of using the Maximum sensor combination strat egy in place of the combination strategy used in condenser fan control When the Average or Minimum sensor combination strategy is being used in condenser fan control see Section 9 5 1 2 Evaporative Condensers a single high sensor value will either be averaged
176. andard compressors 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 to activate Some of the criteria for determining the most appropriate combination are Best match to desired horsepower Staging on a compressor before its unloader Matching the minimum on and off times and Equalizing compressor run times When the RMCC has activated enough standard com pressors to satisfy the HP requirement and the suction pres sure begins to decrease below the suction set point the RMCC will begin decreasing the active compressor HP by first decreasing the RPM ofthe variable speed compressor During this stage of operation the VS compressor is again the primary pressure control device and it will be increased and decreased as necessary to maintain the set point If dur ing this phase the VS compressor reaches 10046 capacity and the RMCC requires more HP the RMCC will again look for a standard compressor combination to activate Ifthe VS compressor reaches its minimum capacity and the RMCC still requires less HP the RMCC will begin to deactivate standard compressors If there are no standard compressors left to deactivate the VS compressor will turn off The above description of the Normal strategy is only the basic framework of how compressor control works Other settings in the RMCC may slightly alter the way in which the rack operates such as Compressor ON and OFF delays Unloader ON and OFF delays nverter alarming and Specialized se
177. are configured at the Alarm Overrides screen see Section 14 5 Alarm Overrides The override schedule defined at the Shut Off Schedule screen is activated when assigned to selected sensors at the Shut Off Schedule 2 screen To activate the schedule within selected sensors find the desired Sensor Numbers and enter in the corre sponding fields em Desorption Pee The Command output of the Analog Input Module may be overridden using this screen Name 15 characters max AV INPUT module number If desired enter a name for the analog input module in the Name field System Navigation 11 49 Enable Yes No N The Enable field allows users to turn an individual An alog Input Module on or off without having to use Ultra Site Entering Yes in this field enables the current module entering No in this field turns off the module Command OFF ON NONE OFF The value to which the Command output will be over ridden is entered in the Command field Type Fixed Timed Normal Normal In the Type field users may choose the type of over ride There are three override types to choose from Normal Choosing Normal in the Type field ends a fixed or timed override already in progress e Fixed The output will be overridden to the value chosen in the Command field until the user returns to this field and selects Normal 11 5 9 Analog Output Module Bypass 29 08 A
178. arge 0 0 Coil 2 Out 0 0 Refr Leak 100 0 Return 0 0 Refr Leak 0 0 Door Switch OFF Coil 1 In 0 0 Fan Relay ON Coil 1 Qut 0 0 Lights ON 0 NEXT gt SET DATA O MENU 15 05 11 int 0 03 15703 12 00 SEE FOLLOWING PAGE CCB CCS OTSDIC OIc 12 00 FOR SCREENS FOR QN i gi ADDITIONAL VALVE TYPES Coil Out Fan Lockout 0100 LIQUID PULSE SHOWN SEE FOLLOWING PAGE FOR SCREENS FOR ADDITIONAL VALVE TYPES LIQUID PULSE SHOWN RMCC I amp O Manual Appendix D 0 3 CIRCUIT CONTROL 12 00 1 Standard Circuit Case Control IRCUIT CONTROL 1 1 Circuit Status 6 Logs Graphs g Circuit Set Points 7 ase Set Points Light Schedules Alarm Set Points 2 Setup 5 Manual Defrost SELECT BE UP MENU 1 0 1 Add Edit Circuit 4 Bd Pt Assignment Board Cct Assgn 5 Utilites 3 CCB Logging Times 6 Anti Sweat Setup Circuit number 1 12 00 SETUP 1 Case 001 Enter Defaults No Circuit Name 801 01 Master Liq Line Soleno REV SETUP 1 Defrost Type Defrost Termination Valve Control Strategy Temp Control Strategy Fans On During Defrost T PREV L NEXT gt SET DATA 12 00 gt SbIC c d Grp LLS
179. arm Temperature Set Points when a contact closure is detected from an Extra in put The Circuit Alarm Temperature Set Points are defined atthe Alarm Set Points screen see Section 14 1 Alarm Set Points Dual Temp Shift Input 0 None 1 Dual Temp Support Enter 1 for Dual Temp Support in the Dual Temp Shift Input field if a dual temperature case is defined within the circuit System Navigation 11 41 11 4 48 Circuit Set Points 3 Add Edit Circuit 4 899 v CIRCUIT SETPOINTS 81 Demand Defrost Demand Fail safe Time Alarm Time O MENU T PREV gt SET DATA When the Demand Defrost feature is activated the RMCC will only activate defrost when a contact closure is received from the installed demand sensor or when the sys tem reaches the demand fail safe time For more informa tion about the Demand Defrost feature see Section 4 Software Overview This feature is optional within the RMCC therefore default values will not apply to this screen Demand Defrost O n O F f To activate the Demand Defrost Feature enter O n in the Demand Defrost field To deactivate Demand Defrost enter Demand Fail safe Time 0 240 hours The Demand Fail safe is the maximum duration the RMCC will keep the circuit out of defrost when a contact closure is not received from the Demand Defrost sensor in stalled in the case This time should
180. art of the PID output will be 50 or in some cases whatever value the user specifies as the Output at Setpoint value The proportional part of PID moves pro portionately as the output moves within the throttling range that is the output is at 100 when the input is at the top of the throttling range and the output is at 0 when the input is at the bottom of the throttling range The integral part of PID control makes adjustments to the output based on the error that has existed over time The integral mode is necessary because the proportional mode alone cannot force the control input to match the PID set point it can only stabilize the control input at a value which may be higher or lower than the set point The integral mode grabs the value and brings it towards the set point Finally the derivative part of PID control observes the rate of change of the input and makes slight adjustments based on the predicted future values of the input This al lows PID control to catch arapidly changing input before it gets too far away from the set point A diagram showing the operation of all three modes is shown in Figure 9 2 Software Overview 9 1 ACTUAL READING P MAKES INITIAL ADJUSTMENT TO THE PID PERCENTAGE TRACKS THE ERROR AND AND ERROR DURATION MAKES AN ADDITIONAL ADJUSTMENT a D NOTES ANY LARGE RATES SET FONT OF CHANGES AND ADJUSTS THE PERCENTAGE AS NECESSARY THROTTLIN
181. ase lights to automatic operation Turn 2 Turn Off Pressing 2 will bypass the case lights off 3 Turn On Pressing 3 will bypass the case lights on Status the operational status of the refrigeration and defrost modes Pressing RIGHT fol Status Ovrd lowed by one of the commands below allows users to manually override the case 1 Man Dfr Pressing 1 initiates manual defrost 2 OV OFF Pressing 2 overrides both refrigeration and defrost OFF 3 End Dfr OV Pressing 3 will terminate defrost mode Disch 1 the current reading of discharge air temperature sensor one Offset the offset for discharge air sensor one This may be changed using the HHT Disch 2 the current reading of discharge air temperature sensor two Offset the offset for discharge air sensor two This may be changed using the HHT Disch 3 the current reading of discharge air temperature sensor three Offset the offset for discharge air sensor three This may be changed using the HHT Disch 4 the current reading of discharge air temperature sensor four Offset the offset for discharge air sensor four This may be changed using the HHT RMCC I amp O Manual System Navigation 15 7 Extra 1 Tmp the current reading of extra temperature sensor one Offset the offset for extra temperature sensor one Extra 2 Tmp the current reading of extra temperature sensor two Offset the offset for extra temperature sensor two Door the current status of t
182. ate system information CPC provides this information to the RE FLECS through a series of input communication boards Except for boards designed to supply both input and output functions the 16AI Communication Board is the only input board used by CPC 2 2 1 16 Board The 16AI Analog Input Board is a general purpose in put board capable of receiving an input signal through any of 16 two wire input connections To function the 16AI must be connected through the RS485 I O network to the REFLECS When properly installed the board receives ei ther digital or analog data from sensors wired to any of the 16 input connections located on the board Input definition screens within the REFLECS allow the user to define each input for refrigeration control A maximum of sixteen 16AIs may be connected to an RMCC through the RS485 COM A and D networks Within a refrigeration system the 16AI may be con nected to temperature humidity or dew point sensors and pressure transducers liquid level indicators and refrigerant leak transducers The 16AI Board is designed with several features that make it easy to install wire and configure These main user interface features are shown in Figure 2 3 LEGEND Address and Baud Rate Dip Switch Input Connections AC Input Power Connection Network Connection LED Power Indicator Termination Resistance Jumpers 26501001 Figure 2 3 16AI Analog Input Board 026 1102
183. ayed in the Refr Leak field This sensor calculates the parts per million rating of escaped refrigerant Door Switch When a Door Switch is configured at the Circuit Set points 4 screen see Section 11 4 49 Circuit Set Points 4 Add Edit Circuit the current status of the Door Switch is displayed in the Door Switch field System Navigation 13 7 Extra Temp The current temperature readings of the Extra 1 Tmp and Extra 2 Temp sensors are displayed in the Extra 1 Temp and Extra 2 Temp fields The extra temp sensors may be used to monitor temperature only Fan Relay The current status of the Fan Relay is displayed in the Fan Relay field Lights The current status of the case lights is displayed in the Lights field 13 4 6 CCB Status 3 Liquid Pulse Only SISSE CCB STATUS CCB 01SDIC O1c Setpoint Valve 2 Setpoint A Liquid Pulse CCB may control up to two liquid pulse valves if a second pulse valve is connected to the CCB status information about the second EEV may be viewed in Status Screen 3 To access this screen from Status Screen 2 press ENTER 13 5 Sensors 13 5 1 Sensor Status SENSOR STATUS Name LIQUID LEVEL REFR LEAK AMBIENT Status Value CI 1 2 3 4 5 T PREV 13 8 Sensors 13 4 7 CCB Status 4 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only DEM sm For liquid pulse and liquid stepper CCBs this status screen displays the cur
184. be defined as specific values for analog sensor inputs or simply as contact closed or contact open for digital input sensors Fault Alarm IRLDS only Enabled Disabled En abled When the Fault Alarm is enabled the RMCC generates a fault alarm whenever the input being monitored goes to 5Vdc a sign that a flow fault has occurred in the corre sponding IRLDS zone 11 8 1 Input Definitions The Alarm Override Input that should control the override status of the selected sensor is chosen in the Digital Override Input field To select an override input enter the appropriate override number in the Digital Override Input field Turn Sensor Relay OFF Y es N o To deactivate the sensor relay to the controlled output when an Alarm Override is activated enter Y es in the Turn Sensor Relay OFF field Type F ixed T imed There are three types of overrides timed fixed and scheduled A timed override bypasses the normal sensor operation for a specified period of time A fixed override bypasses the normal sensor operation until the user returns to this screen and disables the override A scheduled over ride bypasses the normal sensor operation according to a schedule configured at the Shut Off Schedule 1 screen see Section 11 5 5 Shut Off Schedule 1 Duration 00 00 99 99 The Override Duration is the specified measure of time the sensor will remain in override mode if the override is defined as a timed override
185. be the maximum dura tion in hours the case should remain in normal refrigeration mode without a stage of defrost When controlling defrost using defrost times set within the RMCC defrost will occur at the defined defrost time following the demand fail safe time Alarm Time 0 240 hours The RMCC will activate an alarm in the Alarm Log when defrost has not occurred in the selected circuit for the defined Alarm Time This Alarm Time is defined in the Alarm Time field 11 4 49 Circuit Set Points 4 Add Edit Circuit Refer to the description of Circuit Set Points 2 on Sec tion 11 4 19 Circuit Set Points 2 11 4 50 Circuit Inputs Setup 1 Add Edit Circuit Refer to the description of Circuit Inputs Setup on Sec tion 11 4 22 Circuit Inputs Setup Dam mm 11 4 51 Circuit Outputs Setup Add Edit Circuit Refer to the description of Circuit Outputs Setup on Section 11 4 23 Circuit Output Setup 11 42 Circuit Defrost Control 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11 4 52 Board to Circuit Assignment BOARD CIRCUIT ASSIGNMENT 1 Board Ckt 01 1 01 Ckt Type SDIC Ckt Name SDIC O1c Undefined Undefined 02 SPARE 00 05 SPARE 00 O4 SPARE 00 Undefined 05 SPARE 00 Undefined T PREV 1 5 O MENU After Case Control Circuits are programmed and the cases are installed and have a board ID number the boards must be
186. been connected or since the last Clear Runtime command This calculation is displayed and may be reset in the Run Time field When using Hussmann Refrigeration s PROTOCOL the RMCC s Advanced Defrost Feature is available There are three types of advanced defrost systems available Ad vanced Hot Gas Defrost Advanced Reversed Cycle Hot Gas Defrost and Advanced Electric Defrost To activate the Advanced Defrost Feature enter Y es in the Setup Advanced Defrost Options field Selecting Y es will acti vate the appropriate Advanced Defrost Options screen ac cording to the type of defrost system defined From this screen Advanced Defrost Set Points are defined S tandard all compressors within the host group are shut down during the defrost duration and return to normal operation when the defrost duration is complete e R everse Cycle all compressors within the host group are shut down for the Compressor Start Delay defined below and are then cycled to maintain the programmed Defrost Suction Set Point also defined below Defrost is terminated and compressors re turn to normal operation based on the selected ter mination strategy To define the Hot Gas Defrost Type enter the letter cor responding to the desired type in the Hot Gas Defrost Type field Compressor Start Delay 0 60 minutes 2 When the Reverse Cycle Hot Gas Defrost Type is cho sen all compressors within the host group are shut down for the Compre
187. been designed to conform to RS232 standards When wiring CPC components together it is necessary to follow the rules and requirements specified in this section to ensure proper communication between net work devices and effective control of refrigeration control equipment Unless noted all information in this section pertains to COM A B C and D networks Information provided in Section 3 Hardware Mounting conforms to these requirements pa um QI aa A leg is defined as a cable running between two devices such as two communication boards or a REFLECS unit and a communication board A segment is defined as the to tal combined length of all legs connected to one REFLECS power interface board output connection such as the COM Overview 4 2 Wiring A or COM D connections Figure 4 4 demonstrates the re lationship between legs and segments INPUT OR OUTPUT BOARD NETWORK or D CONTROLLER START OF SEGMENT COM A or D CONNECTION 26513042 um OF SEGMENT LAST BOARD Figure 4 4 Relationship Between Legs and a Segment 4 6 Legand Segment Wire Length A single segment connected to COM A B or D may not exceed 4000 feet Therefore the combined length of all legs in a single segment may not exceed 4000 feet This length restriction includes the length of legs in a single star configuration described in Section 4 9 Star Configura tions A single segment connec
188. c GRAPH CONTROLS 0 mn 0 GRAPH CONTROLS GRAPH CONTROLS gt Scroll gt lt Scroll gt lt Scroll Go to current Go to current Go to current Z Zoom out Zoom in 2 m out Zoom in 7 Zoom out Zoom in Menu 0 Me Menu PLEASE WAIT 0 PLEASE WAIT PLEASE WAIT 5705 11 57 int 0 03 00 15 03 12 00 0 ate 15 03 12700 ae 210 DIN 00 15703 1 2 00 0 6 RMCC Front Panel Screens 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Appendix E Wiring for Case Controller Power Module Defrost Module and Pulse EEV Valve 335 3151 335 3158 DEFROST DEFROST OUT DEFROST H DEFROST OUT DEFROST H DEFROST OUT CASE CONTROLLER COIL INLET COIL OUTLET ANTI SWEAT H ANTI SWEAT OUT RED RED GREEN GREEN PURPLE PURPLE BLUE WHITE BLUE WHITE RED WHITE RED WHITE ORANGE ORANGE GRAY GRAY BLACK RED DISCHARGE AIR FANS FANS OUT NC LIGHTS H LIGHTS OUT NC or NO RETURN AIR HOT COIL 2 INLET LINE PURPLE NEUTRAL COIL 2 OUTLET WHITE WHITE BLACK YELLOW PURPLE
189. ch the Proof in put In these cases the logical signal from the Min On Off cell may be used as the Proof value 9 14 Input Output Control Proof The Proof cell compares the Select cell s output value to an external digital input and turns on the Proof Fail Out put when the two inputs are not the same for a specified amount of time The most common application of this cell is to connect the Proof input to the external device being controlled by the Command Output so that the Proof Fail Output may be used as an indicator of device failure In order for the Proof Fail Output to be activated the two inputs must be different for an amount of time equal to the user specified delay 9 9 2 3 Analog Output Module The Analog Output Module s main function is to read the value of an analog input compare the value to a set point and generate a single analog output value This out put value is represented in three different forms a single analog value from 0 to 100 up to eight digital stage outputs and a digital pulse width modulation output The output value s are generated by a PID Control cell which takes into account both the input s instantaneous value and its rate and direction of change In many ways the PID Control algorithm is similar to the PID algorithm used by Pressure Control except the Analog Output Mod ule is designed to be used in a wider array of applications Refer to Section 9 4 1 1 Normal PID Contr
190. ciation can be set to either pulsed or continuous mode E 1 x E t t v 2 t e Interfaces with existing facility alarm system e 25 pin parallel printer interface port Wiring of the alarm panel to the REFLECS is discussed in Section 5 3 COM B Wiring Termination Resistance Jumpers Output Connections 8 places LED Power Indicator Input Connections Network Connection Analog Outputs Fail Safe Dip Switch Input Type Dip Switch LED Output Indicators Power Output Connection Network Address Rotary Dials AC Power Input Connection Relay Output Fuses under cover Enable Jumper JU4 26501010 Figure 2 8 8IO Combination Input Output Communication Board 2 4 2 Case Controller CPC offers a variety of case controllers depending on the valve control approach being used Because of this va riety and the multiple power modules that are available Screen Scroll Buttons LCD Alarm Screen B Al R Bi i complete overview of case control is provided in Section 5 UTR LED Alarm Indicator Case Control LEGEND 26509002 Figure 2 9 485 Alarm Panel 2 5 485 Alarm Panel One of the most important requirements of any network environment is its ability to notify personnel of system fail ures or possible problems The REFLECS is designed with sophisticated logging graphing notification and alarming features that put system data at the
191. closed RMCC I amp O Manual Shut Down if Suction Grp Fails 1 4 Group Num ber 0 Disable The Shut Down if Suction Group Fails option will close all EEVs within a circuit under certain failure conditions If a proof fail is received for all compressors in a group along with a suction pressure reading above the high suction pres sure set point Section 11 2 3 Group 1 Pressure Alarms Setup all case controllers associated with the group are put into wait mode and WAIT is displayed in the status field of the circuit setup screen In addition in the event of phase loss or a pressure reading above the discharge pres sure trip point Section 11 2 10 Group 1 Pressure Set Points all case controllers associated with all defined suc tion groups are put into wait mode When the failure con dition has been corrected the will stage the case controllers back on by bringing the first 16 on right away and 16 every minute until all case controllers are back on and functioning Anti Sweat Control Y es N o To activate anti sweat heater control enter Y es in the Anti Sweat Control field To deactivate control enter Dual Alarm Set Point Shift 99 99 This setting does not change the temperature set point within the case it only offsets the alarm set point by the amount specified in the field The Dual Temperature Alarm Shift Set Point is the val ue added to the defined Circuit Al
192. co ESR Bipolar 24 V Only Unipolar Unipolar 24V Set Unipolar Jumpers For Table 7 2 Valve Type Jumper Settings See Section 8 3 Valve Control for valve types avail able Lights and Fans Output Jumpers JU7 and JUS If the lights and fans are wired to the NC connection of the power module relays then the relays are de rated to 10 amps Jumpers JU7 for lights and JU8 for fans define whether the relay is normally open or normally closed when 12 VDC power is applied Set the jumpers up for normally open or down for normally closed The case controller is supplied in the normally open configuration and should be wired to the case controller power module as shown in Fig ure 5 13 and Figure 5 14 If JU7 and JUS are set in the 7 2 Jumper Settings down position wire the fans and lights to the NC connec tion on the power module relays See Table 7 3 Jumper Indicator Load Position Light Table 7 3 JU7 and JU8 setting result T 4 Baud Rate The CCB baud rate is hard coded at 19 200 and cannot be changed For networks with case controllers attached the baud rate setting for COM A and D on the RMCC should be set to 19 200 See Section 4 12 Baud Rate Dip Switches COM A and D only 7 5 The case controller is configured with optional inputs for a leak detector optical frost sensor and clean door switch non voltage contact change of state One optional output for a second 24 VAC pulse electro
193. ctive lo Table 8 10 Light Level Parameters 8 9 Wash Mode Wash mode is initiated by activation of the cleaning switch or through the hand held terminal During wash mode refrigerant flow is stopped the fan and anti sweat outputs are turned off and the lights are turned on Wash mode may end by either a time out condition or by the cleaning switch When a time out condition is detected the case control ler automatically ends wash mode and enters recovery mode If manual deactivation of the cleaning switch is detect ed the CCB will end wash mode and enter recovery mode The wash mode set points are shown in Table 8 11 Case Control Software Overview 8 5 Itis possible to define a cleaning switch input at both a 16AI and the case controller When this is done the 16AI takes priority over the case controller cleaning switch in puts That is when a circuit is in clean mode because of a contact closure at the 16AI input a single case cannot be brought out of clean mode through the cleaning switch con nected to the case controller However if a contact closure is not received from the 16 a single case may be put into wash mode using the local cleaning switch Type Min Descrip Max tion Cleaning Input NA NA Contact clo Switch sure Wash De Set NA Timed or point manual deac tivate activate Type Wash Time Set 0 120 Time to stay point minutes in wash mode Time deactivate only Table 8 1
194. d keys There are 10 different types to choose from e R502 e R22 e R401A e R401B e R402A e R402B e R408A e RI34A e R404A e R507 Temp Press Input Offset 999 999 0 If necessary a temperature sensor or pressure transduc er may be given an offset value that is applied before the temp to pressure or pressure to temp conversion takes place This input offset is entered in the Temp Input Offset or Pres Input Offset field Logging Interval 00 00 00 24 00 00 00 03 00 The RMCC periodically records the values received from the defined sensors and stores the information in the RMCC Sensor Log see Section 12 1 6 Sensor Logs The Logging Interval defines when the data received from the sensors are recorded The RMCC will store a number of readings for each input equal to the amount of logs speci fied in Logging Setup See Section 11 8 9 Logging Setup 11 5 2 Set Points all sensor types except IRLDS and Linear d ENT SENSOR SETPOINTS 84 01 Type Temp Control Using Diff of 0 0 CUT ON Delay Min time ON 000 Sensor set points are control parameters stored within the RMCC that are compared to sensor readings to deter mine the controlled output function These set points are only defined when the selected sensor is controlling an out put Type Selecting the Setpoints command ac
195. d O ff H igh L ow O The Start Speed is the speed at which the condenser must begin to operate when activated from an OFF state The condenser must begin operation at either Off High or Low speed until the defined Start Duration has passed at which point the condenser operates at the speed required by the RMCC The Start Duration is defined in Two Speed Setup Screen 2 see below 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11 3 6 2 Two Speed Setup Screen 2 CONDENSER 2 SPEED FAN SETUP Start Duration 10000 High to Low Delay 0030 Low to High 0000 Low Speed HP 050 High Speed HP 100 T PREV gt SET DATA O MENU Start Duration 0 3600 sec 0 sec Before the condenser can be activated from an OFF state it must undergo a start duration During this time the condenser operates at a fixed user defined speed until the end of the start duration After the start duration is com plete the condenser will operate at the speed called for by the RMCC The Start Speed is defined in Two Speed Setup Screen 1 see above High to Low Delay 0 3600 sec 30 sec The High to Low Delay is the number of seconds the RMCC must wait before switching a condenser s fan speed from High to Low Low to High Delay 0 3600 sec 0 sec The Low to High Delay is the number of seconds the RMCC must wait before switching a condenser s fan speed from Low to High Low Speed HP 0 240 HP 50
196. d below Valv Multiplier 25 100 100 The Valve Multiplier is a value that allows the capacity of the EEV to be reduced This value should only be adjust ed in special applications where the valve appears to be oversized 11 36 Circuit Defrost Control Close Rate 15 255 255 When 255 is defined as the Close Rate the EEV will close immediately When refrigeration is deactivated within the case the EEV closes according to the Close Rate Percentage The EEV will close the defined percentage within one minute of the call for the deactivation of refrigeration within the case Derivative Gain 0 25 The derivative gain is a multiplier used by CCBs that are operating valves using PID control The larger the de rivative gain the greater the size of the Derivative mode s reaction to rapid changes in the PID input See Section 3 1 1 Programming PID for more information on the de rivative mode Coil Out Fan Lockout 99 99 100 To disable the Coil Out Fan Lockout feature enter a temperature set point of 99 If desired the evaporator fan may be disabled when the coil outlet temperature climbs above the temperature set point defined in the Coil Out Fan Lockout To activate this feature specify a temperature set point in the Coil Out Fan Lockout field 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11 4 37 CCB Set Points Screen 4 CPC Suction Stepper Only 2 8 cen n CCB SETPTS CCB 01 SDIC O1c Va
197. d on the combination strategy and send the com bined value to the Limiter cell Two different combination strategies may be specified by the user a primary combination strategy and an alter nate combination strategy The primary combination strat egy will be used whenever the Use Alt Comb input is OFF When the Use Alt Comb input is HIGH the alternate com bination will be used If an alternate combination strategy is not desired only the primary combination strategy needs to be defined Limiter The Limiter cell simply applies a user defined set of high and low limits to the value leaving the AV Combiner cell If the combined value is greater than the specified high limit value the Limiter cell will block the combined value from the rest of the module and replace it with the high lim it value Likewise when the combined value is lower than the low limit value the low limit value will be substituted This limited analog value is passed on to the Filter cell The Limiter cell also commands a digital output called the Limiting output This output is ON when the Limiter cell is enabled and OFF when the Limiter cell is disabled Filter The Filter cell s primary function is to slow the rate of change of the combined input The filter reads the differ ence between the current input value and the input s value x seconds ago where x a user specified amount of time called the period The difference between these two values is
198. d or because of defrost To reactivate superheat con trol a recovery sequence is necessary since in both of these instances the coil is empty To refill the coil and re establish superheat the valve is opened a certain percent age for a fixed period of time See Section 5 3 1 6 System Recovery Mode for more information The EEV will open between 10 and 100 based a six second control window to achieve the Superheat Set Point Max Recy Time 1 60 Unless the coil achieves superheat and exits recovery mode early recovery mode will terminate after the Max Recy Time has passed Asw Hi Limit 25 100 60 0 Asw Lo Limit 0 75 40 0 When the Anti Sweat feature is activated in the selected circuit at the Circuit Setpoints 2 screen see Section 11 4 47 Circuit Set Points 2 Add Edit Circuit the anti sweat heater range for each case is defined in the Asw Hi and Lo Limit fields If the humidity is higher than the ASW Hi Limit the anti sweat heaters will remain on at all times If the humidity is lower than the Asw Lo Limit the anti sweat heaters will remain off at all times Between these set points the anti sweat heaters will cycle in a six second win dow according to the humidity level Frost Sensor Y es N o N If a Demand Defrost Sensor is installed at the selected case enter Y es in the Frost Sensor field Demand Defrost set points may then be defined at the Circuit Setpoints 3 screen see Sectio
199. d the Output Time is 10 minutes the PWM output would be ON for six minutes and OFF for four minutes After the Output Time has passed the PWM starts over again with the new PID percentage RMCC 1 amp 0 Manual Software Overview 9 17 10 System Configuration Guide This guide can be used for the general configuration of an RMCC system The System Configuration Guide pre sents the steps for general configuration of an RMCC Some steps of this guide can be skipped if the RMCC is not to per form the functions defined Before attempting to program the RMCC decide what functions the RMCC will perform and then identify what sections are pertinent to the configuration 10 1 General 1 Make Network and Power Connections 2 Define Board Types and Numbers Section 11 8 21 Set Device Numbers 10 2 Setup Compressors Name Pressure Groups and Define the Number of Compressors Used Section 11 2 6 Compressor Setup Setup Pressure Group Groups 1 4 are Accessible from this Screen Section 11 2 7 Group 1 Setup 1 2 3 Define Pressure Options Section 11 2 8 Pressure Setup 4 Define Two Stage System Setup Section 11 2 9 Two Stage System Setup 5 Set Pressure Setpoints for the Group Groups 1 4 are Accessible from this Screen Section 11 2 10 Group 1 Pressure Set Points 6 Define Variable Speed Set Points Groups 1 4 are Accessible from this Screen Section 11 2 11 Group 1 Variable Speed Set Points
200. d the valve may open or close Max Steps the number of steps in between closed 0 and open 100 Control whether the valve is an EEV or and EEPR Valve Type whether the valve is a pulse or stepper Valve Jmpr whether the CCB s valve jumper is set for unipolar UniP or bipolar BiPo op eration See Section 5 3 1 3 Valve Control Network whether the host network is ON or OFF Case Type the case type number See Section 11 4 16 Circuit Setup 1 for a complete list of case types and their corresponding numbers This may be changed using the HHT Case the CCB number 15 10 Hand Held Terminal Screens 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Appendix A Advanced Pressure Control RMCT 2 10 CPC manufactures a companion version of the RMCC v 2 10 software that incorporates the advanced pressure control system developed by Tyler Refrigeration This soft ware is designated as RMCT 2 10 The two versions are identical except for a few aspects of pressure control RMCC RMCT Maximum of 4 suction Maximum of 3 suction groups groups Maximum of 16 compressors Maximum of 10 compressors per group per group Normal strategy uses PID Normal strategy uses PIDA control control see PIDA Control below Variable speed compressors Variable speed compressor optional required for each group Fixed Steps strategy and Al ternate variable speed strate strategy is used no Fixed gies available Steps strategy is available Compres
201. dens er when the outside ambient temperature is appropriate To enable Condenser Split enter a Y in this field Split Type N ONE E VEN O DD 1 ST HALF 2 ND HALF N When the Condenser Split feature is active and the RMCC calls for the condenser fans to be split selected fans RMCC I amp O Manual will be disabled These fans are chosen in the Split Fans field The Condenser Split feature uses the addresses of the fans 8RO board connections Choosing O dd disables all odd numbered fan outputs e g FAN 01 FAN 03 FAN 05 etc Choosing E ven disables all even numbered fan inputs Choosing 1 st Half disables fan in puts FAN 01 through FAN 06 Choosing 2 nd Half disables fan inputs FAN 07 through FAN 12 Choosing N None leaves all fans operational on a call for a condenser split If N None is chosen be sure to identify an output re lay at the Output Definitions screens to control operation of a condenser split valve otherwise regardless of any split settings defined condenser operation will remain un changed Force Split in Reclaim Y ES N O N To activate the split configuration when the RMCC de tects a closure on the Reclaim input enter Y es in the Force Split in Reclaim field Unsplit Split Delay 0 240 minutes 2 The Unsplit Split Delay is the specified measurement of time the RMCC must wait before reactivating the split
202. dialout sequence and or activation of the 485 Alarm Annunciator Panel Unacknowledged alarms alarms indicated by an aster isk in the RMCC Alarm Log are active and must be ar chived acknowledged or reset to silence When alarms are acknowledged all alarm dialouts are discontinued and the alarms are maintained within the Alarm Log as acknowledged alarms These alarms are signified by a dash in the RMCC Alarm Log If an alarm is acknowledged the same alarm will not be generated or logged again When alarms are archived all alarm dialouts are discontinued and the alarms are maintained within the RMCC Alarm Log as archived alarms These alarms are signified by a space in the log If an alarm is archived the same alarm will generate if the problem occurs again When alarms are reset all alarm dialouts are discon tinued and all alarm records are cleared in the RMCC Alarm Log 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 To acknowledge archive or reset the activated alarms within the RMCC Alarm Log select the appropriate com mand at the RMCC Alarms screen Notice Alarm Description Message Auto Reset The discharge pressure has fallen within an acceptable range as defined by the Autoreset set point see Section 11 2 10 Group 1 Pressure Set Points Bad Checksum The RMCC has received three invalid messages from a case controller This alarm may be due to im proper network wiring see Section 5 2 COM A and D Wiring
203. dule Status i iuh aee ides he ee e Dh e eto uat qe do ee Pee Re seed ie does 13 9 13 7 2 Analog Output Module Status iem rt aper e per e eite E 13 9 13 7 3 Digital Output Module Status i itae teet net crt et eU Y re ea E ducere 13 10 13 8 DEMAND ro ERA P EU ERU ARRIERE EE treten bei 13 10 Demand Status iiio A S ee Ie Ie en e tee E uui 13 10 13 9 VO POAR D S aiite eh E FE re ORO ERREUR P 13 11 DS OT O RR ERU QUAE SERERE NN n MIU EN 13 11 13 9 2 Suction Group Status eie eee eae oe a ex Pere a ea e E Eee to RS 13 11 14 ALARMS 2 14 1 TAI ALARM SET POINTS eto eR ect ee en Ee ET RE RE eX e Wee Rege ege eR 14 1 14 2 CASE GONTROL ALARM SET iere P EE EE E ERE NU EE RT VE RU ee PERI 14 1 14 3 CASE CONTROL ALARM SET POINTS ADD EDIT CIRCUIT sees 000000000000 14 1 144 SENSOR ALARM SETPOINTS 14 1 14 37 ALARM OVERRIDES ie ge Tie EE PUE ERA ATI cus e eure SEHR RUE CREDERE ERR 14 2 14 6 ALARM OVERRIDE STATUS sce pie ito tie eere EE EU ERR RUE LEE Er ERT 14 3 14 7 SEND TO A85 ALARM PANEL
204. e Ye 240 VAC 1 Phase Full Configuration 8163310 Yes Yes Ye Table 6 3 Power Module Part Numbers Power Module Output Ratings Normally Volts Normally Closed Open Anti Sweat 120 V 15A Defrost 120V 30A 1 or2 pole 25 A 3 pole 240V 30A 1 or2 pole 25 A 3 pole Table 6 4 Power Module Output Ratings RMCC I amp O Manual Case Control Hardware Overview 6 3 7 Case Control Installa tion 7 1 Generally the case controller will be mounted within the raceway or on top of the case If a controller must be Valve Type Case Control Probe Types In CPC Case Control Manufacturer Valve Description Type cluded Board Required Second Valve Kit Pulse Only Case Controller Generic Second Valve Kit Pulse Only W out 75 VA Transformer Stepper replaced or installed in the field it should be located based on the specific design of the case however the following guidelines are provided to help ensure proper installa tion Use Table 7 1 to help ensure that the correct CPC case control board is being installed W Probes P N 810 3140 W High Humidity P N 810 3142 Probes W Coil Inlet Tempera P N 510 3130 ture Sensor Coil Outlet Sensor Solid State Re lay amp 75 VA Trans former W Coil Inlet Tempera ture Sensor Coil Outlet Sensor Solid State Re lay P N 510 3125 Liquid Stepper ESV P N 810 3151 Valve W Probes P N 810 3150 Hus
205. e Left field will dis play a row of dashes Type Fixed Timed Normal Normal In the Type field users may choose the type of over ride There are three override types to choose from Normal Choosing Normal in the Type field ends a fixed or timed override already in progress e Fixed The output will be overridden to the value chosen in the Value field until the user returns to this field and selects Normal e Timed The output will be overridden to the value chosen in the Value field for the amount of time en tered in the Time field see below This override may also be terminated by selecting Normal the Command field Time 0 68 minutes 5 minutes The value entered in the Time field will be the number of minutes a timed override will last Ov State The Ov State is a read only field that shows the current state of the Value override either Fixed Timed or Nor mal Time Left The Time Left field is a read only field showing the amount of time left in a timed override When no timed override is being carried out the Time Left field will dis play a row of dashes 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11 5 10 Digital Output Module Bypass aei DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE 01 BYPASS DV OUTPUT 01 NOJ 12 00 Command OFF NORMAL Time 10005 minutes Time Left 00000 sec gt SET Ov State UNKNOWN T PREV J NEXT The Value output of the Analog Outp
206. e RMCC Alarm Log 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11 5 Sensor Control SENSOR CONTROL 1 Status 2 Setup 3 Setpoints 4 Alarms 5 Logs 6 Alarm Overrides 7 Override Status 8 Shut off Sched 9 1 0 Control Modules SELECT NUMBER 11 5 1 Setup SENSOR SETUP 01 Status OFF Type Temp Name 00 03 00 O MENU Logging Interval HH MM SS T PREV J NEXT gt SET DATA RMCC sensors and all identification set points and commands associated with each sensor are defined at the Sensor Setup screen Up to 48 sensors may be defined with in the RMCC Status Selecting the Setup command activates a sensor selec tion screen where users select the appropriate sensor num ber to be defined The selected sensor number and the current status of the selected sensor are displayed at the Sensor Setup screen in the and Status fields respectively Name 15 Character Limit The Sensor Name is a user defined name that corre sponds to the Sensor Number While the RMCC uses vari ous set points to determine the type and location of a particular sensor the Sensor Name provides a convenient easily recognized description of the sensor for the user RMCC I amp O Manual em L o 135 Type See Table Temp A complete list of common CPC sensor types and their software setup instructions is given in Append
207. e amplifier adjacent to the controllers and then connect the remote amplifier to a main amplifier connected to the modem and local termi nal For complete information on operation of the RS232 Bus Amplifier refer to 026 1401 RS232 Bus Amplifier In stallation and Operation Manual Mounting To mount the RS232 Bus Amplifier 1 Remove the four front panel screws 2 Remove the front panel with circuit board at tached 3 Mount the empty amplifier body with the power connection cut out down RMCC I amp O Manual 4 Replace the front panel Figure 3 11 shows the enclosure dimensions and weight RS232 BUS AMPLIFIER ENCLOSURE REAR OF ENCLOSURE 26509001 Figure 3 11 RS232 Bus Amplifier Mounting Dimensions 3 5 For information regarding locating and mounting case controllers refer to Section 5 Case Control Case Controller 3 6 Pressure Transducers CPC uses Eclipse pressure transducers as pressure sensing devices These transducers convert pressure read ings to proportional electrical signals between 0 5 and 4 5 volts The transducer is designed with a 1 8 inch male fine pipe thread fitting for connection to a standard access fit ting If the fitting is configured with a Schrader valve this fitting will have to be removed and replaced with a 1 8 inch female fitting Each pressure transducer is supplied with 20 feet of cable for connection to a 16AI input board Location CPC supplies three pre
208. e con denser s inlet or on the condenser s outlet Enter the loca tion of the sensor or transducer in this field Control Type T emperature P ressure P Condenser fans are controlled by either temperature or pressure This control type is defined in the Control Type field The method entered in this field will determine the units used when defining condenser set points see Set points on Section 11 3 8 Condenser Setpoints Screen 1 Condenser Fan s Type S ingle Speed D ouble Speed V ariable Speed S Condenser fans may be either single speed double or two speed or variable speed Refrigerant Type options R502 When Temp Diff is selected as the control strategy in the Control Strategy field this field will become visible at the bottom of the screen The refrigerant type used in the refrigerant system must be entered in this field The uses the refrigerant type to determine the refrigerant tem perature based on the refrigerant pressure Use the period and dash keys to scroll through the possible refrigerant types There are ten different refrig erant types to choose from e R22 e R401A e R401B e R402A e R402B R408A e R134A e R404A e R507 e R502 Control Using O NE A VG MI N MA X O When Evaporative is selected as the control strategy in the Control Strategy field this field will become visible at the bottom of the screen The discharge p
209. e esee ee dene oper elo E Dee 9 6 9 5 4 Condenser Split Single Speed Fans Only esee eese eterne nennen etre nennen nennen 9 6 9 5 5 TOUS APES r iiie nde ee e deed d d e e eee er eet ed 9 6 Bast RecoVety ete edes re ae ie e We Een ene ioter eee dee iter vrbe eR TO E ERE 9 5 5 2 Discharge Unsplit Single Speed Fans only 244 ss aes 95 5 3 Discharge Rep eee ta e ce avid eden dte dd ied esr obe 9 6 CIRCUIT CONTROL 3 A E E 9 6 1 Refriger ti n icto een ede reed E E Pe Ep e e E etre site eret uri 9 6 2 Gar eS dee nadie tpe OM ed Cet Ue 96 2 1 s DrainzEimes o see Eon E RC On ne t eee E ra ce RR E eS ETUR 9 0 2 2 PUMP Down Delay eere er EE ee RU Ee EO e Per fr HUE HR OE re 9 623 Demand DIE aer eei e votes erem ret bn ln On oen etes mese ANTES WEAT CONTROL a ER TENERE QR SERE EUER a EE ERE RAE ERR EN 9 8 5 cime ru eI ELA sub ea rU ee BRE E TECH RMCC I amp O Manual Table of Contents v 9 0 INP OUTPUT CONTROL a sven du into Peer oe a pedes eee tbo 9 8 DOT Cells and aai e rt Ge v iR ETIN FG 9 8 9 0 1 1 Programming Cells and Modules 5 neue eerte
210. e established at the Pressure Setpoints screens Each compressor pressure group must be defined separately at these screens Screens for Group 2 3 and 4 are accessed by pressing the down ar TOW Strategy N ormal F ixed Steps N The compressor strategy determines the cycling of compressors to maintain the appropriate suction pressure A complete overview of these strategies may be found in Section 3 Software Overview Users may choose from the following strategies Normal the RMCC cycles compressors to main tain suction pressure based on HP Amps defined at the Group 1 4 Setup screens see Section 11 2 7 Group 1 Setup using PID control algorithms Fixed Steps the RMCC cycles compressors to maintain suction pressure based the sequence of op eration defined by the user at the Fixed Steps Strat egy Setup screens see Section 11 2 13 Group 1 Strategy Setup RMCC I amp O Manual One Comp Always Remain On Y es N o N To ensure one compressor is always on within a select ed suction group regardless of the suction pressure reading select Y Yes in the appropriate Grp fields When a two stage rack is to be controlled the user must specify which pressure suction group is high and which is low This choice will ensure a high stage compressor is run ning when the low stage is running 1 4 Group Number 0 Disable 0 Group numbers are determined at the Pressure Groups Setup screen see Section 11
211. e letter in the Sensor Type field Offset 99 99 0 At times a sensor may provide a reading that reads low er or higher than the known condition being monitored An offset value may be entered in the Offset field to calibrate the sensor to actual conditions Output Name The name of the defined output to be configured is dis played in the Output Name field Location BB PP BB Board PP Point The board and point number on the 8RO board where the selected output is located is defined in the Location field The network address of the 8RO board is defined by a network dip switch on the board Enter this number in the first Location field Each defined output is physically con nected to a specific point on the SRO board This number is printed on the board above the output connection Enter this number in the second Location field The RMCC uses this address to locate the selected out put 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Log Interval 00 00 00 24 00 00 The RMCC periodically records the status of the de fined outputs and stores the information in the RMCC Log The Logging Interval defines when the data received from the outputs are recorded Bypass N ormal O n O F f N A fixed bypass may be assigned to the defined outputs in the Bypass field A fixed bypass will override the normal 11 4 24 Advanced Defrost TON ADVANCED DEFROST 71 12 00 Setup Advanced Defrost Options 0
212. e network ON enter 2 for Reset ON at the Reset screen 1 Off 2 Reset On 1 The RMCC has the ability to communicate via satellite The RMCC s Satellite Communication feature is config ured at the Satellite Communication screen To enable the RMCC Satellite Communication feature enter Y es in the Enable Satellite Mode field If the satel lite feature is activated users may enter the appropriate dis connect message in the Disconnect Message field The RMCC is capable of accepting inputs from both standard and Eclipse pressure transducers The RMCC as sumes by default that all transducers set up in the RMCC software are Eclipse transducers If any standard transduc ers are being used the transducer type must be changed in this screen The Pressure Transducer Type screen lists all transduc er inputs currently set up in the RMCC along with their board and point numbers To change the transducer types scroll through the list using the arrow keys until the desired input is shown Using the RIGHT arrow key move the cur sor to the input s Type field and select the desired transduc er type 0 Standard 1 Eclipse 1 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 12 System Logs and Graphs 12 1 12 1 1 Suction Pressure Log Interval Logs PRESSURE LOGGING INTERVAL ALL Groups 00 03 00 gt lt 5 The Logging Interval defines how often the data within all suction groups are
213. e not important to the RMCC As a convenience to the user a Units field is provided so that analog values displayed on the RMCC screen are easily interpreted Enter the corresponding units RMCC I amp O Manual of measure for a specified sensor type in the Eng Unit field Control Using D ifferential or 1st Only A vg Ma X Mi N D The control method defined in the Control Using field determines how to combine the values from up to four sen sors This combined or control value is then compared to defined set points and commands to determine the opera tional status of an output Users may choose from the fol lowing four control methods e or Ist Only The RMCC calculates the dif ferential of two sensors or uses the primary sensor value as the control value e A VG The calculates the control value us ing the average reading of one or more sensors e MA X The calculates the control value us ing the maximum sensor reading of one or more sensors e MI N The calculates the control value us ing the minimum sensor reading of one or more sen sors Up to three sensors may be combined with the current sensor Enter the sensor number of the desired sensors to be combined in the three fields following the field displaying the current sensor number The current status of the select ed sensors are then displayed in the fields directly below the sensor number fields The current calcu
214. e set in the up position other devices in a segment should have their jumpers set to the down posi tion No segment shall have more than two devices with the terminating resistance jumpers in the up position DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION SET TERMINATING JUMPERS DOWN J16 J17 9 DAISY CHAIN 1 TERMINATION ojl JUMPER SETTINGS 26513088 Figure 4 7 Terminating Jumpers for a Daisy Chain Configuration STAR CONFIGURATION SET TERMINATING JUMPERS P HUB OF STAR 7 LONGEST LEG 26513089 Figure 4 8 Jumper Settings for Star Network The REFLECS Networks 4 3 n mm Rotary Dials COM A and D only Each device that may be connected to a segment has ei ther a network dip switch or rotary dials that provide a unique identifier for each device on the network Devices on a segment may numbered in any order however gaps or omissions in the numbering sequence are not permitted As an example if a segment contains four devices then board addresses one two three and four must be used one two three and five would not be permitted In addition when setting network dip switches and di als both COM A COM B and COM D must be considered together If the last device on COM A is numbered five then the first device on COM D must be numbered six The REFLECS automatically identifies the board types on the network therefore
215. e turned on If a VS HP On Edge is not entered the RMCC establishes the value at 50 percent of the maximum horsepower rating of the compressor The RMCC will not cycle the variable speed compres sor on until a horsepower value above the VS HP On Edge value is called for Before that time the RMCC will cycle the lower capacity standard compressors to try and match system demand When the variable speed compressor is cy cled it will be brought on at the minimum horsepower rat Software Overview 9 3 ing not the On Edge value and will increase in capacity until the suction pressure requirement is fulfilled Once the VS compressor is ON the compressor rack operates and deactivates in the same manner as the Normal strategy described above 9 4 3 Floating Set Point The RMCC is capable of using the average maxi mum or minimum value of the four temperature sen sors or a single value from one of the temperature sensors as the float temperature The Floating Set Point strategy within the RMCC pro vides a method for varying the suction set point of the group based on the temperature within a circuit When ac tivated the Floating Set Point strategy monitors up to four temperature sensors within a circuit and makes adjustments to the suction pressure when the temperature is too low or too high The user establishes a range outside of which the RMCC is instructed to make a one pound adjustment to the suction pressure set po
216. each defined transducer at the Transducer Offsets screen to calibrate the sensor to actual conditions 99 99 Ib 0 Pressure transducers within the RMCC measure the current suction pressure discharge pressure and or oil pressure within each suction group Transducer configura tions are defined at the Transducer Setup screens Oil pressure transducers monitor the oil pressure within each of the twenty two available compressor stages At times transducers within the RMCC may provide readings that read lower or higher than the known condition being monitored An offset value may be entered for each defined oil pressure transducer within each compressor stage at the Oil Pressure Transducer Offset screen to calibrate the sen sor to actual conditions 99 99 Ib 0 Discharge Pressure 2 00 5 00 Ib 5 The transducer type defined within the RMCC to mon itor discharge pressure is selected in the Discharge Pressure field Suction Pressure 1 00 2 00 5 00 Ib 1 Suction transducers may be set up for each suction group defined within the RMCC The transducer type de fined to monitor suction pressure is selected in the Suction Pressure Group fields Oil Pressure 2 00 5 00 Ib 2 The transducer type defined within the RMCC to mon itor oil pressure is selected in the Oil Pressure field System Navigation 11 61 11 8 15 Host Network HOST NETWORK MENU 1 0NLINE Status 2 Set Device Z s 1
217. ececesessscececesescecececessaaeccecesaaececcecsaaececcscesseaececceesaeseecsensaeeeeeeenes 4 2 4 8 DAISY Onmeda Deni e e RUE 4 2 240 ode decessor eene Pe pe eet eec dtes eerta eet veo eee cue prevede 4 3 4 10 TERMINATING RESISTANCE JUMPERS COM A COM B AND COM D ONLY eese enne 4 3 RMCC I amp O Manual Table of Contents iii 4 11 NETWORK DIP SWITCHES AND ROTARY DIALS COM AND D ONLY esee enne 4 4 4 12 BAUD RATE DIP SWITCHES COM AND D enne enne ener entren tense nnne nennen nnne 4 4 3 NETWORK SETTINGS etel ivt Re eR 4 4 43 1 Network AddEFessess ae eene der 4 4 4 14 BAUDRATESELTIINGS an Ace ome eni aucaantau us Gh acc coc Coa Noes asd iu ir d 4 5 414 1 Case Controllers ssa nti epe dete eee certe be ces thesis ti cre 4 5 aedium OEE EUM a NN 4 5 S net PEOR 4 5 COMI niece nao altes aaro ed ee 4 5 4 15 FAIL SAFE DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ccccccccccecsssscecceceesececeecsescececesensecececeseaseececeseaseaeccecesusaeececessauececeeessaeeeeeeesenees 4 5 5 COMMUNICATION AND POWER CONNECTIONS eere seen eee sete setae ee
218. ecial Purpose Communication Boards Figure 2 7 8DO Digital Output Board 2 4 Special Purpose Communication Boards Special purpose communication boards are boards that either possess greater capabilities than standard input and output boards or combine the features of both input and output boards into a single package 2 4 1 8 Board When programming the REFLECS the 81O must be listed as one 16AI board and one 8RO board The 8IO combination input and output board is a com munication board designed to provide input and output functions within the same board when space restrictions do not allow for installation of dedicated boards Like the 16AI and the 8RO the 8IO must be connected to the RE FLECS to perform input retrieval and output transmission functions The 8IO has input and form C relay output con nections for monitoring of sensors and control of loads Since the 8IO has no memory capability the hand held ter minal jack is removed from the board The 8IO is shown in Figure 2 8 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 system reading falling outside of these set points is detected by the REFLECS a signal is sent to the alarm panel which in turn emits an alarm signal and displays the alarm infor mation on the notification screen Other features of the alarm panel provide the user with additional information and capabilities Alarm reset Date and time adjustment Storage of twenty separate alarms Audible annun
219. ecsssesessseeees D 1 APPENDIX E WIRING FOR CASE CONTROLLER POWER MODULE DEFROST MODULE AND PULSE IU ACETATE 1 APPENDIX WIRING FOR CASE CONTROLLER POWER MODULE DEFROST MODULE AND SPORLAN EEPR UE IS Op F 1 0 C T I 1 x Table of Contents 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 1 RMCC Introduction The Refrigeration Monitor and Case Control RMCC PN 827 1000 is a microprocessor based controller designed to provide complete control of all refrigeration systems The RMCC is the controlling component of a three network config uration I O Host Remote Communication that includes case controllers input and output communication boards remote communication software and a variety of sensors probes and transducers RMCC I amp O Manual RMCC Introduction 1 1 2 Hardware Overview Computer Process Controls uses both an RS485 host network I O network and an RS232 remote communica tion network to monitor and manage all aspects of refrigeration control Within the framework of each of these networks vari ous components are required to monitor system perfor mance control system operation and interact with remote communication packages In general a standard refrigera tion control network will consist of the following compo nents 1 RMCC 2 Various input and output communication boards 3 485 Alarm Panel 4 RS232 Bus Amplifier 5 Remote commu
220. ed Status Time 0005 minutes Ov State UNKNOWN Time Left sec SELECT NUMBER MAIN STATUS 12 00 MARIABLE SPEED STATUS 12 00 1 0 Bus State ON Host Net State 1 Group 1 Number Offline 0 Number Offline 0 2 Group 2 GRP1 GRP2 GRP3 GRP4 1234567890123456 3 Group 3 00 BROs RMCC 2 RMCC 3 485A 1 4 Group 4 0 0 0 0 1 8 8 8 8 4405 C CBs Total D Online 0 12 00 OX a rpm 9 07 act TX GRP2 STATU 12 00 SUCT 22 2 0 VS 0 rpm DSCH 20 00 9 Ambient 22 0 03 04 05 06 07 Da eye GRP3 STATU 12 00 SuCT 22 2 0 Vey 0 rpm DSCH 200 200 9 Ambient 0 C 03 0 05 06 07 Da 8 9 10 11 12 MENU 12 00 VS OX a rpm Ambient 0 05 06 07 08 RMCC I amp O Manual Appendix D 0 5 POWER MONITORING 12 00 1 Demand Status 3 Hourly Logs 2 Demand Setpoints amp Daily Logs SELECT NUMBER DEMAND STATUS 12 0 DEMAND SETPOINTS 01 of 48 12 00 Demand OFF Timer 00 00 350KW KWHRS EAK TIME DEMAND Demand Setpoint 5 0350 KW 00 00 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 Current Power Usage 0000 Kw KW TRANSDUCER 00700 00000 00000 00 00 00 00 Peak Power Today 0 00 00 Minimum Voltage 1 000 v 00700 00000 00000 00 00 3 KWHs Used This Mount 00000 05 Maximum Voltage 05 000 v 00700 00000 00000 00 00 Total KWHs Toda 00
221. ee Section 11 4 13 Manual De frost or Section 11 4 44 Circuit Setup 1 Add Edit Circuit Inverter Fail A contact closure has been detected from an input defined as a compressor inverter fail alarm VS1 INVALM VS4 INVALM see Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions IRLDS Fault A system fault alarm has been detected on an IRLDS unit See Section 14 4 Sensor Alarm Setpoints Leak An analog signal read from the optional leak sensor input on a CCB has exceeded the leak alarm level set point for the duration specified in the leak alarm delay field see Section 11 4 32 CCB Set Point Screen 2 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only Lo Avg Temp The average temperature of all cases in a CCB circuit is low See Section 14 1 Alarm Set Points Lo I O Module A low alarm set point for an Analog Input Module has been exceeded Refer to P N 026 1002 Ultr aSite RMCC Supplement Section 21 1 Viewing Alarms Lo Sens The sensor reading has fallen below the low alarm value for a sensor defined as any type other than 1 2 or 5 for the user defined alarm delay duration see Section 14 8 Alarms Lo Suction The measured suction pressure has fallen below the user defined low Suction set point for a duration exceeding the low suction delay see Section 11 2 3 Group 1 Pressure Alarms Setup Low Speed Proof A failure has been detected in the low speed fan proof of a double speed condenser Lo Xducer The sensor reading has fallen below the low
222. eecceenaeeeees 5 11 RUNE dU T 5 11 2 027 361Q and SRO PO ier ette a aeree qu ARLE eye tase es eco ete 5 11 5 10 BAUD RATE DIP SWITCH SETTINGS 5 11 DAO COM A and DNetWOrks EESE n 5 11 Case Conttollets Ree see e NE OAD cd d 5 11 5 10 1 2 8IO Baud Rates 23 10 27 COM B BG tee iie enia 9 10 32 tete tte Eee ede 5 11 TERMINATING RESISTANCE JUMPER SETTINGS cccccccccssssssceceecsesceceseseueeeecesesssecececesaaeccecessaeceeceessueseceeesaeeeees 5 12 8 12 INPUT TYPE DIP S WITGH SETTINGS eee icio yr ett ore 5 12 6 CASE CONTROL HARDWARE OVERVIEW ee eeeee eee coetu se eoa seen 1 22 5111 51 sese eto see sese en eee so etae eene 6 1 6 1 INTRODUCTION 5 eee RR RUN D EH EI IHRE 6 1 62 HARDWARE DESGRIPTION ro ERO E RECEPTOR ee ne Ee Te RENE 6 1 6 21 Case Controllers iussi esent iin edet eu 6 1 0 2 2 Input and Output Cabless tte nre hp ed IO RE HERE QR 6 2 623 P0210 7A cat C0121 711 HT I 6 2 7 CASE CONTROL
223. eed compressor operating within its middle range of speeds around 55 90 When the variable speed is 100 the RMCT will cycle on enough standard compressors to both fulfill the HP requirement and to allow the variable speed compres sor to lower its speed By keeping the variable speed in its middle range of speeds it is in a better position to apply slight corrections to the PID output to compensate for small fluctuations in the suction pressure The RMCT also has a dead band feature that cycles off compressors when the suction pressure drops too low This feature is described in detail in the System Navigation section below RMCT v2 10 System Navigation Screens Advanced Pressure Menu The following pages contain all of the screens under the RMCT s Advanced Pressure Menu that are different from the RMCC Pressure Menu Most of the descriptions of these screens will refer to the RMCC screens in Section 7 of this manual with only a brief description of the differ ences between RMCT and RMCC The RMCT screens that are identical to the RMCC screens will not be shown in this appendix RMCC I amp O Manual ADVANCED PRESSURE MENU 12 00 1 Status ess 2 Bypass 3 Alarms oat Setpts peed Setpts Setpts 4 Logs 5 Comp Setup SELECT NUMBER Appendix 1 Grp 1 3 Pressure Alarms Setup The Pressure Alarms Setup screens are identical to the RMCC screens shown in Section 7 3 4 However since only three groups may be de
224. een graphics Data Ranges and Default Settings Data ranges for data fields the information supplied in the help prompt lines are displayed in brackets and bold type 99 99 either at the heading for the particu lar field description or when a heading does not exist within the body of the description Suggested or default values for a particular entry are always shown in brackets and bold type immediately following the data range 99 997 15 5 Alternate Screen Entries Alternate screens are displayed for Standard and Case Control Circuit setup as well as for the multiple case con trol types If a screen description does not match the screen on the RMCC front panel ensure that the description is not for a different hardware or setup function System Navigation 11 1 RMCC Password Password required to change setpoints Press ENT for viewing only 10 02 96 Enter Your Password up to 6 digits The RMCC requires a password for users to log on and modify the system This ensures security of system set tings Passwords also determine the access level of the user New passwords may be added to replace the default passwords at the System Information screen see Section 11 8 3 System Information To view the Log On screen press the Enter key To log on to the system enter the appropriate password in the Password field and press Enter Default passwords are dis played in Table 11 1
225. efrost Output status in formation is displayed in the Stats fields These fields will display either OFF or ON Also displayed is the circuit sta tus which will display Refr during refrigeration mode Defr during defrost mode Ovrd during manual override mode or Drip if the RMCC is in the drain time period im mediately after defrost termination LstChg The times in 24 hour format that the refrigeration or defrost outputs were last activated are displayed in the LstChg field under the Refr and Defr columns Temp The current Control Temperature set point is shown in parenthesis in the Temp field Beside this number is the current circuit temperature reading Term The current Termination Temperature set point is shown in parenthesis in the Term field Beside this number is the current termination sensor reading If the termination sensors are digital no value will appear in parenthesis and the termination sensor reading will display either a for CLOSED or a for OPEN If no termination strategy is defined for this circuit NONE will appear in the Termina tion Temperature field 13 3 2 Standard Circuit Summary uw 13 4 Circuits Circuit summaries also accessible from the main Circuit Control menu For a description of these screens see Section 13 2 4 Network Status I O Board Status 13 3 3 Anti Sweat Status Menu ANTI SWEAT STATUS 1 Dewpoint Status 2 0utput Statu
226. efrost times may not be appropriate especially when running hot gas defrost systems If Door is selected as the Cleaning Override Switch only the refrigeration output will be turned off when the cleaning switch input is closed If a defrost is active the de frost output remains energized and the defrost continues as normal Cleaning Switch Type 1 Timed 2 Switched 2 Cleaning Switches perform cleaning overrides accord ing to the strategy defined in the Cleaning Switch Type field Users may choose from two cleaning override strate gies 1 Timed momentary switch that overrides the cir cuit OFF for a defined period of time When select ed the override duration should be entered in the second Cleaning Switch Type field 2 Switched manual switch that when closed acti vates the override and when open deactivates the override Cleaning Notice Enabled Y es N o To generate a notice in the RMCC Alarm Log when a Cleaning Override is activated enter in the Cleaning Notice Enabled field Minimum Defrost Duration Percentage 0 100 The minimum defrost duration percentage is the mini mum percentage of time a circuit will be in defrost If the Defrost Duration is set to 30 minutes Section 11 4 18 Circuit Set Points 1 and the Minimum Defrost Duration Percent is defined as 5096 the circuit will be in defrost at least 15 minutes 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11 4 20 Circuit Set Points 3
227. efrost types Defrost Termination S tat D sch N one R trn The strategy the RMCC uses to terminate defrost within the selected case control circuit is defined in the Defrost Termination field Users may choose from the following strategies S tat the will terminate defrost when it de tects a change of state from a dry contact I nl the will terminate defrost when the Coil Inlet Sensor temperature reading exceeds the defined Termination Temperature set point This set point is defined at the Circuit Setpoints 1 screen see Section 11 4 46 Circuit Set Points 1 Add Edit Cir cuit e D sch the will terminate defrost when the Discharge Air Sensor temperature reading exceeds the defined Termination Temperature set point This set point is defined at the Circuit Setpoints 1 screen e O ut the will terminate defrost when the Coil Outlet Sensor temperature reading exceeds the defined Termination Temperature set point This set point is defined at the Circuit Setpoints 1 screen N one the will terminate defrost when de frost has occurred for the defined Defrost Duration This duration is defined at the Circuit Setpoints 1 screen RMCC I amp O Manual R trn the RMCC will terminate defrost when the Return Air Sensor temperature reading exceeds the defined Termination Temperature set point This set point is defined at the Circuit Setpoints 1 screen
228. ell and sends a digital pulse whenever a user de fined transition type is detected The pulse width of the One Shot cell s pulse is defined by the user as is whether the pulse is a Momentary OFF Momentary ON or Change of State pulse If the One Shot cell is not enabled the output value will pass the input value on to the Override cell without modi fication Override The primary purpose of the Override cell is to provide a method of overriding the Digital Output Module Output to a user specified value instead of the value dictated by the One Shot cell Unlike other Digital Output Module cells the Override cell may be accessed from the RMCC front Software Overview 9 13 panel without using UltraSite The RMCC s Digital Output Module Bypass screen is shown below DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE O1 BYPASS Name V OUTPUT 01 Enable Command Type NORMAL 0005 minutes Time Ov State UNKNOWN T PREV lt gt SET Time Left 0000 sec Figure 9 12 Digital Output Module Bypass Screen The Override cell may override the Digital Command output to ON OFF or NONE The override may be either fixed or timed A fixed override remains overridden until the user deactivates the override using the Digital Output Module Bypass Screen A timed override remains in effect until a user specified time period elapses or until the user cancels the override Counter The Count cell simply increments the Count output val ue every time the
229. en Stepper Only 10 6 Setup Sensors 1 Define Sensors Section 11 5 1 Setup 2 Define Sensor Setpoints All Sensor Types Except IRLDS and Linear Section 11 5 2 Set Points all sensor types except IRLDS and Linear Linear Sensor Types Section 11 5 3 Set Points for Linear sensor types only IRLDS Sensor Types Section 11 5 4 Set Points for IRLDS sensor type only 10 2 System Configuration Guide 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11 System Setup Section 11 System Setup provides a system descrip tion for every screen programmed in the RMCC With over 150 accessible screens navigation through the RMCC can be complex The following descriptions provide informa tion necessary to access any screen what data entries are required how those data are entered what data ranges are acceptable for each field and any default settings when ap plicable The screens and instructions were prepared for RMCC software versions 2 0 and above therefore some of these instructions may not apply to earlier software ver sions An overall layout of the RMCC screens is provided in the foldouts in this section To help ease the use of this section the general layout of the section and the icons used are described below Page Layout A main heading entry is provided for each screen found in the RMCC For Menu Screens such as the Main or Pres sure Control menu screens the screen graphic is accompa nied by a quick reference table that prov
230. ennen 11 48 REV CONDENSER STATUS SCREEN NOW DISPLAYS PHASE LOSS IF PHASE FAILURE OCCURS 13 1 RMCC I amp O Manual Table of Revisions i Table of Contents t RMCCINTRODUCTION T 1 1 2 55 A 2 1 2 T REFLECS CONTROLLERS ener eee idee het reped 2 1 2 1 1 Refrigeration Monitor and Case Control RMCC esses ener netten eese 2 1 2 2 INPUT COMMUNICATION BOARDS S ete 2 2 2 21 J6AI Board ie d dee dein tice iie e eie een ate ued eeu iiie o RI IR 2 2 2 3 OuTPUT COMMUNICATION BOARDG ccssssccececssssceececessececescsesscececcsensnececesesaeeececessassececesenssecececessaaeececessaaececceenaaecs 2 3 224 aha stn A aia Baa A PBI i RIE 2 3 2 3 2 SRO Eorm C Boards SE te ie Sty 2 3 2 3 3 4AO Analog Output Board ecelesie edi iet ertt ete EE eerte eere 2 4 2 3 4 8DO Digital Output Board e eet p PE OI Re HERE RE 2 4 2 4 SPECIAL PURPOSE COMMUNICATION BOARDS ssccssesssseseeceessceseeceenececesensaseececesessececeseassecececessaaeceecesuauececeeensaeas 2 4 Zu T OIOvBOGFd seiten aee eec eite vec val E E eU 2 4 24422 lt
231. eparate temperature or pressure values as the control value These inputs may be used to control the fan based on sump temperature or con denser pressure values The Evaporative strategy activates the fan in order to keep the sump temperature or the combined pressure value below the set point see Section 9 5 2 Fan Control for de tails 9 5 2 Fan Control The Output at Setpoint for Condenser Control de faults to 0 NOT 50 as is the case with most other PID controlled systems In other words proportional mode begins at 0 when the input is equal to the set point and ends at 100 when the input is equal to the set point plus the throttling range Regardless of the control strategy used condenser fans are controlled using PID control see Section 9 1 The 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 control value determined by the control strategy is com pared to the condenser set point and throttling range and the resulting 0 100 output is used to activate the corre sponding percentage of fan capacity The percentage is used differently based on whether the fans are single two or variable speed 9 5 2 1 For single speed fan stages the percentage corresponds to the number of fan stages A 7596 output in a 12 stage condenser for example would activate nine fans Single speed fan operation may be further fine tuned by specify ing on off delays and minimum on off durations 9 5 2 2 Two Speed Fans A two speed condenser is
232. eps second e Hysteresis steps e Valve Type 4 phase unipolar Alco ESR 12 bipolar Full Travel 500 steps Maximum Step Rate 50 steps second e Hysteresis steps e Valve Type 2 phase PM 2 coil bipolar Case Control Software Overview 8 3 Alco ESR 20 bipolar Full Travel 800 steps Maximum Step Rate 50 steps second Name Type Default_ Mia Description Max Step Rate 1 100 The maximum number of steps per second the valve will support e Hysteresis steps e Valve Type 2 phase PM 2 coil bipolar 0 100 Number of steps required for valve to change direction Full Travel 0 6553 Number of step at which the valve is open 100 Table 8 6 Stepper Valve Parameters 4 eirost Contro There are three types of defrost supported by the case controller hot gas electric off cycle also called timed and reverse air For hot gas a suction valve must be wired to the optional suction valve terminal of the case controller See Figure 7 2 in Section 7 5 Optional Inputs and Out puts This suction valve closes during hot gas defrost The state of the outputs during defrost is shown below in Table 8 7 Suction Valve Start De OFF ON OFF frost pump down ON Table 8 7 Output State During Defrost Drip The fan may be configured to be ON or OFF during de frost Termination of the defrost may be via 1 termination temperature reached 2 defrost termination input or 3 expiration of
233. er the desired value using the numeric keypad When finished use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to move the cursor off the screen The F1 and F2 keys are defined as shortcut keys When F1 is pressed the display jumps to Screen 1 showing the case type the software revision the system status and the time When F2 is pressed the display jumps to the override screen where users may initiate manual defrost terminate defrost mode or override the system off The following sections show the HHT screens for all CCB types currently available System Navigation 15 1 15 1 Liquid Pulse HHT Screens 15 2 Hand Held Terminal Screens Supht 1 Setpt Valve 1 2 Case dF Setpoint Valve 2 X Case dF Defr 00 00 Failsafe 00 00 Term 0 Setpt Defr 5 NONE Defr 6 NONE Drip 00 00 Set Time 00 00 Case Type the four letter case type code See Section 11 4 16 Circuit Setup 1 for a complete table of codes Rev the software revision number Status the system is operating in either of five modes refrigeration on On refrigeration off Off defrost on MDfr recovery mode Rcvy or override mode Ovrd Time the current time in 24 hour format Disch Air the current discharge air temperature reading Setpt the discharge air set point This may be changed with the HHT Case dF the current case temperature in degrees Fahrenheit Case Offset the case temperature sensor offset This may be changed with the HHT
234. er to the RMCC is lost 11 2 3 Group 1 Pressure Alarms Setup UP 12 00 m Dchg Alm m s Proof DLly 050 RE A High Suct 45 0 Low Suct 01 0 Pump Down 00 5 Automatic Oil Res Copeland Oil Syste Window Om sec T PREV Y NEXT 5 SET DATA The RMCC sends an alarm to the RS485 Alarm Panel and writes an alarm to the alarm log when specific control values exceed HI and LO alarm set points Compressor alarm set points are defined at the Group 1 4 Pressure Alarms Setup screens The Group 2 3 and 4 screens are accessed by pressing the down arrow High Suct 20 999 Ib 45 0 The RMCC will generate an alarm when the measured suction pressure rises to the High Suction Pressure set point Dly 0 240 minutes 60 The High Suction Time Delay is the duration the RMCC must wait before generating an alarm when the High Suction set point is reached RMCC I amp O Manual Any compressor may be manually bypassed at the Compressor Bypass screen The bypass overrides the sys tem compressor settings until is entered at the Com pressor Bypass screen However in the event of phase loss or if the high discharge trip point is reached the compres sor will be shut down regardless of the bypass condition The RMCC displays the compressors as defined under Output Definitions page 54 but does not differentiate be tween groups To bypass a compres
235. erating in either of five modes refrigeration on On refrigeration off Off defrost on MDfr recovery mode Rcvy or override mode Ovrd Time the current time in 24 hour format Setpt the current control temperature set point This may be changed using the HHT CaseOffset the sensor offset for the control temperature This may be changed using the HHT Valve 1 96 the current opening percentage of the valve Disch Avg the average of the discharge air sensor readings Disch 1 Disch 4 the current readings of discharge air temperature sensors one through four Defr When in defrost this field shows the number of minutes and seconds the circuit has been in defrost This number will be equal to the fail safe time when not in defrost Failsafe the maximum number of minutes and seconds defrost mode will remain active Term the termination temperature sensor reading Setpt the termination temperature set point Defr 1 Defr 4 the first four scheduled defrost times Defr 5 Defr 6 the fifth and sixth scheduled defrost times Drip When in drain mode this field shows the number of minutes and seconds the circuit has been draining This number will be equal to the set time when not in drip mode Set Time the amount of time moisture on the coil is allowed to drain after defrost Humidity The humidity sensor reading Aswt The percentage at which the anti sweat heaters are operating Max The
236. ete Should the CRC test fail contact the CPC Service De partment for further information Enhanced Phase Loss Processing Y es N o N This is a special application in the RMCC and should not be activated unless you call CPC 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11 8 5 System Information SYSTEM INFORMATION Send Notices to 485 Alarm Disable Alarm Reset by 485 Alm Delay Before Alarm Dial Out DAYLIGHT SAVINGS MODE AUTOMATIC DST MANUAL SET START 04 05 DST MANUAL SET END 10 25 92 T PREV 4 gt 5 Send Notices to 485 Alarm Y es N o N To send generated notices to the 485 Alarm Panel in ad dition to generated alarms enter Y es in the Send Notices to 485 Alarm Panel field Disable Alarm Reset by 485 Alm Y es N o N To deactivate this feature enter Y es in the Disable Alarm Reset by 485 Alm field Delay Before Alarm Dial Out 0 240 minutes 0 RMCC alarms are usually accompanied by an alarm di alout sequence The time delay for the dialout is defined in the Delay Before Alarm Dial Out field The Dialout Time Delay is the amount of time in minutes the unit must wait before activating the call out sequence The delay allows an on site user to acknowledge the alarm thereby cancel ling the dialout 11 8 6 Send to 485 Alarm Panel K B 2 SEND TO 485 ALARM PANEL CHECKIT YES SENS LO 5 COMP P
237. etpoint value See Section 3 3 Condenser Control for more information about throttle ranges If the condenser is being controlled by pressure be sure to set the Throttle Range to 60 At the same time the PID Output as Setpoint should be set to 50 set the PID Output as Setpoint on the Condenser PID Parameters screen Shift During Reclaim 99 999 0 During reclaim it may be preferable to increase the pressure at which the fans begin to operate in order to in crease the temperature of the refrigerant in the system The Shift During Reclaim set point shifts the First Fan set point pressure by the number entered All subsequent fan set points are adjusted accordingly For example if the Setpoint is 175 the Throttle Range is 25 and the Shift During Reclaim set point is 25 the first condenser fan set point will be shifted to 200 and the last condenser fan will be activated at 225 when a call for re claim is received from an environmental control system 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Minimum Condensing Setpt Temp Diff Strategy Only 0 999 50 0 This field appears at the bottom of the Condenser Set Points screen only if the Temperature Differential strategy is specified in the Condenser Setup screen see Section 11 3 1 11 3 9 Condenser Setpoints Screen 2 CONDENSER SETPOINTS Fast Recovery Setpoint Low Pressure Cutoff Setpoint T PREV gt 5 Fast Recove
238. etup 11 63 8RO Form C Relay Output Board Baud Rate Dip Switch Settings defined 2 3 features 2 3 max number of boards 2 3 mounting in enclosure 3 1 mounting without enclosure 3 3 software setup 11 63 8RO Relay Output Board defined 2 3 RMCC I amp O Manual features 2 3 max number of boards 2 3 mounting in enclosure 3 1 mounting without enclosure 3 3 power requirements 5 7 software setup 11 63 A Alarm Dial Out changing baud rate 11 58 day phones 11 58 defining dial out delay 11 57 night phones 11 58 setting baud rate 11 60 Alarm Panel See 485 Alarm Panel Alarms defining dial out delay 11 57 filtering to 485 Alarm Panel 11 57 14 3 RMCC alarm logs 14 4 RMCC alarm types 14 5 Alarms Power Failure 11 56 Analog Input Module See I O Con trol Analog Input Module Analog Output Module See I O Con trol Analog Output Module Anti Sweat Case Control Circuits 8 5 9 7 enabling 11 41 example of 9 7 high low limits CPC suction stepper 11 34 high low limits liquid pulse stepper 11 33 high low limits suction stepper set points 9 7 Anti Sweat Standard Circuits 9 7 example of 9 7 logs 12 1 offsets 11 21 overrides 11 22 set points 9 7 11 22 setup 11 22 B Baud Rate Settings SIO ARTC 4 5 COM B 4 5 COM C 4 5 Bus Amplifier See RS232 Bus Ampli fier Case Control Alco valve settings 8 4 anti sweat heater control 8 5 control algorithms 8 1 defrost control 8 4 defrost
239. evaporative 9 4 evaporative strategy 11 10 fan run times 11 13 fast recovery 9 6 fast recovery for evaporative condensers 9 6 set points ambient split temp 11 18 ambient temp dead band 11 18 ambient temp during reclaim 11 18 discharge dead band 11 18 discharge unsplit 11 18 fan set point 11 16 fast recovery 11 17 fast recovery control type shift during reclaim 11 16 throttle range 11 16 setup 11 10 11 16 control source 11 11 control strategy 11 10 air cooled 11 11 temperature differential 11 11 control type 11 11 evaporative 11 11 evaporative inputs offsets 11 12 type 11 12 evaporative sensor combina tion 11 11 inlet pressure offset 11 11 outlet pressure offset 11 11 refrigerant type 11 11 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 split ambient dead band 11 18 ambient temp 11 18 ambient temp during reclaim unsplit pressure 11 18 split operation 9 6 unsplit set point 9 6 strategy setup 11 10 temp diff strategy 11 10 specifying refrigerant type 11 11 throttling range 11 16 Condenser Fans bypass 11 18 bypassing 11 19 clearing run times 11 18 min off time 11 12 min on time 11 12 PID Control 9 4 run times 11 18 setup control types 11 11 single speed 9 5 11 12 11 14 clearing failures 11 14 delay between clear attempts enabling fan fail 11 13 equalize runtimes 11 13 fan fail delay 11 14 fan off delay 11 13 fan on delay 11 13 fast recovery off delay 11 13 fast recovery on delay 11 13 force split in reclaim 11 13 numbe
240. evels specified correspond to preset values of the throttling range and the integral gain as 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 shown in Table 8 4 and Table 8 5 Throttling range deter mines the range of inputs that will result in a 0 100 pro portional reaction therefore the higher the sensitivity rating the lower the throttling range The integral gain is simply a multiplier that adjusts the size of the integral part of PID therefore greater integral gains result in higher sensitivity Table 8 4 Relationship of Sensitivity to Throttling Range TR and Integral Gain K for Suction Side Control Sewwy 3 S RE 8 Table 8 5 Relationship of Sensitivity to Throttling Range TR and Integral Gain K for Liquid Side Control Throttling ranges and integral gains not shown in the ta bles may also be used To determine the sensitivity number for a custom combination use the following formula Sensitivity 16 x TR 2 5x Kj Sensitivity calculated with this formula will not corre spond with the sensitivities listed in Table 8 4 and Table 8 5 The formula listed above is used to calculate custom sen sitivities only RMCC I amp O Manual Pulse Valve Control Pulse valve control is used by the liquid algorithm to control superheat The coil control algorithm calculates an output percentage and passes this value to the valve control algorithm The valve control algorithm pulses the valve on and
241. f set point is 50 the RMCC begins Low Pressure Cutoff mode The RMCC will continue low pressure cutoff mode until the pressure rises above 52 psi 50 2 0 System Navigation 11 17 11 3 10 Condenser Split Setpoints G2 3 Cs CONDENSER SPLIT SETPOINTS Discharge Unsplit Press Discharge Unsplit Press Deadband Ambient Split Temp Ambient Split Temp During Recl Ambient Split Temp Deadband gt SET DATA Discharge Unsplit Pressure 0 999 Ib N one N In some instances unacceptable pressure levels within the refrigeration system require that a condenser be brought out of split mode When the discharge pressure level reach es the Discharge Unsplit Pressure Set Point the selected condenser will be brought out of split mode and the con denser fans will return to normal operation To activate the Discharge Unsplit Pressure feature enter a value in pounds in the Discharge Unsplit Pressure field A NONE in this field disables this feature Discharge Unsplit Press Deadband 0 50 Ib 10 The Discharge Unsplit Pressure Dead Band is a value equally above and below the Discharge Unsplit Pressure set point within which the pressure level in the refrigeration system is considered to be acceptable This value ensures the condenser does not drop in and out of split mode when the discharge pressure hovers around the Discharge Unsplit Pressure set point 11 3 11 Run Times CONDENSER RUNT
242. f this value is HIGH the Select cell sends the Occ SP analog sig nal to the Setpt Reset cell If the Occup value is LOW the Select cell sends the Unoc SP analog signal to the Setpt Float cell Because the Occ SP and Unoc SP values may be sup plied by external analog signals and because the Analog Output Module requires a set point value to function cor rectly the Select value may be programmed with fall back set points which are used if the set point values become corrupted As an added safety measure the Analog Output Module may be programmed to supply a fixed numerical value that will be used as the PID Output in case the set point or con trol input s become corrupted Setpt Float The Setpt Float cell provides users with a method of raising and lowering the PID Setpoint based on the value of the Float Control input This cell is primarily designed for heating and cooling applications such as modifying space temperature set points based on outside air temperature sensor values To set up the Setpt Float cell users must supply three set point values a High Float Value a Low Float Value and an Output Range The Output Range is the maximum amount that the PID Setpoint may vary An Output Range of 4 for example means that the PID Setpoint input being read from the Se lect cell may only be increased by 2 or decreased by 2 The High Float Value and Low Float Value form a range of values that determines what port
243. failures The Digital Output Module is shown in Figure 9 11 Command Input Value DVCombiner One Shot Override 1 4 In 2 Out In 3 In 4 In 1 Trigger Out In Command on off normal Type timed fixed OV time Combiner Pulse Width Timer gt Use Alt Comb Comb Alt Comb Invert Output Suspend Count 00 Reset Count OR d el Schedif Occupied Logic In vy Sched In Out Alt Schedule m Use Alt Sch Comb Type Alt Comb Invert Output inn Counter Increment Counter In Suspend Reset Initial Count Trip SP Reset Type Select Proof Min On Off Int In In2 Desired Proof Output Faila am Actual Min On Off Times Min On Off Delays Proof Input Figure 9 11 Digital Output Module Inputs Input Value 1 4 In1 In4 Up to four digital inputs may be combined in a Digital Output Module 9 12 Input Output Control Delay Latch Time 26512021 Suspend Count and Reset Count The Digital Input Module has a cell called the Counter cell that counts the number of times the Output goes from OFF to ON There are two inputs that manipulate the mod 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 ule s Counter cell The Suspend Count input while ON prevents the Counter cell
244. fined in the RMCT there is no PRESSU 12 00 Group 4 setup screen High Suct 0 Dchg Low Suct Proof 030 Pump Down Automatic Oil Copeland Oil Window 010 T PREV gt SET DATA The Pressure Alarms Notices Setup screen is nearly identical to the RMCC screen shown in Section 7 3 5 ex cept there is no GP4 column Suction Discharge Pump Down Oil Fail Phase T PREV J NEXT The Pressure Groups Setup screen is similar to the Compressor Setup screen shown in Section 7 3 9 Howev er only three groups may be defined and no more than ten PRESSURE GROUPS SETUP compressors may be defined in a single group 1 Name Comps 2 Name Comps 3 Name Comps 4 gt SET DATA Groups 1 3 Setup The Groups 1 3 Setup screens are similar to the RMCC Group Setup screens as shown in Section 7 3 10 However the first compressor in the group is always V ariable speed and its type may not be altered GROUP1 SETUP a T t E 2 06000 p Also since there are only three suction groups there is OIL SENS no Group 4 Setup screen OIL PRES 00 0 HP AMPs 015 PROOF NO T PREV gt 2 Appendix 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Group 1 3
245. fingertips of the service technician or store manager However no network is com plete without the basic ability to provide annunciated alarms in the event of serious system problems CPC uses the 485 Alarm Panel Figure 2 9 to accom plish this task The 485 Alarm Panel is linked to all RE FLECS Controllers through the 5485 COM B Host Network Although the alarm panel has many features that make it a powerful notification tool the primary and most important function of the alarm panel is to receive signals from the REFLECS and deliver an alarm annunciation The REFLECS constantly compares real time system conditions against user defined alarm set points When a RMCC I amp O Manual Hardware Overview 2 5 0 and ne ermina The Hand Held Terminal HHT shown in Figure 2 10 connects directly to the RJ11 jack on a case controller and is used to make set point and setup adjustments during system start up or for routine or emergency maintenance The HHT displays several screens for viewing refrigeration system status making control set point adjustments and bypassing loads on or off Set point changes made through the HHT are transferred to the RMCC by the case control ler and overwrite any existing set points 7 S v LEGEND LCD Display 3 RJ11 Jack Numeric Keypad 26509010 Figure 2 10 Hand Held Terminal af emote Communication 2 7 1 RS232 Bus Amplifier The RS232 Bus Amplifie
246. for the day Demand The Demand field will read ON when the energy being used exceeds the Demand Set Point defined on Section 11 7 1 Demand Set Points Otherwise the Demand field will read OFF 13 10 Demand 13 7 3 Digital Output Module Status DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE 1 STATUS OUTPUT 01 NONE Tripped NONE Users may view the real time status of a Digital Output Module s outputs in the Digital Output Module Status screen The Command Proof and Count Tripped output values will appear as either ON OFF or NONE The Count value will appear as an analog value To view the status of other Digital Output Module Sta tus screens press the UP and DOWN arrow keys Timer A timer within the RMCC calculates the number of hours and minutes the current power usage has exceeded the defined Demand Set Point during the last 24 hour time period The timer resets every night at midnight and the cu mulative demand time is cleared Set Point The defined Demand Set Point is displayed in the Set Point field This is the desired level of energy consumption within the system Current Power Usage The current kW reading provided by the kW transducer or watt hour transducer is displayed in the Current Power Usage field Peak Power Today The peak power is the highest value of KW measured by the kW or watt hour transducer during a specified period of time The peak power for the day is displayed in the Peak Power Today f
247. from counting ON transitions The Reset Count input supplies a digital signal that resets the Counter cell to its user specified initial value Occupied Occup The state of this input tells the Digital Output Module that the building is either occupied ON or unoccupied OFF Alt Combiner Use Alt Comb The Digital Output Module allows for a user to specify two different input combination strategies a primary com bination type and an alternate combination type The mod ule reads the state of the Alt Combiner input to determine which combination method to use Alt Schedule Use Alt Sched Comb After the module s Digital Inputs are combined in the DVCombiner the Digital Input Module allows the user the option of combining the resulting value with the value of the Occupied Occup input Two different combination strategies may be chosen a primary combination type and an alternate combination type The module reads the state of the Alt Schedule input to determine which combination method to use Proof Input The Digital Output Module issues a command called a proof failure command as a result of comparing the final control value issued by the module with a digital value called the Proof Input The Proof Input is most often hooked to the physical device being controlled by the Dig ital Output Module s Output so that the RMCC has a means of assuring that the device is being properly activat ed and deactivated Cells
248. frost Enter Item 00 00 00 00 0 00 00 ENT Next ti Circuit lt gt Board 4 gt SET DATA gt SET DATA STATUS CCBHOTSDIC O1c 12 00 FCIRCUIT SETPOINTS 1 501 01 12 00 SETPOINTS CCBHOISDIC O1c 12 00 ase Lights Strategy On Supht Setpnt 8 0 Revision 6 082 Case Temp 007 0 Setpoint 025 Case Pump Down Delay 000 sec Sensitivity 4 Status On Last Term 000 0 Shut Down 1f Suction Grp Fails 0 Recovery O70 Coil In 2 005 Valve 100 0 Anti Sweat Control No Max Rcvy Time 000 Super Heat 008 0 Setpoint 008 0 Dual Tmp Alarm Set Point Shift 000 0 Asw Hi Limit 060 0 Humidity X Antisw 100 0 Dual Temp Shift Input None Asw Lo Limit 40 0 Frost Sensor NO Board T PREV 1 gt SET DATA T PREV 4 gt SET DATA T PREV 4 CCB STATUS CCB 01SDIC 01c 12 00 ALARMS CCB 01SDIC 01c GRAPH CONTROLS Coil 1 In YES Refr Leak Disch Air 007 0 Setpoint 025 Coil 1 Out YES Leak Alm Lvl gt lt Scroll Return Air OPEN Valve 100 0 Coil 2 In YES Leak Alm Dly Go to current Superheat 008 0 Setpoint 008 0 Coil 2 Out YES 7 Zoom out Zoom in Coil In 005 Bypassed Vlv 030 Menu Coil Out 003 0 Door Alm Dela PLEASE WAIT 1 S NEXT gt SET DATA STATUS CCB O1SDIC O1c 12 00 OFFSETS CCBHOISDIC Olc 12 00 0 xo mn 0 Case Offset 0 0 Coil 2 In 0 0 Frost OPEN Disch
249. gital Override Input 00 PID Output NONE 0 0 of 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 07 18 13 47 85 6 TuPn Sensor Relay OFF N PID Setpt NONE CUT ON 8000 0 OFF 8000 0 Alarms HIGH 0100 Low 0035 Dly 05 07 18 13 44 85 4 FIX Duration 00 00 PWM Output NONE Delay 00005 Delay 0000 Notices HIGH NONE NONE Dly 00 07 18 13 31 85 6 Manual Override NORM Logging Interval HH MM SS 00 03 00 Min time ON ODOmin Offset 000 0 07 18 13 28 8515 Leave a Notice in Alarm Logs NO Stages T PREV L NEXT gt SET DATA T PREV NEXT gt SET DATA T PREV 4 gt SET DATA gt SET DAT T PREV J NEXT OR DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE 1 STATUS 17 00 Name DV OUTPUT 01 SENSOR ALARM SETPOINTS 12 00 gennana NONE No 01 Name IRLDS OUTRE E NONE Type Temp Eng Unit PPM EQUI NONE Alarms High NONE Delay 000 m Notices High NONE Delay O00 m P Fault Alarm ENABLED ANALOG INPUT MODULE 01 BYPASS 12 00 Name AV INPUT 01 Enable NO Command 0FF Type NORMAL Time 0005 minutes Ov State NORMAL Time Left sec ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE O1 BYPASS 12 00 Name AV OUTPUT 01 Enable NO Value 000 0 Type NORMAL Time 0005 minutes Ov State UNKNOWN Time Left sec T PREV gt SET O MENU STATUS MENU 12 00 DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE 01 BYPASS 12 00 Name DV OUTPUT 01 l Main Status 4 1 0 Network Enable NO B Input Status 5 Network Command 0FF Type NORMAL B Variable Spe
250. gy T emp Temp T X V The strategy used to control refrigerant flow is defined in the Valve Control Strategy field Users may choose from the following strategies T emp Temp the refrigerant flow is being metered by an EEV controlled by superheat coil inlet tem perature coil outlet temperature When refrigera tion is called for the EEV opens to a percentage determined by the control algorithm e T X V the RMCC does not pulse 24 VAC but turns refrigerant flow ON or OFF base on the case temperature System Navigation 11 39 Temp Control Strategy D ischarge Air M ixed The strategy used to calculate the Control Temperature from the discharge and return air sensors is entered in the Temperature Control Strategy field Users may choose from the following strategies Discharge Air the RMCC will use the discharge air sensor as the Control Temperature Mixed Air the RMCC will use a mixture of the dis charge air and the return air to control the circuit temperature Percentages are defined on Section 11 4 46 Circuit Set Points 1 Add Edit Circuit Fans On During Defrost Y es N o To continue normal operation of fans during defrost enter Y es in the Fans On During Defrost field Enter N o to shut off all fans during defrost 11 4 46 Circuit Set Points 1 Add Edit Circuit alfa a CIRCUIT SETPOINTS 4Z1 Defr Duration Drain Time SDIC O1c Control Temp Fan amp ASW
251. he RMCC to supply the exact horsepower nec essary to maintain the set point Variable speed pressure control may follow either of two strategies in the RMCC pressure control software the Normal strategy or the Alternate strategy 9 4 2 1 The Normal strategy is the default pressure control strategy used by the RMCC This strategy dictates that if there is a variable speed compressor in a suction group then it will be treated as the primary pressure controlling device and any other standard compressors in the rack are secondary devices used only if the VS compressor is unable to fully handle the required horsepower The variable speed compressor will therefore always be the first com pressor on and the last compressor off when the Normal strategy is used Normal Strategy A flowchart of the Normal strategy s control scheme is shown in Figure 9 3 When an inactive compressor rack receives a call from the RMCC to activate the variable speed compressor turns on The RMCC attempts to operate the VS compressor at the percentage of its maximum horse power necessary to bring the suction pressure back down Note however that the rate of change is limited by the VS compressor s maximum RPM increase and decrease rates defined by the user If the VS compressor reaches 10046 capacity and the RMCC still demands more horsepower the RMCC will look at the standard compressors available and determine the most appropriate combination of st
252. he default baud rate select the baud rate used by the modem being dialed and select Y es in the toggle field Day Phones Night Phones Enter Number T for Tone Dial Phone numbers to be called when an alarm is generated are defined in the Day and Night Phones fields Phone numbers for daytime dialouts as well as nighttime dialouts 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 must be defined in these fields to activate the remote dia lout function When an alarm is generated and after the dialout delay the dialout sequence begins If the remote line is busy or there is no answer the system will dial the first number six times waiting five minutes before each attempt until a connection is made If no connection is made the system will dial the Day or Night Phones Two number six times waiting five minutes before each attempt If there is still no 11 8 9 Logging Setup 12 00 0 5 i 0 points if No Hourly 6 10 12 0 X gt SET DATA 0 The RMCC periodically records data to Logs according to Input and Output Logging Intervals defined within the RMCC These logs are configured at the Log ging Setup screen Select Configuration Type See Table 0 There is a limited amount of logging space within the therefore the available number of logging points is determined by the number of logs the RMCC is config ured to generate Each Input or Output L
253. he door switch Frost the demand defrost sensor status Refr Leak the ppm concentration of refrigerant currently being detected by the leak sensor Offset the leak sensor offset This value may be changed using the HHT Step Deflt By pressing RIGHT and selecting one of the options below the hysteresis max step rate and maximum steps values are automatically programmed with appropriate de fault parameters for Alco EEVs or Sporlan EEPRs These values may also be reset 1 Alco EEV Hysteresis is set at 0 Max Step Rate at 33 and Max Steps at 384 2 Sporlan EEPR Hysteresis is set at 10 Max Step Rate at 100 and Max Steps at 2500 3 Reset Hysteresis is set at 0 Max Step Rate at 100 and Max Steps at 0 If a default setting was chosen using Screen 12 the default values will be displayed in this screen They may be changed at this screen using the HHT Step Hyst the hysteresis value See Section 11 4 38 CCB Stepper Set Points Screen Stepper Only for a definition of hysteresis Step Hz the maximum number of steps per second the valve may open or close Max Steps the number of steps in between closed 0 and open 100 Control the valve control type This should read EEPR electronic evaporator pressure reg ulator Valve Type the valve type This should read Step stepper Valve Jmpr whether the CCB s valve jumper is set for unipolar UniP or bipolar BiPo op eration See Section
254. his value may then be sent to other modules or physical devices and it may also be compared to cut in cut out set points to generate a digital signal Secondarily the Analog Input Module generates alarms and notices and Software Overview 9 9 processes override commands diagram of the Analog In put Module is shown in Figure 9 9 Analog Input Module AVCombiner In 1 In 2 In 3 In 4 Out Alt Combiner p Use Alt Comb Comb Alt Comb w Limiter In nr 1 Filter High Low Limits Ratio Period Suspend Count OV Reset Count vp NET Process Alarm Input Alarm Disable Alarm Disable Notice Alarm Notice Notice Occup Occ Setpts Unocc Setpts Occupied Figure 9 9 Analog Input Module Inputs Input Value 1 4 In1 In4 Up to four analog inputs may combined in an Analog Input Module Alt Combiner Use Alt Comb The Analog Input Module allows for a user to specify two different input combination strategies a primary com bination type and an alternate combination type The mod ule reads the state of the Alt Combiner input to determine which combination method to use Suspend Count and Reset Count The Analog Input Module has a cell called the Counter cell that counts the number of times the Digital Command 9 10 Input Output Co
255. humidity above which the anti sweat heater will remain on at all times Min The humidity below which the anti sweat heater will remain off at all times Lights the current status of the case lights Pressing RIGHT followed by one of the com mands below allows users to bypass the case lights 1 Auto Pressing 1 will return the case lights to automatic operation 2 Turn Off Pressing 2 will bypass the case lights off 3 Turn On Pressing 3 will bypass the case lights on Status the operational status of the refrigeration and defrost modes Pressing RIGHT fol lowed by one of the commands below allows users to manually override the case 1 Man Dfr Pressing 1 initiates manual defrost 2 OV OFF Pressing 2 overrides both refrigeration and defrost OFF 3 End Dfr OV Pressing 3 will terminate defrost mode RMCC I amp O Manual System Navigation 15 9 Disch 1 the current reading of discharge air temperature sensor one Offset the offset for discharge air sensor one This may be changed using the HHT Disch 2 the current reading of discharge air temperature sensor two Offset the offset for discharge air sensor two This may be changed using the HHT Disch 3 the current reading of discharge air temperature sensor three Offset the offset for discharge air sensor three This may be changed using the HHT Disch 4 the current reading of discharge air temperature sensor four Offset the offset for discharge air senso
256. i 335 3156 sweat defrost For use with non CPC power modules without connectors Output Cable For use with CPC power mod 335 3158 ules with connectors Output Cable For Sporlan SEI and CDS 335 3159 valves Table 6 2 Case Controller Cable Harness Part Numbers 6 2 3 Power Modules In addition to the case controllers CPC manufactures a power module for distribution of incoming power to the controller and electric defrost circuits The power module is available with or without circuit protection See Figure 6 3 and Figure 6 4 The CPC power module configura tions and part numbers are listed in Table 6 3 The electri cal ratings for the power modules are shown in Table 6 4 The case controllers may also be installed within the case in conjunction with an OEM designed power module Figure 6 3 Case Controller Power Module 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 LEGEND Class 2 24 VAC 50 VA Transformer 4 Solid State Relay Anti Sweat Mechanical Relay Lights 5 Three Pole Defrost Relay Mechanical Relay Fans 26510003 Figure 6 4 Case Controller Power Module Without Fuse Protection Part Description Number Lights 120 VAC 1 Phase 240 VAC 3 Phase Defrost Full Con Siesoo Ys Yo Hus ve ve Ye pe 120 VAC 1 Phase 240 VAC 3 Phase Defrost No Fuses 816 3100 p Hess re pre re e 120 VAC 1 Phase 240 VAC 3 Phase Defrost No Fuses Hum ve v
257. ible area but away from custom ers and most supermarket employees Generally the RMCC is mounted on the rack by the rack manufacturer For information on setting up all components of a stan dard refrigeration system control network see Section 10 System Configuration Guide Mounting The REFLECS is supplied with four mounting holes in the rear panel of the enclosure These holes are accessible RMCC 1 amp 0 Manual without removal of any boards inside the enclosure Figure 3 1 shows the enclosure dimensions and weight RMCC REAR OF ENCLOSURE WEIGHT 7 LB 26502020 Figure 3 1 RMCC Mounting Dimensions 3 2 Location The 16AI Input Board SRO 8RO FC 8DO and 4AO Output Boards and 8IO Combination Input Output Board are usually installed within the refrigeration rack or the condenser by the equipment manufacturer Therefore the installer need only make the necessary connections be tween the REFLECS the condenser boards and the refrig erated cases l O Boards and Enclosures In some instances an installer may be required to mount an I O board There are no restrictions on the loca tion of these boards however for ease of network config uration it is recommended that the boards be located adjacent to the REFLECS If the boards are not located near the REFLECS ensure the leg and segment length restric tions described in Section 4 6 are followed The I O boards may be mounted without an encl
258. ides page numbers for the options listed at that menu screen In addition to the screen graphic key graphics are pro vided that show the exact key sequence necessary to access a particular screen Although most of these buttons are self explanatory several require further discussion cU Data Entry The Data Entry button means that data such as circuit numbers may be required before pressing the button These data vary from screen to screen and a description of the data is provided when nec essary 04 Follow On Keystroke When subscripted num ber appears next to a key graphic it means that the key RMCC I amp O Manual should be pressed that number of times to reach the desired screen In some instances a subscripted number may be followed by a symbol 24 This means that the key may need to be pressed an additional time to reach the de sired screen Help Prompt Lines Most RMCC screens contain a help prompt line at the bottom of the screen that provides the user with informa tion about navigation and field data ranges Within this sec tion the help prompt line shown is always the line that is displayed when the cursor is off the screen Generally the prompt line changes when the cursor is moved to a data en try field For information on what data are displayed see Section Data Ranges and Default Settings below Data Fields Data fields where entry is required by the RMCC user are shaded on the scr
259. ield along with the time of its occurrence This measurement may help determine the time of day to minimize active loads to help reduce power consumption KWHs Used This Hour The kW measurement for the previous hour is dis played in the KWHs Used This Hour field Total KWHs Today The total kW usage for the day is displayed in the Total KWHs Today field 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 13 9 Boards 13 9 1 On Line Status Description Pave Refer to the description of the I O Bus State in Section 13 2 4 O Network Status I O Board Status T PREV The Pressure Status screens display the current status of each compressor defined using the Output Definitions screens Section 11 8 2 Output Definitions The com pressors are grouped and displayed according to how many compressors have been defined for Groups One through Four at the Pressure Groups Setup screen Section 11 2 8 Pressure Setup If more than five compressors are defined for a group pressing the down arrow will display the addi tional compressors Type amp The Type amp field shows the compressor type C om pressor V ariable speed compressor or U nloader These types are defined at the Group 1 4 Setup screens Section 11 2 7 Group I Setup The compressor number is shown as defined under Output Definitions RMCC I amp O Manual Status The current operational status of the each compressor is given as
260. ill maintain within the selected case 13 6 Case Control Status Humidity When the CCB s Anti Sweat feature is active the cur rent status of the selected humidity sensor is displayed in the Humidity field Antisw The Anti Sweat percentage is displayed in the Antisw field This percentage is the cycle rate of voltage pulsing to the case s anti sweat heaters 13 4 3 CCB Status 1 Suction Stepper Only CCB STATUS CCB 01SDIC O1c NONE Setpoint Case Temp Last Term Valve X i Humidity Antisw 2 For suction stepper circuits this status screen displays current information about case sensor readings and set points Case Temp The current case temperature sensor reading is dis played in the Case Temp field Setpoint The defined case temperature set point is displayed in the Setpoint field Status The status of the selected CCB is displayed in the Status field One of the following conditions will be displayed e On the selected case board is calling for a stage of refrigeration e Off the selected case board is not calling for a stage of refrigeration e Def the selected case board is calling for a stage of defrost Lost the selected case board cannot be found with in the defined circuit Last Term The temperature at which defrost was last terminated within the selected case is displayed in the Term field 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Disch Air
261. imum Speed 0900 rpm Fan Minimum Off Time 2000 i Onsplit Deodband Fan Loy Qutput Relay T VS Maximum Speed 1800 rpm i Ambient Split Temp Fan Off Output No Relays VS Increase Rate 2000 rpm minute Ambient Split Temp During Reel V Decrease Rate 2000 rpm minute Ambient Split Temp Start Speed off CONDENSER SINGLE SPEED FAN SETUP 12 00 CONDENSER 2 SPEED FAN SETUP 12 00 CONDENSER FAIL SETUP 12 00 Fan Fail Enable NO Fan Delay 0030 Start Duration 0000 Fan Fail Delay 10005 Fan Off Belay 10050 fitgh to Low 0020 Fast Rec Fan Delay 0006 Low to High Delay 0000 Continually try to Clear Failure NO Fast Rec Fan Off Delay 0006 Low Speed HP 50 Num Clear Attempts SINGLE SPEEI High Speed HP 88 Delay Between Clear Attempts 0030 T PREV 4 NEXT gt SET DATA 1 gt 551 T PREV 4 NEXT gt SET DATA CONDENSER SINGLE SPEED FAN SETUP 12 00 SHOWN CONDENSER FAN FAIL SETUP T2 00 CONDENSER VS FAN FAIL SETUP 12 00 Fan Fail Enable NO Split Enable Fan Fail Delay 0005 Inverter Reset Count 003 Split Type SEE TWO AND Unsplit to Split Delay VARIABLE SPEED T PREV J NEXT S8ET D Inverter Reset Delay 0030 Num Clear Attempts Delay Between Clear Attempts 0030 T PREV 4 NEXT SET DATA SET DATA CONDENSER FAN FAIL SETUP 18 00 5 REENS N Fan Fail Enable NO Fan Fail Delay 10005 THIS
262. ing for the Floating Set Point Strategy therefore the strategy is disabled during defrost After defrost there is a period of time that the system must wait before reacti vating the Floating Set Point Strategy This duration is the Floating After Defrost Delay and is defined in the Delay Floating After Defrost field Extern Shift 99 99 0 In certain instances users may wish to increase suction pressure during hours when refrigeration demand is greatly reduced This shift to the Suction set point is achieved by entering a value in the External Shift field On a contact closure defined as a sensor input under Input Definitions Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions the RMCC adds the Ex ternal Shift value to the Suction Pressure set point and con trols compressor operation based on the new increased value Press 1 9 0 To Toggle Compr gt lt Exit Prev Next 12 00 CLR Clear Step Last Step I Insert Step D Delete Step Max Number of Steps for This group 20 When the Fixed Step Strategy is activated at the Group Pressure Set Points screen see Section 11 2 10 Group 1 System Navigation 11 9 Pressure Set Points the RMCC cycles compressors within the selected group according to a sequence of operation de fined by the user at the Fixed Step Strategy Set Up screens Each suction group may have its own strategy Options for defining this sequence of operation for each suction group are d
263. ing on the current operation Discharge Trip Point 5 499 Ib 350 0 On rare occasions a fan motor fails or a condenser becomes blocked causing the discharge pressure to rise to an unacceptable level thus endangering the entire re 11 2 11 Group 1 Variable Speed Set Points GRP1 VARIABLE SPEED SETPOINTS VS MINIMUM SPEED VS MAXIMUM SPEED MAX INCREASE RATE rpm rpm rpm MAX DECREASE RATE Altern Strategy T PREV gt 5 rpm on Failure set points for variable speed compressor operation are established in the Variable Speed Setpoints screens The default settings are appropriate for most common com pressors To verify variable speed set points refer to the compressor user s manual Screens for Groups 2 3 and 4 are accessed by pressing the down arrow VS Minimum Speed 0 9999 0900 The VS Minimum Speed is the minimum rated speed at which the compressor may operate VS Maximum Speed 0 9999 1800 The VS Maximum Speed is the maximum rated speed at which the compressor may operate Max Increase Rate 0 9999 2000 The Maximum Increase Rate is the maximum rate at which the speed of the compressor may be increased 11 8 Main Menu frigeration system The Trip Point is the pressure at which all compressors are shut down Trip Delay 0 240 seconds 5 The Trip Delay is the specified measure of time
264. initialized into the system at the Board Circuit As signment screen After initialization boards are assigned to a Case Control Circuit at the Board Circuit Assignment screen 0 48 Initialization Pressing from this screen starts the Initialization command The Initialization command scans the network for all boards connected to the circuit The status of all boards found is returned to the Board Circuit Assignment screen An asterisk indicates the board was found and it is currently on line A dash indicates the board is lost When a board is lost the system knows it is connected however the board cannot be located If there is no indica tion next to the board the board is not connected If a board is lost or is not connected confirm that the boards have been set up properly 11 4 53 Board Point Assignment Refer to the description of Circuit Inputs Setup on Sec tion 11 4 22 Circuit Inputs Setup or Circuit Outputs Setup on Section 11 4 23 Circuit Output Setup USER FUNCTIONS Backup 001 Setpoints Restore 001 Setpoints Copy CCB 8001 Setpts to 8001 Copy 4001 Logpts to ALL ALL Circuits CCBs gt SET DATA RMCC I amp O Manual To cancel the initialization command press any key The RMCC will return all information gathered prior to the cancellation of the command U pdate
265. int to either reduce or increase the case temperature If the temperature continues to remain outside of the range for a user defined period of time the RMCC continues to make pressure set point adjustments until the temperature is within the established range By varying the suction pressure set point to match the temperature requirements of the circuit the RMCC is able to ensure product integrity while achieving maximum rack efficiency nu mE The RMCC is capable of controlling up to 12 condenser fan stages including changes to normal condenser opera tion based on abnormal system conditions or special sys tem requirements The RMCC can control both air cooled and evaporative condensers with either single two or variable speed fans 9 5 1 Control Strategies 9 5 1 1 Air Cooled Condensers The RMCC may employ either of two strategies to con trol air cooled condensers the Air Cooled strategy or the Temperature Differential strategy Air Cooled Strategy The Air Cooled strategy simply controls condenser fan operation based on a single pressure or temperature value from either the condenser inlet the condenser outlet or the discharge line The Air Cooled strategy activates fans in or der to keep this pressure or temperature below the set point see Section 9 5 2 Fan Control for details 9 4 Condenser Control Temp Differential Strategy The Temperature Differential strategy attempts to keep a maximum dis
266. into the other sensor values or ignored entirely In either case Fast Recovery would not properly react to high pressures If either of these strategies are being used it is recommended that the Maximum strat egy be used for the Fast Recovery strategy 9 5 5 2 Discharge Unsplit Single Speed Fans only The RMCC will bring a condenser out of split if the sys tem pressure rises to a user definable unsplit pressure set point 9 5 5 3 Discharge Trip If the system pressure continues to rise after all other failsafes have been initiated the RMCC will shut down all compressors when the user definable discharge trip set point is reached 9 6 The RMCC provides standard defrost and refrigeration control of up to 48 separate circuits Information on circuit control using case controllers may be found in Section 5 Case Control 9 6 1 Refrigeration Refrigeration control of a standard circuit involves ac tuation of the refrigeration liquid line solenoid The RMCC provides two methods for controlling the solenoid full and EPR Circuit Control When Full control is selected the pulses opens and closes the solenoid based on whether the temperature within the circuit is above or below the circuit set point In addition the RMCC closes the liquid line solenoid when ever defrost is initiated When EPR control is selected the RMCC opens the valve when the system is not in defrost This allows the temperature in the c
267. ion Drain Time 9 7 Drip Time See Drain Time EPR 9 6 F Fast Recovery Hysteresis Setpoint Removed From Condenser Setpoints Screen 2 11 17 Fast Recovery See Condenser fast recovery Fincor Inverters dip switches 5 2 wiring 5 2 G Graphs 12 3 Guide for System Configuration 10 1 Define Inputs 10 2 H Hand Held Terminal defined 2 6 features 2 6 programming 15 1 15 10 CPC suction stepper 15 7 15 8 Hussmann suction stepper 15 9 15 10 liquid pulse 15 2 15 4 liquid stepper 15 4 15 6 Heat Reclaim See Reclaim HHT See Hand Held Terminal Host Network See 5485 Host Bus Network Hussmann 15 9 Hussmann PROTOCOL advanced defrost 11 31 electric 11 32 hot gas 11 31 defining compressor amp ratings l Control 9 8 9 17 Index 1 3 Analog Input Module 9 9 9 12 cells 9 11 Analog Value Combin er 9 11 Counter 9 11 Cut In Cut Out 9 11 Filter 9 11 Limiter 9 11 Override 9 11 Process Alarm 9 11 inputs 9 10 Alarm Disable 9 10 9 Alt Combiner 9 10 9 11 Notice Disable 9 10 9 11 Occupied 9 11 Reset Count 9 10 9 12 Suspend Count 9 10 9 12 overriding 9 11 Analog Output Module 9 14 9 17 cells 9 15 Filter 9 16 Override 9 16 PID Control 9 16 Select 9 15 Sequencer 9 17 Setpoint Float 9 16 fallback set points 9 16 floating set points 9 16 inputs 9 15 Control Value 9 15 9 16 Direct Acting 9 15 Float 9 15 9 16 Occupied 9 15 Occupied Setpoint 9 15 9
268. ion Type field This type determines the status of the system after defrost is terminated Users may choose from the following Termination Types N ormal when defrost is terminated the RMCC will prevent refrigerant from entering the coil for the duration specified in the Drain Time field see Section 11 4 18 Circuit Set Points 1 The RMCC will then resume refrigeration P ulsed the circuit will remain in defrost mode for the defined Defrost Duration If during this time a termination is called for by either the Stat or Temp Termination strategies the RMCC will remain in defrost and pulse the defrost heat on and off in an ef fort to keep the case temperature within the range of the Termination Temperature s dead band defined in Section 11 4 18 Circuit Set Points 1 The RMCC will shut off defrost heat when the case tem perature exceeds the defined Termination Tempera 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 ture s dead band and reactivate if the temperature falls below the Termination Temperature dead band When the defrost duration is over the RMCC will prevent refrigerant from entering the coil for the du ration specified in the Drain Time field see Section 11 4 18 Circuit Set Points 1 The RMCC will then resume normal refrigeration Termination Sensors 0 6 0 Each standard circuit may be configured with up to six Termination Sensors Enter the number of sensors within the selected circuit in the Termination Sensors
269. ion of the Output Range is applied to the final PID Setpoint For the example shown in Figure 9 14 a Setpt Float cell is set with a High Float Value of 100 a Low Float Value of 0 and an Output Range of 4 Consequently when the Float Control input is at 100 the PID Setpoint is modified by 2 When the Float Control is 0 the PID set point is modified 2 For all Float 9 16 Input Output Control Control values in between the Low and High values the PID set point modification varies linearly Float PID Control Setpoint 100 E gt 2 Occ Unoc SP from Select cell PID Setpoint Float Control High Float Value 100__ Low Float Value 0 Output Range 4 Figure 9 14 Example of a Setpt Float cell The output value of the Setpt Float cell is the final PID Setpoint value that will be used by the PID Control cell PID Control The PID Control cell uses a PID algorithm see Section 9 1 PID Control to compare the Control Value with the PID Setpoint values From this comparison an analog out put representing a 0 100 data range is generated The PID control cell repeats this command sequence in a con stant loop every few seconds The 0 100 output from the PID Control cell is passed along to the Filter cell Users have the option of by passing PID altogether in which case the Control Value is passed unaltered to the Filter cell Filter The Filter cell s primary function is t
270. ional compressor status line Condenser fan status must then be viewed at the condenser status screen The operating status of each defined compressor is shown directly below the appropriate number Four differ ent operating states may be displayed in these fields ON The compressor is currently on 4 The compressor is currently off e The compressor is on because of a manual bypass e The compressor is off because of a manual by pass Fans The bottom two lines of the display show the operating status of the condenser fans When a fan is has been config ured in the output definitions screens an F appears next to the fan number on the RMCC Group Status screen Ei ther of four operating states may be displayed below the fan numbers ON The fan is currently on e The fan is currently off e ON The fan is on because of a manual bypass e The fan is off because of a manual bypass 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 13 2 2 Input Status NPUT STATUS 1 SUC PRES The Input Status screen displays the current status of all inputs connected to the 16AI or 8IO board and pro grammed within the RMCC Each status display is based on the sensor type For linear sensors the status screen dis plays the actual or raw value of the sensor in millivolts re gardless of any offsets that may be in place 13 2 3 Variable Speed Status E SPEED STATUS RP1 RP coo coo 0 0 0 The status of al
271. ircuit to be maintained by a mechanical EPR valve or other regulating device The RMCC closes the liquid line solenoid whenever defrost is initiated 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 9 6 2 The RMCC provides control for four defrost types hot gas off cycle electric and reverse air If hot gas defrost is configured the RMCC closes the liquid line solenoid switches the master liquid line solenoid to divert hot gas from the condenser to the circuit and opens a defrost sole noid which allows hot gas to flow through the evaporator If electric defrost is selected the RMCC closes the liquid line solenoid and energizes a relay for electric heat If off cycle or reverse air defrost is selected the RMCC only closes the liquid line solenoid Defrost For each defrost type the RMCC uses a user defined defrost schedule to determine when to shift the system from refrigeration to defrost This schedule is defined at the Cir cuit Set points screen see Section 7 5 24 Circuit Set Points 1 When a defrost time is reached the closes the liquid line solenoid valve and either opens a defrost sole noid valve activates a relay or sits idle for a specified pe riod depending on the defrost option selected by the user Defrost may be ended by either defrost duration termina tion temperature contact closure or change of state from a thermostat All options are user configurable Defrost may also be ended by bypassing the system on 9
272. isplayed in the Fixed Steps Strategy Menu The Fixed Step Strategy for each suction group is con figured at the Group 1 4 Strategy Setup screens The Fixed Step Strategy must be defined at the Group 1 4 Pressure Set Points screens see Section 11 2 10 Group 1 Pressure Set Points for the RMCC to cycle the compres sors according to the strategy configured at the Strategy Setup screens Displayed across the top of the screen are the defined compressors and unloaders within the suction group Dis played down the left hand side of the screen are all of the possible stages the group may have according to the avail able combinations of compressors and unloaders This cal culated amount is also displayed in the Max Number of Steps for This group field at the Help Screen It is recommended that all compressors be configured OFF in the first stage of the strategy For the remaining stages select the appropriate compressors or unloaders to be activated by entering their appropriate compressor or unloader number in the stage fields 11 3 Condenser Control CONDENSER MENU 1 Status 4 Run Times 5 Bypass p 3 Setpoints SELECT NUMBER 11 3 1 Condenser Setup CONDENSER SETUP Control Strategy AIR COOLED Control Source DISCHARGE PRESSURE SINGLE SPEED Input Type Condenser Fan Type T PREV gt SET DATA O MENU Condenser characteristics that dete
273. ix B The Sensor Type is the specific type of sensor to be read by the RMCC There are 17 sensor types available The sensor type should be defined according to the physical in put connected to the 16AT board To assign a type to a spec ified sensor choose the appropriate type by scrolling through the list of types using the and keys The sen sor types listed in Table 11 4 input Type LiqLvl Float Type Liquid Level Transducer does NOT include liquid level probe this must be set up as a linear sensor see Appendix B Digit RelHum Humidity Sensor Non voltage Digital Sensor Linear KWatt DewPnt 6450Tm Table 11 4 Input Types System Navigation 11 45 IRLDS Infrared Leak Detector Temp2Press Refrigerant temperature converted to pres sure Pres2Temp 100 Ib refrigerant pressure transducer con verted to temperature 2Pres2Temp 200 Ib refrigerant pressure transducer con verted to temperature 5Pres2Temp 500 Ib refrigerant pressure transducer con verted to temperature Table 11 4 Input Types Refrigerant Type options R502 When the Temp2Press 1 Pres2Temp 2Pres2Temp and 5Pres2Temp sensor types are chosen the Refrigerant Type field appears These sensor types require a refrigerant type to be specified so that the RMCC can convert refrigerant temperatures to pressures or vice versa To select a refrigerant type scroll through the list of re frigerants using the an
274. k the coil out fan lockout temperature set point See Section 11 4 36 CCB Set Point Screen 4 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only for more information Valve Filt the valve filter percentage See Section 5 3 1 2 Temperature Control for more information Case Type the case type number See Section 11 4 16 Circuit Setup 1 for a complete list of 55 ype case types and their corresponding numbers This may be changed using the HHT Valve Mul Case the CCB number Bypass Viva Vlv Mul the valve multiplier See Section 11 4 37 CCB Set Points Screen 4 CPC Suction Stepper Only for more information Byp Viv the percentage at which the EEV will remain open during fail safe mode Case Type the four letter case type code See Section 11 4 16 Circuit Setup 1 for a complete table of codes Rev the software revision number Status the system is operating in either of five modes refrigeration on On refrigeration off Off defrost on MDfr recovery mode Rcvy or override mode Ovrd Time the current time in 24 hour format Disch Air the current discharge air temperature reading Setpt the discharge air set point This may be changed with the HHT Case dF the current case temperature in degrees Fahrenheit Case Offset the case temperature sensor offset This may be changed with the HHT Supht 1 the superheat of coil 1 Setpt the superheat set point for coil 1 Valve 196 the current val
275. l 1 In sensor failure enter Y es in the Coil 1 In field Coil 1 Out Y es N o Y To generate an alarm when the RMCC detects a Coil 1 Out sensor failure enter Y es in the Coil 1 Out field Coil 2 In Y es N o Y To generate an alarm when the RMCC detects a Coil 2 In sensor failure enter Y es in the Coil 2 In field Coil 2 Out Y es N o Y To generate an alarm when the RMCC detects a Coil 2 Out sensor failure enter Y es in the Coil 2 Out field 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Refr Leak Y es N o N To activate an alarm when a defined amount of refrig erant is detected by a leak sensor enter in the Refr Leak field Leak Alm Lvl 0 100 ppm 100 The Leak Alarm Level is an amount of refrigerant that when detected by a leak sensor activates an alarm The Leak Alarm Level is defined in parts per million Leak Alm Dly 0 120 minutes 10 The Leak Alarm Delay is the specified measurement of time the RMCC must wait before generating a Refrigerant Leak Alarm after the specified amount of refrigerant has been detected by a leak sensor Bypassed Viv 0 100 30 The Bypassed Valve Percentage set point is defaulted in the to 30 It may be necessary to find the optimum percentage by simulating a failure to test the case s reaction When the selected case is in a fail safe mode see Sec tion 5 3 1 10 Fail Safe Mode Liquid Side Control Only the case controller opens
276. l anti sweat heaters connected to the PMAC s 8DO must be given board and point addresses in the Input Definition screen Section 11 8 1 ON OFF Interval 1 240 sec 10 sec The 8DO on the PMAC panel pulses heaters ON for a percentage of a defined time interval This interval is en tered in the ON OFF Interval field Name 15 characters max In the field to the right of the anti sweat heater number a name may be entered Dewpoint All OFF All ON 20 99 25 65 The Dewpoint OFF set point is the minimum dew point below which the anti sweat circuit s heaters will re main OFF at all times The Dewpoint All ON set point is the maximum dewpoint above which the anti sweat cir cuit s heaters will remain ON at all times Between these dewpoint values the anti sweat circuit will pulse ON and OFF for a percentage of the time interval defined in Sec tion 11 5 1 Setup Percent On During All OFF 0 30 0 By default anti sweat circuits operate at 0 when the dewpoint is below the Dewpoint All OFF set point If de sired a lower value for All OFF may be specified Percent On During All ON 70 100 100 By default anti sweat circuits operate at 100 when the dewpoint is above the Dewpoint All ON set point If de sired a lower value for All ON may be specified Name The name defined for the anti sweat heater is shown in the Name field next to the number Screen Override Users may order a
277. l variable speed compressors defined within the RMCC are displayed at the Variable Speed Sta tus screen The first compressor within each suction group may be defined as a variable speed compressor If the dis played suction group contains a variable speed compressor the variable speed percentage and the current rpm reading is displayed for that compressor in the Speed and RPM fields respectively 13 2 4 Network Status I O Board Sta tus 5 04 0 Bus State ON Number O Line O 123456789 012535456 8ROs 16AIs 4A0s 8DOs CCBs Total 0 Online 0 RMCC I amp O Manual The I O Network Status screen displays the status of the I O Network No modifications to the network may be made at this screen Bus State The status of the I O Network is displayed in the I O Bus State field This field reflects if the network is ON or OFF Modifications to this status may be made at the Reset screen see Section 11 8 22 Reset Number Offline The status of all boards connected to the I O Network are displayed in the Number Off line field A 1 under the specified board indicates the board is on line A period under the specified board indicates the board is off line A space under the specified board indicates the board is not defined within the system The RMCC calculates the num ber of defined boards currently off line and displays this calculation in the Number Off line field The I
278. larm NONE Lo Delay 0000 gt SET DATA NOTICE NONE 0000 0000 12 00 CUIT ASSIGNMENT 12 00 SELECT ITEM NCTIONS 12 00 CIRCUIT INPUTS SETUP SDIC O1c 12 00 Board Ckt Name Ckt Iype CCB 01 81 01 Circuit number 1 1 CCB 001 Setpoints No Input Name Humid Ol ccB 1 01 901 01 SDIC 01 B Restore 001 Setpoints No Location 00 00 O2 SPARE 00 Undefined 99 Bicopy 001 Setpts to 001 No Log Interval 00 00 00 O3 SPARE 00 Undefined 99 E copy CCB 001 Logpts to ALL No Bypass NONE 04 5 00 Undefined A 99 5 ALL Circuits CCBs No Sensor Type RelHum O5 SPARE 00 Undefined 99 Enter Item Offset 0000 0 T PREV 4 nit U pd S end Arrows to Move ENT ac SELECT ITEM 01 1 Enter Item Arrows to Move 12 00 CIRCUIT INPUTS SETUP SDIC 10c 12 00 Input Name Case Location Log Interval 00 00 00 Bypass Sensor Type Offset T PREV NEXT O MENU LOGGING CCB O1SDIC O1c Dischg Air 00 00 00 Return Air 00 00 00 Case Temp 00 00 Superheat 00 Valve Pent 00 T PREV J NEXT SET DATA Coil Out Coil In T PREV 4 NEXT gt SET DATA 12 00 coi L oure 11 2 Superht 2 Valve Pct2 Refr Leak T PREV 1 SET DATA 12 00 CIRCUIT OUTPUTS SETUP Output Name Location 00 00
279. larm Time 1 O00 hrs 7 Zoom out Zoom in ist Defrost NONE 4th Defrost NONE Menu Defrost NONE Sth Defrost PLEASE WAIT Brd Defrost NONE 6th Defrost LSNEXT gt SET DATA RXCGEDTIENENILHIS FCIRCUIT SETPOINTS 1 12 00 o 0 mn 0 FCIRCUIT SETPOINTS 1 12 00 leaning Override Switch None Case Pump Down Delay 000 sec Cleaning Switch Type Switched Dual Tmp ALarm Set Point Shift 000 0 Cleaning Notice Enabled No Dual Temp Shift Input None lo T PREV gt 5 12 05 11 57 int 0 03 00 15 05 12 00 T PREV 1 gt SET DATA FCIRCUIT SETPOINTS 1 12 00 Demand Sensors 0 Demand Fail safe Time 000 hrs Alarm Time O00 hrs 4 gt SET DATA ANTI SWEAT STATUS 12 00 ANTI SWEAT SETUP 12 00 ANTI SWEAT SETPOINTS 12 00 ANTI SWEAT DAILY LOGS 0 of 48 12 00 ANTI SWEAT OVERRIDES 12 00 CIRCUIT SETPOINTS 1 12 00 DATE XON MAX D MIN DP Screen Input 1 Dewpoint Status 1 Dewpoint Humidity Offsets Dewpoint ALL OFF 25 0 00 00 000 00 0 00 0 Name Override Time min case Pump Down Delay 000 sec 2 0utput Status 2 0utput Setup ALL ON 65 0 00 00 000 00 0 00 0 1 NORM 000 Dual Tmp Alarm Set Point Shift 000 0 00 00 000 00 0 00 0 2 NORM 000 Dual Temp Shift Input None Percent ON during ALL OFF 000 0 00 000 00 0 00 0 B NORM 000 ALL ON 100 00 00 000 00 0 00 0 NORM 2 000 LECT NUMBE MBE gt SET DATA ANTI SWEAT STATUS 7
280. lated control value is displayed in the field directly below the Control Using field System Navigation 11 47 Gain 999 999 0 The value entered in the Gain field is multiplied with the voltage from the sensor input to determine the sensor control value The correct gain for the IRLDS sensor is 1 Offset 9999 9999 0 If necessary an offset may be applied to the sensor val ue by entering a number in the Offset field The number in the Offset field will be added to the sensor value Cut On Cut Off 999 999 N one O pen C losed Sensor Cut On and Cut Off set points may be defined as specific values for analog input sensors or simply as con tact closed or contact open for digital input sensors in the Cut On and Cut Off fields respectively The Cut In set point is the value at which the controlled output will turn on and the Cut Out set point is the value at which the con trolled output will turn off There is a 1 dead band around each set point Cut On Cut Off Delay 0 9999 seconds The Cut On and Cut Off Delays are specified measure ments of time the RMCC must wait before activating or de activating the controlled output 11 5 4 Set Points for IRLDS sensor type only IO SENSOR SETPOINTS 4 01 Status OFF IRLDS INPUT Name Eng Unit PPM Curr 0 Offset 00000 mv 0000 s 10000 s gt SET Curr VDC O V Gain Cut ON 0 Cut OFF 0 PPM
281. lay Refr when the circuit is op 11 44 Circuit Defrost Control nally enter in the third Copy Set Points field to per form the copy Copy Log Points Logging Intervals defined for one Case Controller are copied to another or all Case Controller when the Copy Set Points feature is activated To activate this feature enter the ID Number of the source case in the first Copy Set Points field and the ID Number of the target case in the second Fi nally enter in the third Copy Set Points field to per form the copy Make All Circuits CCBs When this option is selected all standard circuits are designated as case control circuits at the Anti Sweat Setup screen Refer to the description of Circuit Inputs Setup on Section 11 4 22 Circuit Inputs Set up for information on the data fields erating in refrigeration mode when the circuit is operating in defrost mode Ovrd when the circuit is being manually overridden or Drip when the circuit is in the drain time period immediately following defrost termina tion Tmp The average of all discharge air sensors in the circuit is displayed in the Tmp field Term The current termination temperature sensor reading is displayed in the Term field A Alarms If there are any sensor rack or bypass failure alarms in volving this circuit the A field will display an asterisk De tails about the alarms may be found in th
282. le and Pulse EEV Valve and Appendix F Wiring for Case Controller Power Module Defrost Module and Sporlan EEPR Valve Wiring Case Control Installation 7 5 8 Case Control Software Overview CPC s case controller supports both liquid side pulse and stepper valves and suction side stepper valves The fundamental control algorithms and their associat ed set points may be segregated into the following parts 1 Superheat control control of the temperature dif ferential of the coil only applicable to liquid side control The CCB is capable of supporting two pulse valves independently 2 Temperature control regulation of the temperature in the controlled space by monitoring either dis charge or return air This may be either liquid side or suction side control 3 Pulse and stepper valve control 4 Defrost operation including pump down drip and wait 5 Defrost recovery and system start up 6 Anti sweat control 7 Fan control 8 Light control 9 Wash mode The following sections describe each of the control components and their associated set points 8 1 Superheat Control Liquid Side Control Only The case controller determines the valve percentage opening by monitoring the temperature differential be tween the coil inlet and outlet sensors and comparing that value to the superheat set point The set points necessary for superheat control are shown in Table 8 1 Refrigerant control may be
283. losure The weather resistant enclosure is supplied with four mounting holes on flanges at the top and bottom of the en closure These holes are accessible without access to the in side of the enclosure Figure 3 4 shows the enclosure dimensions and weight Figure 3 8 provides mounting di mensions for the 8IO 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 ENCLOSURE REAR OF ENCLOSURE WEIGHT 11 4 LB 26501012 Figure 3 4 Weather Resistant Enclosure 16Al 8RO and 8DO Boards Without Enclosures Mounting 16AL 8RO and 8DO boards not supplied with an en closure are supplied with a snap track for easy installation The insulation sheet and I O board must be removed from the track and the track mounted using the 1875 inch mounting slots Figure 3 5 shows this installation proce dure Figure 3 6 provides mounting dimensions for the 16AI and 8RO board RMCC I amp O Manual 1 REMOVE THE 16 OR 8RO BOARD AND THE INSULATOR FROM THE SNAP TRACK 2 MOUNT THE SNAP TRACK USING THE 1875 SLOTS PROVIDED acoge repr PIS NUR ages TOUS MAY AD TENOR NAY CAUSE SERIOUS OMMAGE TO THE BOARD 3 REINSTALL THE INSULATOR IN THE SNAP TRACK 4 REINSTALL THE 16 OR 8RO BOARD IN THE SLOTS IN THE SNAP TRACK 26501040 Figure 3 5 4 8RO or 16 1 Snap Track Installation 10 00 4 75 T _TYP2PL _ 0 218 TYP 6
284. lowed by one of the com mands below allows users to bypass the case lights 1 Auto Pressing 1 will return the case lights to automatic operation 2 Turn Off Pressing 2 will bypass the case lights off 3 Turn On Pressing 3 will bypass the case lights on Supht SP the current superheat set point This value may be changed using the HHT Sens the valve s sensitivity value This may be changed using the HHT See Section 5 3 1 3 Valve Control for a complete definition of sensitivity RcvyLevel This number is equal to the recovery valve percentage see Section 11 4 29 CCB Set Point Screen 1 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only divided by 10 This may be changed using the HHT MaxRcvy Sec the maximum number of seconds the CCB will operate in recovery mode This number may be changed using the HHT Disch Air the current discharge air temperature reading Offset the discharge air temperature sensor offset This may be changed with the HHT Ret Air the current return air temperature reading Offset the return air temperature sensor offset This may be changed with the HHT Status the operational status of the refrigeration and defrost modes Pressing RIGHT fol lowed by one of the commands below allows users to manually override the case 1 Man Dfr Pressing 1 initiates manual defrost 2 OV OFF Pressing 2 overrides both refrigeration and defrost OFF 3 End Dfr OV Pressing 3 will terminate defrost mode RMCC I am
285. lues will be displayed in this screen They may be changed at this screen using the HHT Step Hyst the hysteresis value See Section 11 4 38 CCB Stepper Set Points Screen Stepper Only for a definition of hysteresis Step Hz the maximum number of steps per second the valve may open or close Max Steps the number of steps in between closed 0 and open 100 Control the valve control type This should read EEV electronic expansion valve Valve Type the valve type This should read Step stepper Valve Jmpr whether the CCB s valve jumper is set for unipolar UniP or bipolar BiPo op eration See Section 5 3 1 3 Valve Control Network whether the host network is ON or OFF CO Fan Lock the coil out fan lockout temperature set point See Section 11 4 36 CCB Set Point Screen 4 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only for more information Valve Filt the valve filter percentage See Section 5 3 1 2 Temperature Control for more information Case Type the case type number See Section 11 4 16 Circuit Setup 1 for a complete list of case types and their corresponding numbers This may be changed using the HHT Case the CCB number Vlv Mul the valve multiplier See Section 11 4 37 CCB Set Points Screen 4 CPC Suction Stepper Only Viv the percentage at which the EEV will remain open during fail safe mode 15 6 Hand Held Terminal Screens 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 15 3 CPC Suction Stepper
286. lve Multplier Combine Type Derivative Gain gt SET DATA Valv Multiplier 25 100 100 The Valve Multiplier is a value that allows the capacity of the EEV to be reduced The default setting is 100 and should only be adjusted in special applications where the valve appears to be oversized To adjust the Valve Multi plier enter a value between 25 and 100 in the Valv Mul tiplier field Combine Type A vg M in Ma X A The suction stepper uses four temperature sensors to measure discharge air temperature The RMCC must be told how to combine these values into a single discharge air temperature reading Users may choose three different combining methods A VG The RMCC uses the average of the sensors to calculate discharge air temperature e MKN RMCC uses the lowest sensor reading as the discharge air temperature e MA X The uses the highest sensor reading as the discharge air temperature Derivative Gain 0 25 0 The derivative gain is a multiplier used by CCBs that are operating valves using PID control The larger the de rivative gain the greater the size of the Derivative mode s reaction to rapid changes in the PID input See Section 3 1 1 Programming PID for more information on the de rivative mode 11 4 38 CCB Stepper Set Points Screen Stepper Only 23 22 3 85 Bien STEPPER STPTS CCBH O1SDIC O1c 12 00 Valve Type UniPolar Stepper Hysteresis
287. ly the RMCC Alarm Log displays all problems occurring in the RMCC at any given time The RMCC Alarm Log displays all notices and alarms generated within the RMCC Alarms are displayed in order of occurrence with the most current alarm at the top of the first page A notice is a low level warning that signifies an abnormal facility or control system condition A notice cre ates an entry in the RMCC Alarm Log and initiates no other signal alarm is a high level warning that also signifies abnormal facility or control system conditions An alarm appears in the RMCC Alarm Log and may be accompanied 14 4 Alarms Condenser VS Inv Fail Defr Timed Demand Tim eOut Dialout Unsuccessful Dig Alarm Override ON Fan Proof FP Level 999 Login High Speed Proof Hi Humidity Hi Term In Override Inverter Fail Lo Suction Lo Xducer Low Humidity Low Speed Proof Low Temp Low Term Manual Alarm Ovrride ON Manual Defr Manual Term Ovrd Ac tive Ovrrd Phase Fail Phase Restored Power Failed Power Restored Proof Fan 99 Proof Failure Pump Down RM Level 999 Login Re set Run Proof Sensor Open Sensor Short Set points Corrupted Setpoint Restore Error Xducer Open Xducer Short alarms The Miscellaneous alarm type also includes all Hi and Lo alarms generated by Analog Input Modules by a contact closure for on site operation of a bell light or other notification device Alarms may also be accompanied by an alarm
288. mber 4A0 Boards MAX 1 NOW 0 DST MANUAL SET END 10 25 92 gt SET DATA SYSTEM UNITS 12 00 12 00 12 00 Temperature Unit Deg F HOST NETWORK 1 0 BOARD NETWORK Pressure Unit PSI 1 OFF 2 Reset CON 1 OFF 2 Reset CON Date Format Month Day 1 PREV_J NEXT gt SET DATA DIALOUT SETUP 12 00 Change Baud Rate when dial to 9600 NO Day Phones di 21 Night Phones 1 Use From NONE to NONE Sat N Sun N H PREV 1 gt SET DATA LOGGING SETUP 12 00 F Select Configuration Type D Fuse Hourly Log Space logs points i No Hourly 0 1365 1 0920 819 10 2 256 682 12 UsediO 7 H PREV I NEXT gt SET DATA GRAPHS 72 00 1 Suction Groups 5 Comp Runtimes 2 Sensors 6 Fans Runtimes 3 Circuits 2 6 SELECT NUMBE SELECT 12 00 SELECT ITEM 12 00 SELECT ITEM 12 00 q SELECT 12 00 1 1 ALARMS 1 of 129 12 00 71 DISCHARGE D1 AMBIENT TEMP MbFJ 01 lo1 CCB 01 H Date Time Description D2 GROUP 1 2 E 007 0 GROUP 42 E 00 0 8 8 pa 2 B Enter Item Enter Item Enter Item of 01 D CLR EERDE NEED 1234567891011 12 135 14 15 1234567891011 12 13 14 15 HEPUNSIPEDESUPDTS SELECT 12 00 GRAPH CONTROLS SELECT ITEM 12 00 SELECT 12 00 D1 G1 SUC PRS 01 MDFJ 01 TMP D1 OTCCBOTDschAir 61 SUC TMP gt lt Scroll 02 MDFJ 01 CSW 02 OTCCBOTRtrnAir Go to current Z Zoom out Zoom Menu PLEASE WAIT a aE ows 10 accept CLR Escape ows to Move t CLR Es
289. mode after reaching the Discharge Unsplit Pressure Equalize Runtimes Y es N o N The real time clock within the RMCC records the cu mulative runtimes of each condenser fan The RMCC may be configured to select condenser fans for operation based on which fans have the fewest operational hours by select ing Y for Yes in the Equalize Runtimes field To prevent condenser damage condenser manufactur ers recommend that condenser fan cycles should be config ured so that the fans closest to the condenser manifold always cycle on first These fans will not always cycle on first when runtimes are equalized 11 3 5 3 Condenser Fan Fail Setup 62 021 CONDENSER FAN FAIL SETUP Fan Fail Enable NO Fan Fail Delay 10005 Continually try to Clear 0 Num Clear Attempts Delay Between Clear Attempts 0030 sec T PREV 4 gt SET DATA Fan Fail Enable Y es N o N When the Fan Fail Enable field is set to YES the RMCC will check for condenser fan failure by monitoring System Navigation 11 13 the condenser fan proof inputs see Input Definitions on Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions Fan Fail Delay 0 3600 sec 5 sec If a fan proof indicates a fan failure for a duration equal to the Fan Fail Delay the RMCC will consider that fan to have failed Continually try to Clear Failure Y es N o N When this field is set to YES the RMCC will automat icall
290. mostatic control of refrigerant supply to the coil If the case temper ature is satisfied no refrigerant is allowed to flow If the case temperature is too high refrigerant is allowed to flow and is then regulated by the superheat control algorithm Temperature Control The method of determining case temperature is selected as a set point and may be supplied by a single sensor or a RMCC I amp O Manual combination of the return air and discharge air sensors us ing the Dsch set point shown in Table 8 2 Liquid side control uses superheat control discussed earlier while refrigerant is being supplied If the case tem perature is greater than the desired set point gt dead band the coil control algorithm is invoked and refrigerant is al lowed to flow The refrigerant flow will be stopped when the case temperature is less than the desired set point 1 2 dead band Valve Filter At times the EEV may react too quickly to the control commands supplied by the CCB To compensate the CCB may be programmed with a valve filter value The change Case Control Software Overview 8 1 in valve opening or closing called for by the RMCC during each six second control loop is automatically multiplied by the valve filter percentage resulting in a smaller adjust ment to the EEV For example if the RMCC ordered an EEV to open would open to 60 at the end of the six second control loop An EEV with a filter rating of
291. mpres sor will return to normal operation Copeland Oil System Y es N o N Enabling the Copeland Oil System for a compressor group disables Oil Sensor monitoring that may be set up for individual compressors see Section 11 2 7 Group 1 Setup The Copeland Oil System allows the RMCC to take samples of oil input from a compressor and determine low 11 4 Main Menu oil levels by building a percentage of good versus bad read ings The Copeland Oil System takes a number of pressure readings during a user defined time window 0 120 sec If during this window the oil readings are 10096 good the compressor operates as normal If the readings are below 100 good the sets up a time out period the length of which is dependent on the percentage value low er percentages generate a smaller time out period than higher percentages If the percentage of bad oil readings continues throughout the length of the time out period the compressor will bypass OFF and an alarm will be written to the RMCC Alarm Log Table 11 2 shows the percentag es and their corresponding time out periods If the percentage of good readings changes during a time out the time out period will change and the percent age of time elapsed will be applied to the new time out pe riod For example if a compressor had 6096 good readings the time out period would be twelve minutes Six minutes into the time period the percentage of good readi
292. n A timed override remains in effect until a user specified time period elapses or until the user cancels the override The output from the Override cell is the final Analog PID PWM Loop Output This value is also sent to the Se quencer and PWM cells Sequencer The Sequencer cell simply activates a certain percent age of the Digital Stage 1 8 Outputs based on the percent age of the PID output For example if the PID output is 50 the Sequencer cell will activate 50 of the total de fined outputs The Sequencer cell always rounds the PID value down in other words if there are four stages defined in a Sequencer cell and the output is 74 the Sequencer cell will treat the output value as 50 and only activate two stages If the output then climbed above 75 however a third stage would come on If desired delays may be specified for stage activation and deactivation Also the definitions of ON and OFF may be defined as either ON OFF or NONE In other words when the Sequencer cell calls for an output to be ON or OFF the actual output can be configured to be NONE OFF ON NONE or even OFF ON PWM The PWM cell short for Pulse Width Modulation con verts the PID output percentage to a periodic ON pulse The period of time over which the pulse takes place is called the Output Time The PWM cell turns the PWM output ON for a percentage of the Output Time equal to the PID percent age For example if the PID output is 60 an
293. n 11 4 48 Circuit Set Points 3 Add Edit Circuit 11 4 30 CCB Set Points Screen 1 CPC Suction Stepper Only D E ESI 52 NS E we CCB SETPOINTS CCB 01 SDIC O1c Revision 6 Sensitivity Update Rate Asw Hi Limit Asw Lo Limit Frost Sensor T PREV J NEXT gt SET DATA RMCC I amp O Manual Using this screen users may set up valve sensitivity update rate anti sweat heaters and demand defrost sensors for suction stepper CCBs Sensitivity 0 9 4 Sensitivity is a value that either increases or decreases the reaction of the suction stepper to case temperature changes The lower the sensitivity the slower the reaction time the higher the sensitivity the faster the reaction time For a more detailed explanation of sensitivity see Section 6 Case Control System Navigation 11 33 Update Rate 1 60 6 The Update Rate is the number of seconds it takes for the suction valve to complete a single control loop Lower update rate values will cause the valve to react faster to case temperature changes while high update rate values will slow the valve s reaction time The default value six sec onds should be a sufficient update rate for nearly all cases however if the case temperature is fluctuating because the valve is overreacting to temperature changes a higher up date rate might be necessary Asw Hi Limit 25 100 60 0 Asw Lo Limit 0
294. n any value between 24 V AC OM FM POWER 1 and 31 however network restrictions limit the actual SUPPLY number of boards that may reside on both the COM A and COM D networks at one time These restrictions are given in Section 4 7 Number of Devices per Segment Use Fig ure 5 13 to determine the switch settings for 16AI 8RO and 8RO FC boards If a pulse type input is connected to a 16AI Board with software older than version E 02 it must be connected to input one and rocker number eight on the board s network dip switch must be configured ON or in the up position EARTH GROUND OR 24 VAC POWER SUPPLY EARTH GROUND 26513097 Figure 5 13 Network Address Settings for Dip Switch S1 or S3 on I O Boards Figure 5 12 One 8IO Wired to a 24 V AC Line with a Ground on Either Side 5 10 Network Settings 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Rotary Dials on 810 Board The 8IO board uses rotary dials to set the network ad dress in lieu of dip switches The rotary dial S1 is used to define the output portion of the board Therefore the board may only be defined as board one through nine Likewise dial S2 is used to define the input portion of the board and may be set from one to nine Do not select the
295. nalog RMCC I amp O Manual Value The current sensor reading is shown in the Value field The and CO fields display the cut in and cut out set points respectively When the sensor value rises above the cut in value the sensor s controlled output will activate When the sensor value falls below the cut out value the controlled output will deactivate sor and if currently in override mode the time remaining in the override duration Name The and Name fields display the sensor number and the sensor name respectively Ovrd The Ovrd field displays the number of the alarm over ride input assigned to each sensor St The St field displays the operational status either ON or OFF of the alarm override for each sensor Type The Type field shows whether the alarm override is fixed or timed for each sensor Time For timed overrides the amount of time remaining in the override duration is shown in the Time field values while the Command Alarm Notice and Count Tripped inputs will appear as either OFF ON or NONE To view the status of other Analog Input Modules press the UP and DOWN arrow keys 13 7 2 Analog Output Module Status ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE Name INPUT PID Output PID Setpt PWM Output 1 STATUS 01 Stages T PREV System Navigation 13 9 Users may view the real time status of an Analog Out put Module s outputs in the Analog Out
296. nals 1 and 2 are the invert er s emergency stop E STOP contacts When this connection is open the inverter will be overridden off If desired terminals 1 and 2 may be wired to a normally closed 8RO relay so that the RMCC may be configured to stop the inverter when necessary Otherwise place a jumper between these terminals 5 2 COM C Wiring 2 Jumper 3 to 9 Place a jumper between ter minals 3 and 9 3 Inverter Reset Setup allow the RMCC to automatically reset the inverter connect ter minal 9 to one contact of the defined INV x RESET relay where X equals the group number of the compressor Connect the oth er contact to the compressor relay see step 4 The INV RESET relay must be set up in the system software see Section 7 9 2 Out put Definitions 4 Compressor Relay Connect terminals 7 and 12 to one contact of the defined CMP xx re lay where XX equals the compressor num ber Connect the other contact of the relay to the VS Alarm relay see step 4 The CMP re lay must be set up in the system software see Section 7 9 2 Output Definitions 5 4 Analog Output 0 10 VDC signal from a 4AO board determines the RPM of the variable speed compressor Wire the positive terminal of this 4AO point to terminal 27 on the inverter s contact strips Wire the nega tive terminal to terminal 24 The 4AO board and point address must be set up as a vari able speed compressor output VS COMP 1
297. nce a category has been selected the user must also specify an instance for graphing within the category Select a category from the menu and then select the instance from the list RMCC I amp O Manual GRAPH CONTROLS gt lt Scroll Go to current Z Zoom out Zoom in 0 Menu PLEASE WAIT Make Selection The Control Screen is displayed while a graph is com piling The screen displays the controls for viewing a graph such as scrolling zooming and exiting to the main menu 12 2 2 Graph View int 0 03 00 5 0 0 The View Graph screen displays the requested com piled graph Viewing controls such as scrolling zooming and exiting to the main menu are active in this screen System Navigation 12 3 13 Status Screens Status screens display current information about the RMCC and Case Control system Users may view information such as the status of alarms inputs outputs and board communication 13 1 Main Status Screen 12 00 0 0 05 06 07 08 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ENT LogOn lt gt Scroll 1 2 10 The Main Status screen may be accessed without log ging into the system After the unit is turned on the unit goes through a software check then the main status screen is displayed From this screen the arrow keys allow users to scroll through additional RMCC status screens to view current information about specific components within the
298. ndenser Hi Sens The high alarm value for a sensor defined as any type other than 1 2 5 or H has been ex ceeded for the user defined alarm delay duration see Section 14 4 Sensor Alarm Setpoints Hi Suction The measured suction pressure has risen above the user defined High Suction set point for a duration exceeding the high suction delay see Section 11 2 3 Group 1 Pressure Alarms Setup Table 14 1 RMCC Alarm Log Notice and Alarm Messages RMCC I amp O Manual System Navigation 14 5 Notice Alarm Description Message Hi Temp The high alarm value for an input defined as a circuit temperature sensor 01 TEMP 48 TEMP see Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions has been exceeded for the user defined alarm delay duration see Section 11 4 12 Alarm Set Points Hi Term The high alarm value for an input defined as a circuit defrost termination sensor 01 TEMP 48 TEMP see Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions has been exceeded for the user defined alarm delay duration see Section 11 4 12 Alarm Set Points Hi Xducer The high alarm value for a sensor defined as either 1 2 or 5 has been exceeded for the user defined alarm delay duration see Section 14 4 Sensor Alarm Setpoints Host Bus Network Down The RMCC cannot connect to the 485 Alarm box or to other REFLECS controllers on the Host Bus COM B network In Override A manual override has been initiated at the Manual Defrost screen s
299. ngs drops to 3096 This immediately changes the time out period from 12 minutes to 5 minutes Since six of the twelve min utes in the previous time out period i e 50 of the time had already passed the RMCC continues with the new time out period as if 2 5 minutes 50 of the new period has already elapsed Table 11 2 Copeland Oil Time Out Periods vs Percentages 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11 2 4 Pressure Alarms Notices Setup PRESSURE ALARMS NOTICES SETUP GP1 GP2 GP3 Suction A A Discharge A Pump Down A A A N Oil Fail Phase T PREV J NEXT gt SET DATA The RMCC may be configured to generate either an alarm or notice when user defined Alarm set point condi tions are met An alarm is a high level warning that indi 11 2 5 Checkit Sensor Setup CheckIt SENSOR SETUP Alarm Setpoints 150 Notice Setpoint 155 Disabled During Hot Gas Disabled During Reclaim gt SET DATA If a Checkit sensor is defined as an input at the Input Definitions screen see Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions the RMCC may be configured to generate an alarm when the input senses a low liquid level within the system at the Checkit Sensor Setup screen Alarm Setpoint Notice Setpoint 0 240 150 135 The Checkit sensor continuously monitors the refriger ation system for a temperature increase indicating low liq
300. nic expansion valve is provided If a second valve is used a valve relay must be installed as shown in Figure 6 1 10 Wiring for these connections is shown in Figure 7 2 Optional Inputs and Outputs PULSE CASE CONTROLLER BASE PLATE REMOVED DOOR FROST SENSOR SWITCH 2 9 gt o m 2 EE CHANGE TODEMAND 1 2 3 4 OF SENSOR TO SENSOR STATE ELEMENT DETAIL LEAK SENSOR TO SECOND 5 VALVE 24 E ap SOS 1 AC1 2 VALVE 2 D o 1 DETAIL 26502004 Figure 7 2 Case Controller Optional Inputs and Outputs Wiring 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 7 6 7 6 1 CPC s case controller input cable harness 335 3151 is designed for use with either a pulse or stepper valve case controller The connector is constructed with 18 AWG col or coded wire with a male end 20 pin connector for con nection to the case controller Female connectors are supplied for each of the sensors and wire leads are supplied for an optional suction valve and the RS485 network The schematic diagram for the cable is shown in Figure 7 3 Cable Harnesses Input Cable COIL IN CASE CONTROLLER BLUE BLUE COIL OUT DISCHARGE AIR GREEN GREEN PURPLE PURPLE BLUE WHITE BLUE WHITE RED WHITE RED WHITE ORANGE ORANGE GRAY GRAY BLACK RED WHITE BLACK RETURN AIR COIL 2 IN
301. nication modem 6 Network wiring 7 Sensors and loads The following sections provide an overview of the function of each of these components A more detailed ex amination of the installation and configuration of these components for actual in store operation is provided in Section 3 Hardware Mounting 2 1 REFLECS Controllers The brain of any CPC network is the REFLECS con troller REFLECS is an acronym for REF rigeration L ighting and E nvironmental C ontrol S ystem The following list categorizes the current REFLECS line of controllers Refrigeration Control Refrigeration Monitor and Control RMC Refrigeration Monitor and Case Control RMCC Environmental Control Refrigeration Monitor and Case Control RMCC Building Control Unit BCU Building Environmental Control BEC Store Environmental Control SEC Data Logging ntelligent Data Logger IDL CPC REFLECS controllers are designed to perform three specific tasks system control system monitoring and data storage Each controller depending its soft RMCC I amp O Manual ware package is tailored to perform one or all of these three tasks 2 1 1 Refrigeration Monitor and Case Control RMCC The Refrigeration Monitor and Case Control primarily interacts with refrigeration system components including compressors condensers and refrigerated cases In addi tion the RMCC provides extensive sensor control and log
302. nications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case correc tion of the interference will be at the user s expense 827 1005 RMCC CE VERSION CONFORMS TO CE STANDARD BSEN 50082 1 AND BSEN 50081 1 Table of Revisions Revision Description Page REV 4 CHANGED MAXIMUM NUMBER OF 81 BOARDS FROM TEN TO 5 11 REV NEW PART NUMBER ADDED FOR USE WITH SPORLAN SEI VALVES eese 7 1 REV 3 nue VALVE TYPE JUMPER SETTINGS FOR CCBS ARE NOW 12V AND 7 2 REV 3 osse ADDED DEFAULT FAST RECOVERY HYSTERESIS FOR CONDENSER 11 17 REV ADDED DEFAULT LOW PRESSURE CUTOFF HYSTERESIS FOR CONDENSER 11 17 REV ADDED HELP LINE TO CONDENSER RUNTIMES 5 2 0 0 11 18 REV 4 ADDED THAT DEFAULTS CASE TO 0 SPARE esses enne enne 11 25 REV 4 CASE TYPE 38 POBX CHANGED FROM PRODUCE BOX TO POULTRY 11 25 REV 3 THREE TYPES OF CLEANING SWITCHES ARE AVAILABLE NONE CLEAN DOOR 11 28 REV 3s ADDED USER OPTION TO DEFINE MINIMUM DEFROST 11 28 REV CORRECT GAIN FOR IRLDS SENSOR DEFINED eese eene enne nennen n
303. nitiates a pull down valve open 100 until case temperature meets the case temperature set point After pull down is complete the case controller will return to normal control 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 9 Software Overview The following section will discuss the frequently used control functions within the RMCC For specific screen de scriptions please refer to the related screens in Section 7 System Navigation 9 1 PID Control Before going into detail about the RMCC s system soft ware it may be helpful to first talk about the primary meth od used by the RMCC to control systems such as pressure control condenser control case control and Analog Out put Modules PID Control is a method of control that attempts to make an input equal to a set point by changing a single out put value PID control is made up of three parts propor tional integral and derivative PID The proportional part of PID checks the difference between the input and the set point called the error the integral part measures the error that has existed over time and the derivative part predicts what the future error will be based on previous rates of change The result of the three PID comparisons is an output in the form of a percentage 0 100906 This percentage is used differently in RMCC systems in pressure control for ex ample this percentage corresponds to a percentage of total rack horsepower For all systems that use PID control the
304. no grounding on either side of the 24 V AC power supply EARTH GROUND 26513094 Figure 5 11 810 Board Wired in Combination with or Multiple 16AI 8RO 4AO 8DO When the 81 board is wired in conjunction with other boards the 8IO board is not grounded through the other board s center tap A separate Earth ground should be run off of the 8IO RMCC I amp O Manual Communication and Power Connections 5 9 When the 8IO is wired alone either or neither side of the power supply may be grounded however a separate Earth ground should be made off of the center terminal power connection 5 8 Network Settings For all boards except 8IO boards the network dip switch labeled S1 or S3 for the 16AI board is used to set the unique board number of the unit and the baud rate The 810 uses rotary dials to set the board number of the unit and the baud rate is set internally at 9600 5 8 1 Network Address Board numbering is accomplished using the first five rockers on dip switch S3 on the 16AI board the first five 24 V AC POWER SUPPLY EARTH GROUND rockers on dip switch 51 on the 8RO and 8RO FC boards and two rotary dials on the 8IO board OR 5 8 1 1 Dip Switches Each of the first five rockers of either 51 or 53 is given a value which is twice as large as the value for the rocker to the left of it The first rocker is given a value of one With these five rockers a board may be give
305. nto reclaim can be programmed to force condenser split or to raise the discharge pressure set point Table 11 5 List of Inputs Configurable at the Input Definitions Screens RMCC I amp O Manual System Navigation 11 53 Input Description SUCT SETUP DEFR INH 1 DEFR INH 4 CHECK IT HUMIDITY C1 F1 PRF C1 F12 PRF OIL PRESO1 OIL PRES22 01 PRF CMP22 SENSO1 SENS48 A contact closure from contacts on fans 1 12 will prove the fans are working Oil pressure transducer inputs OR Copeland Oil System inputs for compressors 1 22 A contact closure from contacts on compressors 1 22 will prove the compressors are working Inputs for sensors 1 48 VS1 INVALM VS4 INVALM A contact closure from an inverter signifies an inverter fault ALARM OVDI ALARM OVD S A contact closure activates a sensor alarm override for either a fixed or timed duration ALL SCH ON ALL SCH OFF SCH 1 OVRD SCH 4 OVRD A contact closure activates all lighting schedules A contact closure deactivates all lighting schedules A contact closure bypasses schedules 1 2 3 and or 4 01 CLEANSW 48 CLEANSW Clean switches for circuits 01 48 01 EXTRA 48 EXTRA 01 TEMP 48 TEMP 01 TERM 48 TERM Also known as the Dual Temp input a contact closure from this input may be used to raise the case temperature alarm set point for a dual temp case Case temperature sensors 1 6 for circuits 01 48 Termination temperature sensor
306. ntrol Cut In Cut Out Input Occup Out Occ Setpts Unocc Setpts verride Command on off normal Type timed fixed OV time Limiting Analog Input Value 17 es Counter In Suspend Reset Count Count Tripped Trip o Initial Count Trip Set Point Reset Type Count Increment 26512020 output goes from OFF to ON There are two inputs that ma nipulate the module s Counter cell The Suspend Count in put while ON prevents the Counter cell from counting ON transitions The Reset Count input supplies a digital signal that resets the Counter cell to its user specified initial val ue Alarm Disable and Notice Disable The Alarm Disable and Notice Disable inputs affect the Analog Input Module s ability to generate alarms and no tices When the alarm disable input is HIGH the Analog Input Module s Process Alarm cell will not be able to acti vate the alarm output Likewise when Notice Disable is high the Notice output will not be allowed to activate 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Occupied Occup The state of this input tells the Analog Input Module that the building is either occupied or unoccupied Cells Analog Value Combiner AVCombiner The AVCombiner cell s function is to read up to four input values combine these values into a single value base
307. nual Leak Alm Dly 0 120 minutes 10 The Leak Alarm Delay is the amount of time the RMCC must wait before generating a Refrigerant Leak Alarm after the specified amount of refrigerant has been detected by a leak sensor Extra Tmp Y es N o Y If desired the RMCC will generate an alarm if one or both of the extra temperature sensors fail Door Alm Delay 0 120 minutes 15 If a Door Switch is defined at the Circuit Set Points 4 screen see Section 11 4 49 Circuit Set Points 4 Add Edit Circuit the Door Alarm Delay may be defined in the Door Alm Delay field The Door Switch disables refriger ation and walk in cooler fans and turns on all cooler lights When switched again any calls for refrigeration and fans are reactivated and all lights are turned off However if the switch is not switched back after the designated Door Alarm Delay an Open Door Alarm will be generated and the cooler will return to normal operation System Navigation 11 35 11 4 34 CCB Set Point Screen 3 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only Er 89 Ul clo OFFSETS C Case Offset Discharge BHO1SDIC O1c Coil 2 In Coil 2 Out H 0 0 0 Refr Leak 0 0 Coil 1 In Coil 1 Out C 0 0 Return 0 0 0 T PREV gt SET DATA O MENU At times a sensor may provide a reading that reads low er or higher than the known condition being monitored An
308. o slow the rate of change of the PID cell s output The filter reads the differ ence between the current value and the value x seconds ago where x a user specified amount of time called the pe riod The difference between these two values is multi plied by the filter ratio which is a percentage between 096 and 100 The result of this multiplication is the output value Note that if the filter ratio is at 100 or if the Filter cell is disabled the input is not modified by the Filter cell The Filter output value is sent to the Override cell Override The primary purpose of the Override cell is to provide a method of overriding the analog output going to the Se quencer and PWM cells to a user specified value instead of the value dictated by the Filter cell Unlike other Analog Output Module cells the Override cell may be accessed from the RMCC front panel without using UltraSite The RMCC s Analog Input Module Bypass screen is shown in Figure 9 15 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE 01 BYPASS Name OUTPUT 01 Enable YES Value 000 0 Type NORMAL Time 0005 minutes Ov State NORMAL T PREV gt 5 Figure 9 15 Analog Output Module Bypass Screen The Override cell may override the output to any value between 0 and 100 The override may be either fixed or timed A fixed override remains overridden until the user deactivates the override using the Analog Output Module Bypass Scree
309. off The period used to pulse the valve is fixed at six seconds When case temperature is satisfied the valve control al gorithm uses a close rate set point to determine the speed at which the valve transitions to the closed position The algo rithm closes the valve at a rate of 1 10th the close rate set point every six seconds until the fully closed position is reached The valve control algorithm also has a rapid close rate function that multiplies the close rate set point by four if the case temperature is two degrees cooler than the case temperature set point Stepper Valve Control Stepper valve control is used by the liquid and suction algorithms Basically in stepper valve control the valve is positioned at the open as determined by the control algo rithm The control algorithm liquid stepper or suction de termines the output and passes this to the stepper valve control algorithm The valve control algorithm controls the valve according to set points that define the number of steps for full travel the maximum rate and hysteresis Valve Types The CCB is capable of controlling two types of valves bipolar and unipolar Representative characteristics for both valve types are shown below Sporlan EEPR or EEV bipolar Full Travel 2500 steps Maximum Step Rate 100 steps second Hysteresis 10 steps e Valve Type 2 phase PM 2 coil bipolar Alco EEV unipolar Full Travel 384 steps Maximum Step Rate 33 st
310. ogging Interval de fined within the RMCC represents a log Select the appropriate Log Configuration according to the number of defined logs in the Select Configuration Type field Users 11 8 10 Communications Setup 4 COMMUNICATIONS SETUP Unit 01 Baud Rate 9600 Initialization String AT amp FEOSO T amp D2X08W 6 For Hel o To the Next Screen Send Now NO Response T PREV Reset at Midnight gt SET DATA 0 RMCC I amp O Manual connection the system will generate an additional alarm in the RMCC Alarm Log and cease dialout Use From 00 00 23 59 N one N To specify when the RMCC should use defined Night phone numbers instead of Day phone numbers enter the start and end night times in the Use From fields Sat Sun Y es N o To activate the RMCC s alarm dialout feature on Satur day and Sunday enter Y es in the Sat and Sun fields may choose from the configuration types displayed in the following table Available Logging Points w o Hourly Log Available Logging Points Number of RMCC Logs Configu ration Type 1365 1371 829 694 Table 11 7 Logging Strategies Use Hourly Log Space Y es N o N To activate the RMCC Demand Control Hourly Log enter in the Use Hourly Log Space field Deactivat ing this log by entering N o in the Use Hourly Log Sp
311. ol for more information about PID control 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 A diagram of the Analog Output Module is shown in Figure 9 13 Analog Output Module Select In 1 nalog PID PWM In2 Ratio Occupied Period ys p Occup Occ Fallback Unoc Fallback Output during Failure mn Setpt Float SP In Out m Float Float Hi Lo Output Range DOD PID Setpoint Control Value gt Input Out Direct Acting D Direct Acting PID Gains Output setpoint Min Max Output Figure 9 13 Analog Output Module Inputs Control Value The Control In value is the primary signal the Analog Output Module uses in PID control Float The Float Control input provides an analog value to the Analog Output Module s Setpoint Float cell which is used to adjust or float the PID setpoint value Occupied Occup The state of this input tells the Analog Output Module that the building is either occupied or unoccupied Occupied Setpoint Unoccupied Setpoint Occ SP Unoc SP The Occ SP and Unoc SP values are the PID set point values used during occupied and unoccupied building times These set points may be fixed values specified by the user or they may be inputs from sources within or outside the RMCC RMCC 1 amp 0 Manual SW Override Loop Output In on off normal Ty
312. one C lean D oor N When the RMCC receives a contact closure from a Clean Switch input defined at the Input Definitions screens see Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions the circuit s refrig eration valve defrost valve and fans will be overridden OFF None must be entered in the Cleaning Override Switch field if no switch 1s to be used If Clean is selected the re frigeration and defrost outputs will be turned off when the cleaning switch input is closed If a defrost was active the defrost timer will continue to run while the Clean switch is closed If the Clean switch is opened before the defrost time has expired the defrost output will energize and continue until the defrost time does expire 11 28 Circuit Defrost Control screen see Section 11 4 17 Circuit Setup 2 Degree units are determined by the unit selected at the System Units screen see Section 11 8 7 System Units 1st 6th Defrost Circuit Defrost Times 00 00 23 59 N one N RMCC software version 1 05 will not allow defrost to begin within 60 minutes after the conclusion of the previous defrost event Circuit defrost start times are established in the 1st 6th Defrost fields Defrost begins within the selected circuit at the times defined in these fields Up to six defrost times may be defined for each circuit When programming defrost start times note that the RMCC will allow overlapping of defrost times within cir cuits Overlapping d
313. or and the RMCC is capable of controlling multiple stages of unloading within each group the transducer rises to the Oil Pressure set point defined in the Oil Pres field If a contact is indicated the RMCC mon itors the system for a contact change of state from a generic mechanical oil sensor switch and terminates the compres sor stage If the compressor is not equipped with an oil sen sor select N default for None in the Oil Sens field Cil Pres 0 999 15 If the oil sensor is defined as a pressure transducer in the Oil Sens field the net oil pressure that will cause the compressor to terminate must be defined in the Oil Pres field This value is determined by the compressor manufac turer The RMCC calculates the net oil pressure based on the actual oil pressure reading of the transducer minus the suction pressure reading HP AMPs 0 999 15 The RMCC will only accept horsepower in whole number increments Round all fractional horsepower to the nearest whole number Enter the Horse Power or BTU rating of the selected compressor in the HP AMPs field If using a Hussmann PROTOCOL system with the advanced defrost option enter the amperage of the selected compressor in the HP AMPs field Make sure that either all compressors are defined in HP or all compressors are defined in amps Proof Y es N o N If a compressor proof input has been defined for the se lected compressor stage at the Input Definitions sc
314. ore a one pound adjustment is made to the suction pressure When the current circuit temperature reading is below the defined Circuit Temperature set point defined at the Circuit Setpoints screen see Section 11 4 28 Circuit Set Points for the defined Float Interval the Suction Pres sure set point is raised one pound When the current circuit temperature reading is above the defined Circuit Tempera ture set point for the defined Float Interval the Suction Pressure set point is lowered one pound The interval counter is reset anytime the current circuit temperature is within the circuit temperature set point range 11 2 13 Group 1 Strategy Setup PONI GROUPT STRATEGY SETUP 1 ST for Help lt Exit RMCC I amp O Manual Max Suction 20 99 Ib 30 0 The Maximum Suction is the highest pressure the Suc tion set point may be adjusted to when the Floating Strate gy is enabled Min Suction 20 99 Ib 20 0 The Minimum Suction is the lowest pressure the Suc tion set point may be adjusted to when the Floating Strate gy is enabled Use Circuit 0 48 1 The RMCC monitors a specified circuit temperature when utilizing the Floating Set Point Strategy To define the circuit to monitor for the selected suction group enter the appropriate circuit number in the Use Circuit field Delay Floating After Defrost 0 60 minutes 10 During defrost the circuit temperature is not an accu rate read
315. osure but should be mounted in a location that is not easily accessible to avoid tampering or damage Mounting Single Enclosure Mounting The Single enclosure is supplied with four mounting holes in the rear panel of the enclosure These holes are ac Hardware Mounting 3 1 cessible without removal of any boards inside the enclo sure Figure 3 2 shows the enclosure dimensions and weight Figure 3 6 shows mounting dimensions for the 8RO and 16 Figure 3 7 shows mounting dimensions for the 8RO FC 0025 TYP 2 PL 00 50 2 PL SINGLE ENCLOSURE REAR OF ENCLOSURE WEIGHT 12 LB 00 25 TYP2PL Y 26501039 Figure 3 2 Single Enclosure Mounting Dimensions Double Enclosure Mounting The Double enclosure is supplied with four mounting holes in the rear panel of the enclosure These holes are ac cessible without removal of any boards inside the enclo sure Figure 3 3 shows the enclosure dimensions and weight Figure 3 6 shows mounting dimensions for the 3 2 I O Boards and Enclosures 8RO and 16AL Figure 3 7 shows mounting dimensions for the 8 13 00 4 25 00 25 TYP 2 PL 00 50 2 DOUBLE ENCLOSURE REAR OF ENCLOSURE ren WEIGHT 15 LB 0 25 TYP 2 PL 26501033 Figure 3 3 Double Enclosure Mounting Dimensions 8 Weather Resistant Enclosure Mounting The 8IO Combination Input Output Board is generally supplied with a weather resistant enc
316. p In addition to the sta tus of each compressor within the suction group users may view the current suction and discharge pressure or temper ature set points and status the current variable speed com pressor percentage and rpm value and the status of all fans within the group Suct The current suction pressure set point is shown in pa renthesis in the Suct field Beside this value the current suction pressure is shown VS If a variable speed compressor is present in this suction group the VS field will show the percentage and the RPMs at which the compressor is operating 13 2 Status Menu Dsch The current discharge temperature or pressure set point is shown in parenthesis in the Dsch field Beside this value the current discharge temperature or pressure is shown Ambient The Ambient field displays the current ambient temper ature If an ambient temperature sensor is not defined this field is not displayed Compressors The numbers 01 to 08 in the fourth row of the display represent each compressor in the suction group If the com pressor has been previously defined in the system software see Section 11 2 7 Group 1 Setup a letter will appear before the compressor s number signifying whether it is a compressor a variable speed compressor or an unloader U If more than eight compressors are de fined the line displaying the condenser fan status is re placed an addit
317. p O Manual System Navigation 15 5 Door the current status of the door switch Frost the demand defrost sensor status Refr Leak the ppm concentration of refrigerant currently being detected by the leak sensor Offset the leak sensor offset This value may be changed using the HHT Case Dbd the dead band for the case temperature This value may be changed using the HHT Close Rate the rate of closure for the valve This value may be changed using the HHT OV Type the type of override currently being executed Four different messages may appear here None for no override Timed for timed override Swtch for door switch over rides and for manual overrides Kd x10 The derivative gain value for the valve multiplied by 10 See Section 11 4 37 CCB Set Points Screen 4 CPC Suction Stepper Only for a complete definition of derivative gain Step Deflt By pressing RIGHT and selecting one of the options below the hysteresis max step rate and maximum steps values are automatically programmed with appropriate de fault parameters for Alco EEVs or Sporlan EEPRs These values may also be reset 1 Alco EEV Hysteresis is set at 0 Max Step Rate at 33 and Max Steps at 384 2 Sporlan EEPR Hysteresis is set at 10 Max Step Rate at 100 and Max Steps at 2500 3 Reset Hysteresis is set at 0 Step Rate at 100 Max Steps at 0 If a default setting was chosen using Screen 15 the default va
318. p Switch Settings Voltage to Switch Sensor Dew Point Probe Down 24 VAC D ewpt or L in ear 203 1902 Voltage to Sensor the voltage if any required to power the sensor Type the sensor type that must be selected when setting up the sensor in the sensor software Sensor types are defined in Section 7 6 2 Setup Typical Settings This column contains typical alarm set points sensor cut on and cut off set points and alarm delay values for each sensor type If the sensor type is linear the Gain and Offset val ues are also included in this column Wiring wiring instructions and specifications Typical Settings Green to ACI White to AC2 Black to odd number input GND Red to even number input SIG If set up as linear Gain 58 4 Offset 1523 p D ii SET NENNEN in ii Bem sitive 809 1070 809 1072 LDS to Down Supplied by LDS IRLDS to Down Supplied DRLDS RMCC by IRLDS or L in ear IRLDS to Down Supplied by IRLDS 809 1100 809 1101 809 1105 809 1106 809 1100 809 1101 809 1105 809 1106 RMCC all vs below RMCC 2 10 for faults 207 0100 Analog Liquid Level Table B 1 RMCC sensor setup RMCC I amp O Manual 206 0002 Light Level 12 VDC 12 VDC L g Lvl R efrLk Alarm at 250 ppm Shielded wire and Common on LDS tied together to odd number on 16AI Analog Outputs to even numbers on 16AI If set up as linear Gain 250 Offset 0 Alarm at 100 ppm
319. p in the first Backup field and se lect in the second System Navigation 11 43 Restore The Restore option replaces the current case settings with the saved backup settings This option is only active after the selected case has been backed up To restore saved settings to the Case Controller enter the ID Number of the target case in the first Restore field and select Y es in the second Copy Set Points Case control set points defined for one Case Controller are copied to another Case Controller when the Copy Set Points feature is activated To activate this feature enter the ID Number of the source case in the first Copy Set Points field and the ID Number of the target case in the second Fi 11 4 55 Anti Sweat Setup If the Anti Sweat feature is activated at the Cir cuit Set Points 2 screen see Section 11 4 47 Circuit Set Points 2 Add Edit Circuit the humidity or dewpoint sen sor input that controls the anti sweat heaters is configured 11 4 56 Circuit Summary CIRCUIT STATUS STATUS T 1 MP Refr 0 Refr 0 Refr 0 Refr 0 Refr 0 T PREV J NEXT Basic summary information about all standard circuits defined within the RMCC is listed at the Circuits Status Summary screen Name The and Name fields display the number and defined name of the circuit Status The Status field displays the operating status of the cir cuit The status will disp
320. pe Anal timed fixed a og OV time PID Setpoint He PEN Sequencer Input Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 4 Stage 5 Stage 6 Stage 7 Stage 8 Delays _ Num Stages Type Digital Stage 1 8 Output Digital PWM Output In 2 Period Range 26512022 The Analog Output Module uses either the Occ SP or the Unoc SP as the control set point based upon the status of the Occup input ON occupied OFF unoccupied Direct Acting The Direct Acting input determines how the output of the Analog Output Module changes in relation to the input When the Direct Acting output is ON the output value will move in the same direction as the input value in other words when the input value increases the output value in creases When the Direct Acting input is OFF the output value will move in the opposite direction as the input value The primary purpose of the Direct Acting input is to al low a single Analog Output Module to control both cooling typically requiring direct action and heating typically re quiring reverse action with a single input and output Cells Select The Select s primary function is to select either the Occ SP or Unoc SP analog signals to be used as the Analog Software Overview 9 15 Output Module s PID Setpoint To perform this function the Select cell reads the value of the Occup input i
321. pensate for a fan failure by substituting the 11 3 7 1 Condenser VS Fan Setup 2 ks CONDENSER VS FAN SETUP 0900 rpm VS Minimum Speed VS Maximum Speed 1800 rpm VS Increase Rate VS Decrease Rate 2000 rpm minute 2000 rpm minute T PREV 4 gt SET DATA O MENU VS Minimum Speed VS Maximum Speed 0 32000 rpm 0 rpm When the RMCC calls for the variable speed condenser fans to be on at 0 the fans will operate at the defined VS System Navigation 11 15 Minimum Speed Likewise when the RMCC calls for the fans to be on at 100 the fans will operate at the defined VS Maximum Speed VS Increase Rate VS Decrease Rate 0 32000 rpm minute 0 rpm minute The VS Increase Rate is the maximum rate at which the speed of the condenser fan may be increased The VS De crease Rate is the maximum rate at which the speed of the condenser fan may be decreased 11 3 7 2 Condenser Fan Fail Setup G2 02 Es CONDENSER FAN FAIL SETUP Fan Fail Enable NO Fan Fail Delay 10005 Continually try to Clear Failure 0 Num Clear Attempts 00 Delay Between Clear Attempts 0030 sec T PREV gt SET DATA Refer to Condenser Fan Fail Setup on Section 11 3 5 3 Condenser Fan Fail Setup 11 3 8 Condenser Setpoints Screen 1 CONDENSER SETPOINTS Setpoint Throttle Range Shift During Reclaim T PREV J NEXT
322. percentage of log space used within the system is displayed on the Logging Setup screen see Sec tion 11 8 9 Logging Setup Information received from sensors with a logging in terval of zero will not be recorded to the log A typical logging interval may be defined for all sen sors by using the copy feature described in Section 11 4 54 Utilities Setup for Additional Logging Intervals There are two additional screens where other logging intervals for such values as refrigerant leak concentration coil in temperature and coil out temperature may be de fined To access these screens press the DOWN arrow key 12 1 6 Sensor Logs 12 00 A BIENT LO 0 OF 682 Sensor readings are logged to the Sensor Control Log This historical data is recorded for any of the 48 defined sensors according to user selected time intervals Logging Intervals are defined at the Sensor Setup screen see Sec tion 11 5 1 Setup The RMCC will store as many read ings as is specified in Logging Setup on Section 11 8 9 Logging Setup for each sensor 12 2 Logs 12 1 7 Hourly Demand Log The Hourly Demand Log displays a summary of the kW usage during the past hour The date and time of each log are also displayed KW HRS The total kW hours used within the selected hour is dis played in the KW HRS field Peak Time The peak power is the highest value of kW measured by akW or watt hour transducer during the selected hour
323. pointwith Black and Shield to odd no on in 800 1500 5 00 60 min delay put GND White to even number on input SIG NOTE Transducer type must be set to ECLIPSE under Transduc er Setup 203 5750 Relative Humid Red to 12V on 16AI PWR ity Black to odd number on input GND White to even number on input SIG marked out on sensor Jumper N to G at sensor Table B 1 RMCC sensor setup 2 Appendix B 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Appendix C Pressure Voltage and Temperature Resis tance Charts for Eclipse Transducers amp CPC Temp Sensors CPC Temperature Sensors Eclipse Transducers Pressure PSI Resistance ohms Temperature F 336 450 234 170 5 40 30 D 5 20 0 0 70 ws 88998 Table 15 1 Temp Sensor Temperature Resistance Chart RMCC 1 amp 0 Manual 100 Ib 200 Ib 500 Ib xducer xducer xducer N N N o 1 Table 15 2 Eclipse Voltage to Pressure Chart Appendix C C 1 Appendix D System Navigation Screens PRESSURE MENU 12 00 1 Status Press Setpts 2 Bypass VSpeed Setpts 3 Alarms B Float Setpts 4 Logs 9 Fixed Steps 5 Comp Setup Strategy Setup GROUP1 STATUS COMPRESSOR BYPASS 12 00 RPT PRESSURE ALARMS SETUP 12 00 PRESSURE LOGS 2 0 PRESSURE GROUPS SETUP 12 00 SETPTSCENABLED 12 00
324. program the modem initialize the modem by send ing the initialization string to the modem in the Send Now field The modem s response will be displayed in the Re sponse field The modem should initialize within approxi mately five seconds after the string is sent An OK response or a replica of the string is returned to the screen if the mo dem is properly defined If a No Response is returned check the wiring resend the string then refer to the trou bleshooting guide in the modem user s manual for sugges tions Reset at Midnight Y es N o N To ensure the modem is properly programmed to per form the RMCC s remote communication functions send the string to program the modem on a regular basis To au tomatically send the string every night at midnight select in the Reset at Midnight field Only one controller in the network chain should be con figured to reset the modem at midnight If more than one controller is configured to reset the modem at midnight communication errors can occur modems frequently used with RMCC The following mo dem types are available e Hayes e Multitech e Practical Peripheral 24008A e Practical Peripheral 2400SA V42bis e Practical Peripheral 9600SA V42bis e Generic To copy the stored initialization strings for one of the listed modem types to the Communications Setup screen enter the corresponding number in the Patterns Number to Copy field Refer to the modem use
325. put Module Status screen The PID Output will appear as a value between 0 and 100 the PID Setpoint will appear as an analog value and the PWM Output will appear as either ON OFF or NONE depending upon the current state The Stages fields at the bottom of the screen show the status of Stage 1 through Stage 8 of the Analog Output Module s Sequencer outputs see Sequencer on Section Sequencer Each field will read either for OFF or ON for ON If a field is blinking the stage is currently in the interstage delay period between transition changes see Sequencer on Section Sequencer To view the status of other Analog Output Module Sta tus screens press the UP and DOWN arrow keys 13 8 Demand 13 8 1 Demand Status Du DEMAND STATUS Demand OFF 12 00 Timer 00 00 Setpt 350KW Current Power Usage 0000 KW Peak Power Today 0 KW 9 00 00 KWHs Used This Hour 00000 0 Total KWHs Today 00000 0 The RMCC activates a demand relay when the energy being used by the system exceeds the demand limit set point When this set point is exceeded the RMCC is said to be in Demand The Demand Status screen displays the current status of demand control within the RMCC Information displayed on this screen includes the ON OFF status of demand a summation of the times the RMCC has been in demand the demand limit set point current power usage peak power usage power used in the past hour and total power used
326. r s manual to determine the correct modem type The stored initialization string for the selected modem type is displayed in the Current field 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11 8 12 Transducer Offsets ers TRANSDUCER OFFSETS Group 1 Suction Group 2 Suction Group 5 Suction Group Suction Discharge Press T PREV gt 5 11 8 13 01 Pressure Transducer Offsets eres bs 0 PRESSURE TRANDUCER OFFSETS 1 00 0 0 11 00 0 0 100 0 1 1 7 1 00 0 01 00 0 gt 5 11 8 14 Transducer Setup TRANSDUCER SETUP Disch Pressure Suction Pressure 500 Lb Gr1 Gr2 GR3 100 Lb Oil Pressure 100 Lb 200 Lb 100 Lb gt SET DATA Discharge suction and oil pressure transducers moni toring the RMCC are configured at the Transducer Setup screen RMCC I amp O Manual Pressure transducers within the RMCC measure the current suction pressure discharge pressure and or oil pressure within each suction group Transducer configura tions are defined at the Transducer Setup screens At times transducers within suction groups may pro vide readings that read lower or higher than the known con dition being monitored An offset value may be entered for
327. r If a device must be added to the system refer to the information supplied with the device and consult the refrigeration equipment manufacturer Table 3 1 lists some typical sensor applica tions and the sensor or probe most suited for that purpose The use of these devices is not limited to these applications however Refer to Table 5 1 for wiring of these device types 3 6 Temperature Sensors Table 3 1 Sensor Application and Type Mounting Bullet and Pipe Mount Sensors Bullet or pipe mount sensors mounted on refrigerant lines should be secured with a Panduit low temperature ca ble tie number PLT2S M120 or equivalent For pipe mount sensors the curved surface should be placed against the pipe and the tie should be positioned in the groove on the top surface of the sensor second tie should be used to secure the lead to the pipe for additional support Sensors located on refrigerant lines should be insulated to eliminate the influence of the surrounding air A self ad hering insulation that will not absorb moisture is recom mended to prevent ice logging at the sensor location Depending on the size of the refrigeration line the sen sor should be positioned as shown in Figure 3 13 Figure 3 13 Sensor Orientation 3 8 Liquid Level Sensors CPC supplies both a probe 207 1000 and float 207 0100 type liquid level sensor Each is installed by the re frigeration and equipment manufacturer Table 5 1 shows
328. r P N 812 1800 shown in Figure 2 11 is used to connect CPC controllers together as an integrated communication system Communication problems sometimes associated with large control sys tems such as limited cable lengths data rate limitations and terminal and modem communication interference are eliminated through the use of the RS232 Bus Amplifier 2 6 Hand Held Terminal Figure 2 11 RS232 Bus Amplifier 2 7 2 To communicate with a site from a remote location the network must be connected to a modem directly or through the RS232 Bus Amplifier CPC supplies a standard 14400 fax 9600 data modem P N 370 9600 for use with the RE FLECS network The REFLECS and CPC s RS232 Remote Communi cation Network are designed to connect to and be compat ible with most modems in use today Remote communication screens allow the user to define modem type baud rate settings automatic dial out functions and auto polling 2 73 UltraSite Remote communication with a site controlled by the REFLECS is accomplished using UltraSite CPC s remote communication software package UltraSite is a Modems Microsoft Windows based program that uses animated graphics icon buttons and tabular and graphical data to display real time conditions of any site UltraSite accesses any site controller through the on site modem and if present the RS232 Bus Amplifier AII commands available through the front panel of the RE FLEC
329. r the RMCC to reset the failed inverter an output must be de fined as an inverter reset at the Output Definitions screens see Section 11 8 2 Output Definitions After the third at tempt to reset the inverter the compressor will bypass Off if the Off on Failure feature is activated If the Off on Fail ure feature is not active the compressor will bypass On 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11 2 12 Group 1 Floating Suction alke GRP1 FLOATING S Float on off INTERVAL M 85 MAX SUCTION 03 0 g CTION F U 0 0 1 Use Circuit Delay Floating A Extern Shift 0 T F 0 MIN SUCTION f 0 ter Defrost 10 gt SET DATA O MENU The Floating Set Point Strategy operates the compres sor system at the highest possible suction pressure while maintaining proper temperatures in the controlled cases and coolers This strategy adjusts suction pressure settings as long as temperature conditions are acceptable Floating Set Point Strategy settings are defined at the Group 1 Float ing Suction screens Screens for Group 2 3 and 4 are ac cessed by pressing the down arrow Float On Off O n O f f F The Floating Set Point Strategy is activated in the Float On Off field Interval 0 60 minutes 15 The Interval is the duration the current circuit tempera ture must be above or below the Circuit Temperature set point bef
330. r Leak Refrigerant Leak This alarm type in cludes the Leak alarm CCB Sens CCB Sensors This alarm type includes the Coil In Coil Out Coil2 In and Coil2 Out alarms e Network This alarm type includes the Bad Check sum Bad Message Device ONLINE Host Bus Network Down Missed Token and No Response alarms Miscellaneous This alarm type includes all other alarm messages not covered in the first nine catego ries These include the Condenser VS Fan Proof 11 8 7 System Units Er 15 SYSTEM UNITS Temperature Unit F Pressure Unit Date Format Month Day gt SET DATA O MENU Engineering units used throughout the RMCC are de fined at the System Units screen 11 8 8 Dialout Setup DIALOUT SETUP Change Baud Rate when dial to Day Phones 2 Night Phones 1 2 Use From to gt SET DATA O MENU RMCC alarms or high level warnings are usually ac companied by an alarm dialout sequence This sequence is setup at the Dialout Setup screen 11 58 Configuration Condenser VS Inv Fail Defr Timed Demand Tim eOut Dialout Unsuccessful Dig Alarm Override ON Fan Proof FP Level lt 999 gt Login High Speed Proof Hi Humidity Hi Term In Override Inverter Fail Lo Suction Lo Xducer Low Humidity Low Speed Proof Low Temp Low Term Manual Alarm Ovrride ON
331. r four This may be changed using the HHT Extra 1 Tmp the current reading of extra temperature sensor one ee E t 2 n Offset the offset for extra temperature sensor one BE E 2 Tmp 0 Extra 2 Tmp the current reading of extra temperature sensor two Offset the offset for extra temperature sensor two Door the current status of the door switch Frost the demand defrost sensor status Refr Leak the ppm concentration of refrigerant currently being detected by the leak sensor Offset the leak sensor offset This value may be changed using the HHT Step Deflt By pressing RIGHT and selecting one of the options below the hysteresis max step rate and maximum steps values are automatically programmed with appropriate de fault parameters for Alco EEVs or Sporlan EEPRs These values may also be reset 1 Alco EEV Hysteresis is set at 0 Max Step Rate at 33 and Max Steps at 384 2 Sporlan EEPR Hysteresis is set at 10 Max Step Rate at 100 and Max Steps at 2500 3 Reset Hysteresis is set at 0 Max Step Rate at 100 and Max Steps at 0 If a default setting was chosen using Screen 14 the default values will be displayed in this hee t screen They may be changed at this screen using the HHT Max Steps Step Hyst the hysteresis value See Section 11 4 37 CCB Set Points Screen 4 CPC Suction Stepper Only for a definition of hysteresis Step Hz the maximum number of steps per secon
332. r of clear attempts 11 14 split type 11 13 unsplit split delay 11 13 two speed 9 5 11 14 11 15 defining fan relays 11 14 fan fail setup 11 15 high speed HP 11 15 high to low delay 11 15 low speed HP 11 15 low to high 11 15 start duration 11 15 start speed 11 14 variable speed 9 5 11 15 cut on cut off value 9 5 inverter reset count 11 16 min max speed 11 15 VS increase decrease rates 11 16 CRC Test See Cyclic Redundancy Check Cyclic Redundancy Check 11 56 RMCC I amp O Manual D Daisy Chaining 4 1 4 2 Daylight Savings Time setup 11 57 Defrost 9 7 alarm delay 11 56 case control defining termination type 11 39 demand defrost enabling 11 42 demand fail safe time 11 42 scheduling defrost times 11 40 specifying defrost type 11 39 defrost duration 11 56 demand 9 7 demand fail safe time 9 7 drain time 9 7 electric 9 7 emergency 11 23 hot gas 9 7 pump down delay 9 7 standard circuits manual defrost 11 23 termination methods 9 7 Demand Defrost 9 7 fail safe time 9 7 Digital Output Module See Con trol Digital Output Mod ules Digital States definition of NONE 9 9 Dip Switches 16AT 81O input type settings 5 12 baud rate settings 4 4 Baud Rate Settings 4 5 baud rate settings 5 11 fail safe settings 5 11 network board numbering 4 4 function of 4 4 network settings 5 10 relay state on 810 and 8RO FC 5 11 Discharge Trip 9 6 Discharge Unsplit See Condenser split operat
333. rcuits Standard 11 19 making all circuits CCBs 11 44 set points alarms 14 1 case pump down delay 11 29 defining drain time 11 27 demand fail safe time 11 29 dual temp alarm shift 11 29 setup 11 24 circuit inputs 11 30 circuit outputs 11 30 clean switch 11 28 defrost schedules 11 28 defrost termination type 11 26 defrost type 11 26 demand defrost sensors 11 drain time 11 28 liquid line solenoid 11 24 temperature sensors 11 27 temperature strategy 11 27 termination sensors 11 27 Clean Switch control of See Wash Mode Clean Door Switch wiring on case controller 7 2 COM A Network See RS485 Input Output Network COM B Network See RS485 Host Bus Network COM C Network See RS232 Remote Communication Network COM D Network See RS485 Input Output Network Compressor Groups See Pressure Control Compressors forcing ON during defrost 11 7 forcing one compressor ON 11 7 horsepower or amperage defini tion 11 6 oil pressure fail safe set point 11 oil sensors 11 6 proofs 11 6 run times 11 6 running one compressor during reclaim 11 7 specifying number of per group 11 5 standard defining compressor as 11 6 unloaders defining 11 6 variable speed defining compressor as 11 6 function of 9 2 max RPM increase and de crease 9 2 Normal strategy 9 2 Condenser 9 4 9 6 11 10 air cooled 9 4 strategy 9 4 temperature differential strategy 9 4 air cooled strategy 11 10 discharge trip 9 6
334. rds within the system By default this screen will display the maxi mum number of 8RO 16AI 4AO and 8DO boards the RMCC may hold and it displays the current number of boards defined When setting up 8IO in this screen count 8IO as 16AI and one 4AO board If the 8IO s ana log output functionality is not being used and the 4AO slot is needed elsewhere on the I O network users may remove 81078 functionality to free a 4AO slot To achieve this disable the 8IO s analog outputs by removing the jumper JU4 see Section 2 4 1 SIO Board on the 810 This board must then be set up as one 8RO and one 16AI in this screen System Navigation 11 63 11 8 22 Reset er Er es NETWORK Reset ON 11 8 23 Satellite Communication 2r 11 8 24 Pressure Transducer Type PRESSURE TRANSDUCER TYPE 12 00 Board Point Type 00 LIP gt SET Before a transducer type may be changed the trans ducer input s board and point address must be entered in the Output Definitions screen Section 11 8 2 Out put Definitions 11 64 Configuration The I O Board Network is disabled at the Reset screen If this network is disabled the RMCC may no longer con trol functions associated with the unit After the network is reset OFF it may also be reset ON at the Reset screen To turn off the I O Board Network enter 1 for OFF at the Reset screen To reset th
335. recorded to the Pressure Control logs To define the logging interval for all suction group data enter the time the suction group data should be logged at the Pressure Logging Interval Screen 00 00 00 24 00 00 00 03 00 The number of available logging points is determined by the Logging Configuration defined at the Logging Setup screen see Section 11 8 9 Logging Setup 12 1 2 Suction Group 1 Logs 61 04 Group 0 of 0 12 00 SETPOINT FLOAT T 00 00 T PREV 4 NEXT The RMCC continuously records occurrences within each suction group and stores the information in the Pres sure Logs The RMCC records the date time and occur rence data based on the logging interval defined at the Log Interval screen see Section 12 1 1 Suction Pressure Log Interval Occurrence data points displayed at the Group Logs screens include the Suction Pressure reading the Discharge reading the Float Temperature set point and the Float Temperature reading for each entry The number of available logging points is determined by the Logging Configuration defined at the Logging Setup screen see Section 12 1 1 Suction Pressure Log Inter val RMCC I amp O Manual 12 1 3 Anti Sweat Daily Logs The RMCC keeps a record of anti sweat circuit opera tion and displays the daily statistics in the Daily Logs screen Each record shows the average ON time percentage and the highest and lowest dewpoints for each day Pressing the
336. reens see Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions the RMCC must be configured to look for a contact closure indicating the acti vation of the compressor or unloader Phase loss monitoring and special situation compressor activation for all suction groups are defined at the Pressure Setup screen Phase Y es N o Y The RMCC is designed to monitor a phase loss device non voltage contact closure When phase loss is detected the RMCC will shut down all compressors phase loss device must be setup at the Input Definitions screens See Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Force Comp On During Defr Run Comp During Reclaim Y es N o Y When suction pressure within a group has been satis fied the RMCC will terminate all compressor stages A single compressor may be forced on during hot gas defrost and or during reclaim when all compressors are terminated 11 2 9 Two Stage System Setup TWO STAGE SYSTEM SETUP Low Suction Group High Suction Group gt SET DATA O MENU 11 2 10 Group 1 Pressure Set Points J nj GROUP 1 PRESSURE SETPTSCENABLED 12 00 STRATEGY NORMAL Contr by PRESSURE SETPOINT 22 0 DISCHARGE 00 2 Trip Point 3550 0 Trip Delay 005 Autoreset 50 0 Below Trip Point gt SET DATA O MENU DEADBAND DELAYS _ON OFF s 005 s 005 T PREV Set points for compressor operation ar
337. rent operating status of the demand defrost sensor s refrigerant leak sensor door switch fan relay and case lights Frost When the Demand Defrost feature is activated at the Circuit Set Points 3 screen see Section 11 4 48 Circuit Set Points 3 Add Edit Circuit the current status of the Demand Defrost Sensor is displayed in the Frost field Refr Leak The current reading from the refrigerant leak sensor is displayed in the Refr Leak field This sensor calculates the parts per million rating of escaped refrigerant Door Switch When a Door Switch is configured at the Circuit Set points 4 screen see Section 11 4 49 Circuit Set Points 4 Add Edit Circuit the current status of the Door Switch is displayed in the Door Switch field Fan Relay The current status of the Fan Relay is displayed in the Fan Relay field Lights The current status of the case lights is displayed in the Lights field The Sensor Control Status screen displays the current status information about each defined RMCC sensor Users may view the sensor name current controlled output status if applicable current sensor reading and the defined cut in and cut out set points if the displayed sensor is control ling an output No modifications to the sensor controls may be made at these screens Up to five sensors may be viewed on the screen at one time Use the up and down arrows to view additional sensors 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Name
338. ressure or tem perature of an evaporative condenser may be controlled by asingle temperature or pressure sensor or a combination of up to five temperature or pressure sensors The method used to combine the multiple values into a single control value must be specified in this field There are four differ ent refrigerant types to choose from e OJNE Only one sensor will be used to determine the control value e A VG The average of all sensor values will be used as the control value e MI N The lowest of all sensor values will be used as the control value e MA X The highest of all sensor values will be used as the control value Sensors for evaporative condensers must be given board and point addresses in the Input Definition screens see Section 11 8 1 Input Definitions 11 3 2 Condenser Pressure Inputs Setup Air Cooled amp Temp Diff Strategies Only CONDENSER PRESSURE INPUTS SETUP Inlet Pres Offset 000 0 000 0 Outlet Pres Offset T PREV gt SET RMCC I amp O Manual This screen is present only if the Control Strategy field in Section 11 3 1 Condenser Setup is set to Air Cooled or Temp Diff If the Evaporative strategy is being used this screen is replaced with the Condenser Evaporative In puts Screen as shown in Section 11 3 3 The Condenser Pressure Inputs Setup screen allows us ers to enter an offset value to correct the inlet and outlet transducer value
339. rigeration and defrost modes Pressing RIGHT fol 8 5 Pe lowed by one of the commands below allows users to manually override the case 2 0V OFF f 1 Man Dfr Pressing 1 initiates manual defrost S End DECOY 2 OV OFF Pressing 2 overrides both refrigeration and defrost OFF 3 End Dfr OV Pressing 3 will terminate defrost mode RMCC I amp O Manual System Navigation 15 3 Door the current status of the door switch Frost the demand defrost sensor status Refr Leak the ppm concentration of refrigerant currently being detected by the leak sensor Offset the leak sensor offset This value may be changed using the HHT Case Dbd the dead band for the case temperature This value may be changed using the HHT Close Rate the rate of closure for the valve is shown in this field This value may be changed using the HHT OV Type the type of override currently being executed Four different messages may appear here None for no override Timed for timed override Swtch for door switch over rides and for manual overrides Kd x10 The derivative gain value for the valve multiplied by ten See Section 11 4 36 CCB Set Point Screen 4 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only for a complete definition of derivative gain Control the valve control type This should read EEV Valve Type the valve type This should read Puls pulse Network whether the control network is ON or OFF CO Fan Loc
340. rmine the operation of the fans during normal split and fast recovery modes are specified in the Condenser Setup screens The first 11 10 Condenser Control The RMCC will activate the stages when the suction pressure is above the suction pressure set point The RMCC will cycle through the defined stages until the pressure falls to the set point When the suction pressure set point is met the RMCC will cycle backwards through the defined stages until the first stage of the cycle is complete or until the suc tion pressure rises above the suction pressure set point When a stage is activated or deactivated the RMCC will wait the defined ON or OFF delay defined for compressors and unloaders at the Groups 1 4 Pressure Set Points screen before activating or deactivating the stage A dash must be inserted after the last step or the RMCC will assume all unused stages are configured and should be off Stages not defined are configured by default as all com pressors OFF because no compressors or unloaders are se lected for the stage Therefore after the last stage is defined enter a dash to indicate that the defined step is the last step in the cycle The total combined horsepower for each defined cycle is automatically calculated by the RMCC and displayed in the HP field em Pee Condenser Setup screen is where the condenser s control strategy input types and locations and fan types are spec ified The
341. rol superheat is not being Type Default Min Max Description Value 20 0 F 120 0 F Average of installed discharge air temp sensors Case Temp Combina tion Type Set point Determines how case temperature read ing of installed sensors will be com bined avg max min Update Rate Set Point 6 seconds 1 second 60 seconds Determines how often the algorithm will update the valve position Table 8 3 Suction Side Temperature Control Parameters m DE is capable of supporting two types of valves pulse and stepper A pulse valve controls flow by pulsing fully open and fully closed within a fixed period of six sec onds stepper valve controls flow by adjusting the valve opening from zero to 100 percent using a fixed number of steps Both valve types are controlled using PID control PID control is explained in depth in Section 3 1 PID Control However programming the PID parameters for case con 8 2 Valve Control trol is slightly different than programming for other sys tems In case control throttling range TR and a multiplier called integral gain K are both set by specifying a single value called sensitivity Sensitivity determines the size of the PID output s reac tion to changes in the input Sensitivity is set by entering a value from 0 to 9 Zero is the lowest sensitivity and thus will have a lesser reaction to error nine is the highest sen sitivity The sensitivity l
342. rouping of times that designates when the lights in the circuit cases will be ON or OFF Up to four schedules may be defined for assignment the standard cir cuits These schedules are defined at the Light Schedules screen At this screen users are first prompted to name the cur rent schedule 15 Characters Users may then configure the schedule in the From and Until fields Enter the time when the lights will be turned on in the From field and the time when the lights will be turned off in the Until field 00 00 24 00 For each time period designate the day of the week the time period will take effect in the Event field S unday M onday T uesday W ednesday Thu R sday F riday S A turday or 7 Days Up to eight holiday dates may be entered into the RM CC s Holiday Schedule All lighting schedules will be overridden OFF during any of the defined holiday dates 01 01 12 31 00 00 the default values for circuit defrost be entered since this action guarantees that all necessary set points are estab lished Each set point may then be reviewed revised or cleared as necessary Circuit Name 12 Character Limit The Circuit Name is a user defined or default system defined identifier for the selected circuit Master Liquid Line Solenoid M aster LLS 1 4 Group LLS N one N All hot gas circuits contain a master liquid line sole noid When using a refrigeration system other than the Hussmann PROTOCOL
343. ry Setpoint 99 999 or NONE NONE The Fast Recovery feature within the RMCC attempts to prevent the discharge pressure from reaching the Trip Point defined at the Pressure Setpoints screen see Section 11 2 10 Group 1 Pressure Set Points The set point en tered in the Fast Recovery Setpoint field is the discharge pressure or temperature at which the RMCC bypasses the normal fan operational settings and cycles on all fans to bring the discharge pressure or temperature down to an ac ceptable level The RMCC uses a default Fast Recovery Hysteresis of 2 0 This value is subtracted from the Fast Recovery set point to determine the control input value below which the RMCC will exit recovery mode For example if a condens er s discharge pressure is above 300 psi when the Fast Re covery set point is 300 psi the RMCC begins fast recovery mode The RMCC will continue fast recovery until the dis charge pressure drops below 298 psi 300 2 0 Fast Recovery Control Type Evaporative Only Ctl Value Max Ctl Value This field only appears in this screen when the Control Strategy field in the Condenser Setup screen Section 11 3 1 Condenser Setup is set to EVAPORATIVE RMCC I amp O Manual The Minimum Condensing Setpoint is the lowest pos sible value of the condensing setpoint If the ambient tem perature plus the temperature differential entered in the Setpoint field above falls below the Minimum Condens ing Setpoint the
344. s 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 MI N The calculates the control value us ing the minimum sensor reading of one or more sen sors Up to three sensors may be combined with the current sensor Enter the sensor number of the desired sensors to be combined in the three fields following the field displaying the current sensor number The current status of the select ed sensors are then displayed in the fields directly below the sensor number fields The current calculated control value is displayed in the field directly below the Control Using field Cut On Cut Off 999 999 N one O pen C losed Sensor Cut On and Cut Off set points may be defined as specific values for analog input sensors or simply as con tact closed or contact open for digital input sensors in the Cut On and Cut Off fields respectively The Cut In set point is the value at which the controlled output will turn on and the Cut Out set point is the value at which the con trolled output will turn off There is a 1 dead band around each set point Cut On Cut Off Delay 0 9999 seconds The Cut On and Cut Off Delays are specified measure ments of time the RMCC must wait before activating or de activating the controlled output Min time ON 0 240 minutes When the Cut In set point has been reached and the controlled output is activated the output must remain on for the Minimum ON Time regardless of the Cut Out set point Offset 99
345. s SELECT NUMBER tem Description Page 13 3 4 Anti Sweat Dewpoint Status Screen ANTI SWEAT STATUS FCALL ON 65 0 ADE BERS 25 0 p Percent ON during ALL OFF ALL ON 100 Current Today 100 0 Dewpoint The current dewpoint sensor reading or calculation is shown in the Dewpoint field To the right of this value the All On and Off set points specified in Section 11 4 10 Anti Sweat Circuit Setpoints are displayed Percent ON during All OFF AII ON The Percent ON During ALL OFF and Percent ON During ALL ON set points specified in Section 11 4 10 Anti Sweat Circuit Setpoints are displayed in these two fields On Time The current ON percentage at which the selected cir cuit s anti sweat heaters are operating is displayed in the Current field The average ON time percentage for the anti 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 sweat circuit during the entire day is displayed in the Today field 13 3 5 Anti Sweat Output Status 1 1 2 ANTI SWEAT OUTPUTS STATUS Override 12 00 Time Left 8 Name 1 2 5 4 T PREV NEXT The real time status of anti sweat heater operation is shown in the Anti Sweat Output Status Screen Anti sweat heaters operate by measuring dewpoint comparing the 13 4 Case Control Status 13 4 1 Case Control Circuit Status C T 01 STATUS SD C 01 oar S 01 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 n 0 0 ENT Ne t t
346. s The current transducer values are shown System Navigation 11 11 in the Curr fields Any offset value entered in the Offset fields are added to the current values 99 99 0 An offset for the discharge pressure transducer may be entered using the screen shown in Section 11 8 12 Trans ducer Offsets 11 3 3 Condenser Evaporative Inputs Setup 2 2 ka CONDENSER EVAP INPUTS TEMP Offset TEMP Offset Offset Offset 1 2 3 Offset 4 5 T PREV This screen is present only if the Control Strategy field in Section 11 3 1 Condenser Setup is set to Evapora tive If the Air Cooled or Temp Diff strategies are being used this screen is replaced with the Condenser Pressure Inputs Setup screen as shown in Section 11 3 2 The Condenser Evaporative Inputs Setup screen allows users to specify the sensor types used for the evaporative inputs and to calibrate sensors by specifying offsets 11 3 4 Condenser Fan Delays Setup G2 CONDENSER FAN DELAYS SETUP Fan Minimum On Time Fan Minimum Off Time 1000 T PREV gt SET DATA O MENU Input Types options Temp The types of sensors used as evaporative inputs must be specified in the Input Type fields There are two different sets of choices to choose from depending upon whether the Control Type field in Section 11 3 1 Condenser Setup i
347. s set to Temperature or Pressure Temperature TEMP Standard temperature sensor e 6450Tm Margaux 6450 temperature sensor Pressure e 100 LB 100 pound pressure transducer e 200 LB 200 pound pressure transducer e 500 LB 500 pound pressure transducer Offset 99 99 0 Offset values may be entered in the Offset fields to cor rect sensor or transducer values The current values are shown in the Curr fields Any offset value entered in the Offset fields are added to the current values Fan Minimum On Time 0 240 min 0 min When condenser fans activate they must remain on for an amount of time specified in the Fan Minimum On Delay field Fan Minimum Off Time 0 240 min 0 min When condenser fans deactivate they must remain off for an amount of time specified in the Fan Minimum Off Delay field 11 3 5 Condenser Single Speed Setup Screens The Condenser Single Speed Fan Setup screens are ac cessible only if the Condenser Fan s Type field is set to Single Speed Double and variable speed setup screens are described in the Condenser Two Speed Fan Setup and 11 12 Condenser Control the Condenser Variable Speed Fan Setup sections on Sec tion 11 3 6 Condenser Two Speed Fan Setup and Section 11 3 7 Variable Speed Setup Screens respectively 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11 3 5 1 Single Speed Setup Screen 1 CONDENSER SINGLE SPEED FAN SETUP 12 00 Fan Delay sec
348. s 1 6 for circuits 01 48 01 DEMAND 48 DEMAND Demand defrost sensors 1 and 2 for circuits 01 48 Table 11 5 List of Inputs Configurable at the Input Definitions Screens 11 8 2 Output Definitions OUTPUT DEFINITIONS Output Bd CMPO1 CMPOS 5 CMPO7 gt SET DATA O MENU All outputs connected to the 8RO 8RO Form C 4AO 8DO or 8IO boards are configured at the Output Defini tions screen Each output is identified according to its board and point address 11 54 Configuration Bd 1 20 The network address of an output communication board is defined by the network dip switch on the 8RO boards or rotary dials on the 8IO board The number en tered in the Board Number field is used by the RMCC in conjunction with the Point address defined below to locate the selected output Pt 1 8 Each output is physically connected to a specific point on an output communication board The point numbers are printed on the board above the output connections This point address is used by the RMCC in conjunction with the board address to locate the selected output Table 11 6 shows the specific outputs as they appear in the Output Definitions screens 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Output Name CMPO0I CMP22 ALARM DEMAND SUBCOOLER MASTER LLS C FAN 01 C FAN 12 CI SPLIT 1 CI SPLIT 2 SEN CTL 01 SEN CTL 48 VS1 ALARM VS4 ALARM INV1 RESET
349. s Network 4 1 defined 4 1 wiring 4 1 5 1 RS485 Input Output Network 4 1 max number of boards 4 1 wiring 4 1 5 1 RTC Baud Rate Dip Switch Settings 4 5 S Satellite Mode 11 64 Segments See Wiring Legs and Seg ments Self Test 11 56 Sensor Control 9 8 11 45 alarms 14 1 overrides 14 2 set points 11 46 controlled outputs 11 47 setup 11 45 log interval 11 46 sensor type 11 45 shut off schedule 11 49 Sensor Failure See Case Control sensor failure Sensors bullet and pipe mount mounting 3 6 settings B 1 Checkit hardware software settings dewpoint probe hardware software settings B 1 IRLDS hardware software settings B 1 LDS hardware software settings light level hardware software settings liquid level hardware software settings B 1 mounting 3 6 outside temperature location 3 6 mounting 3 6 pressure transducers choosing Eclipse or standard Eclipse voltage to pressure chart C 1 hardware software settings location 3 5 refrigerant transducers Index 1 5 hardware software settings B 2 refrigeration system location 3 6 relative humidity hardware software settings B 2 temperature settings B 1 temp to resistance chart C 1 wiring to 16AI or 810 5 3 Star Configurations 4 1 4 3 Status Screens Anti Sweat Status 11 21 13 4 13 5 case control 13 5 liquid pulse stepper 13 5 suction stepper 11 32 condenser 13 1 host network 11 61 13 3 I O Network 13 3 inputs 13 3 main screen
350. sary since in both of these instances the coil is emp ty To refill the coil and reestablish superheat the valve is opened a certain percentage for a fixed period of time Af ter the recovery period is complete normal superheat con trol algorithms are used Table 8 8 describes how the recovery time is determined 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Name we Description Maximum Recov Set point 0 seconds 30 255 seconds Maximum amount of time valve will be ery time left open to establish superheat 7 7096 0 10 0 100 Amount to open valve during recovery Table 8 8 Recovery Parameters Anti Sweat Control The anti sweat algorithm controls the pulsing of the anti sweat output to control the heat applied to the heaters Table 8 9 lists the set points used to control the anti sweat algorithm The anti sweat control algorithm compares a value sent by the RMCC to the high and low anti sweat set points Based on that reading the algorithm pulses the heat ers ON for some fraction of six seconds depending on where the humidity reading falls within the anti sweat set point range See Section 3 5 Anti Sweat Control for a complete explanation of the anti sweat algorithm The value sent by the RMCC may be from either a dew point probe or a relative humidity sensor The anti sweat algorithm does not differentiate between the two types it only reads the raw value and compares it to the high and low anti s
351. see 11 19 LD AD Circuitinputs iie bo Step iba p ORIS tecto 11 20 11 433 Circuit Statistics ii e Ne LR NAA We eee eet Pee n de ERR sire d ius 11 20 14 44 Circuit Set Points senio PIC p ae bees 11 20 ELAS Anti Sweat Control Menu a E ERU DEC MERE CER IRE Pep c ate 11 21 11 4 6 Anti Sweat Status Menu da eee eee re i Ptr ER epe te ER Gi e rto 11 21 7147 Anti Sweat Setup ss e he Rom HERR ea e eise Hag ete eee bes 11 21 11 4 8 Dewpoint Humidity iade e perdete RE REO SE iro 11 21 17 4 9 Anti Sweat Outputs Setups ic ss iin ie teet ee ee o Uk EE RUE git a 11 22 1 4 10 Anti Sweat Circuit Setpoints esee b a reat e e PER Pa 11 22 41 4 Anti Sweat Overrides aed ah RR R E e reb ue eeu 11 22 71 412 Alarm Set Points eoe eie rere eH RP re egi ete 11 23 HAS Manual Defrost 2c eer o gt o RUE RR EE ae Shab ova cea ER RU e 11 23 LD ATA Light Schedul s eee a ene ERN Rab ee ERE 11 24 TIL Schedule 2 33 e eerta tete e i eee ra dee aee p sera es 11 24 11 4 16 Circuit Setup 1 iustae rete ro p E RUD UR ERE TRE erede 11 24 11 447 Circuit Setup 25 eic gea ae UR SOR RUE ir oa ban ecl or 11 26 11 418 Circuit Set Points l c aee ERR Dp eO ER es dp epe e 11 27 144 19 Circuit Set Points 2 v RARE Sp Ned e IR RN ee eb nd 11 28
352. set of user specified cut in and cut out set points and turn an output ON or OFF based on the results of the set point com parison Users may specify different cut in and cut out set points for occupied and unoccupied building states The cell uses the occupied set points when the Occupancy input reads HIGH and the unoccupied set points when the Occu pancy input reads LOW The Cut In Cut Out cell s digital signal is sent to the Override cell Override The primary purpose of the Override cell is to provide a method of overriding the Digital Command output to a user specified value instead of the value dictated by the Cut In Cut Out cell Unlike other Analog Input Module cells the Override cell may be accessed from the RMCC front panel without using UltraSite The RMCC s Analog Input Module Bypass screen is shown below ANALOG INPUT MODULE 01 BYPASS INPUT 01 5 Command OFF Type NORMAL 0005 minutes Time Ov State NORMAL T PREV gt 5 Figure 9 10 Analog Input Module Bypass Screen The Override cell may override the Digital Command output ON OFF or NONE The override may be either fixed or timed A fixed override remains overridden until the user deactivates the override using the Analog Input Module Bypass Screen A timed override remains in effect until a user specified time period elapses or until the user cancels the override Counter The Count cell simply increments the Count ou
353. shows the reclaim status If a reclaim is being called for the Reclaim field will read ON other wise it will read OFF Fans The bottom two lines of the Condenser Status screen show the status of the condenser fans If a fan has been giv en a board and point address on the Output Definitions screen an F will appear by the fan s corresponding num ber Otherwise a period will appear by the fan number Note in the sample screen shown above that fans 1 6 are defined F1 F6 and fans 7 12 are not 7 12 The fields directly below the fan numbers display the current state of the fans A fan will be shown as either on ON or off If a fan is on or off because of a user or dered bypass an asterisk will appear next to the fan s status ON for bypassed on for bypassed off Phase Loss When a phase loss occurs all of the condenser fans are bypassed off The Condenser Status screen will display PHASE LOSS on occurrence so that the user can verify that the condenser fans are bypassed off due to the phase loss and not another condition System Navigation 13 1 13 2 Status Menu STAT S MEN 00 Main Statu In ut Statu 5 aria le S ee 0 Net ork 5 Ho t Net ork Statu em Pss 13 2 1 Main Status 1 STATUS 22 c02 The Main Status screen displays the current status with in each defined RMCC suction grou
354. sman Suction P N 810 3157 CPC Standard Suc PIN 810 3159 Sporlan Stepper Hussman Suction P N 810 3153 Stepper CDS Valve Uses t P N 810 3152 CPC Standard P N 810 3155 Liquid Stepper SEI P N 810 3139 Includes Discharge Air Sensor Coil Inlet Temperature Sensor amp Coil Outlet Temperature Sensor Table 7 1 Required CPC Case Control Boards based on Valve Type and Case Control Type 7 1 1 The case controller enclosure measures 14 375 inches long by 3 inches wide by 1 875 inches deep The cover is secured to the base plate by two 6 32 lock nuts The base has one 0 218 inch mounting hole located at each corner Size RMCC I amp O Manual 7 2 Power Do not use the center tap of any transformer to pow er the CCB Do not use a single transformer to power a CCB and another I O board 16AI 8RO etc The case controller should only be used with a Class 2 24 VAC 50 VA transformer with no center tap Wiring of Case Control Installation 7 1 the case controller to the transformer is diagrammed in Figure 7 1 Figure 7 1 Case Controller to Transformer Wiring m Valve Type Jumper JU5 Stepper EEV Only Set the valve type jumper JU5 UP for 24V valves AI co ESV amp ESR Liquid Stepper and DOWN for 12V valves Sporlan SEI Liquid Stepper See Table 7 2 Sporlan ALCO SEI ESV Liquid Liquid Stepper Stepper S EEV S EEV CDS EEPR Bipolar 12V Bipolar Al
355. sor enter O On or F Off To return a compressor to normal operation enter N for Normal Dchg Alm Y es N o Y The Discharge Alarm is generated when the Discharge Pressure Trip Point is met The Discharge Pressure Trip Point is defined at the Group 1 4 Pressure Set Points screens see 7 Low Suct 20 999 Ib 1 0 When the measured suction pressure equals the Low Suction Pressure set point the RMCC will generate an alarm Dly 0 240 minutes 60 The Low Suction Time Delay is the duration the RMCC must wait before generating an alarm when the Low Suction Pressure set point is met Proof 0 240 seconds 30 If a compressor proof has been defined for any com pressor the RMCC may be configured to issue an alarm if a proof signal closure is not received after a specified dura tion following a call for a compressor stage to activate The RMCC will generate a run proof failure alarm while con tinuing to call for the compressor The RMCC will also dis play FAIL in the Proof field of the Pressure Control Status screen Section 13 9 2 Suction Group Status System Navigation 11 3 Pump Down 20 999 Ib 0 5 The Pump Down alarm has a default setting of 0 5 Ib Changing the set point to zero does not disable the Pump Down alarm The Pump Down alarm must be disabled by placing a in the pump down field of the Pressure Alarms Notices Setup screen Section 11 2 4 Pressure
356. sor failure 11 34 door alarm delay 11 35 leak alarm level 11 35 refrigerant leak 11 35 assigning CCBs to circuits 11 43 backing up CCB setpoints 12 2 case set points CPC suction stepper 11 33 derivative gain 11 37 frost sensor 11 34 offsets 11 36 sensitivity 11 33 temp sensor strategy 11 37 update rate 11 34 valve multiplier 11 37 Hussmann suction stepper demand sensor 11 34 liquid pulse stepper anti sweat limits 11 33 case dead band 11 36 close rate percentage 11 36 coil out fan lockout 11 36 demand sensor 11 33 derivative gain 11 36 hysterisis 11 37 max number of steps 11 37 max step rate 11 37 offsets 11 36 recovery 11 33 sensitivity 11 33 superheat 11 33 valve bypass percentage 11 35 valve multiplier 11 36 valve type 11 37 copying CCB set points 11 44 copying log points 11 44 initializing CCBs 11 43 restoring CCB set points 11 44 sending CCB settings 11 43 set points alarm time 11 42 case pump down delay 11 41 control temp 11 40 demand fail safe time 11 42 discharge return weighting 11 40 Index 1 2 drain time 11 40 fan and anti sweat off 11 40 termination temp 11 40 valve control strategy 11 40 setup anti sweat control 11 41 defrost schedules 11 40 defrost termination 11 39 defrost type 11 39 demand defrost 11 42 dual temp shift 11 41 inputs 11 44 shut down if suction group fails 11 41 temp control strategy 11 40 valve control strategy 11 39 updating CCB information 11 43 Ci
357. sors unloaders have Compressors unloaders have ON and OFF delays minimum ON and OFF times Table A 1 Differences between RMCC and RMCT Only Normal variable speed PIDA Control The RMCT s PIDA control is similar in most respects to the RMCC s PID control see Section 3 1 PID Con trol except that a fourth mode called the acceleration or A mode is working along with the proportional inte gral and derivative modes The A mode is closely related to the derivative mode which attempts to compensate for sudden changes in the control input The acceleration mode watches the derivative mode and speeds up the system when necessary to help the derivative mode compensate quicker Variable Speed Control RMCT compressor groups operate much the same as RMCC compressor groups using Normal control see Sec tion 3 2 1 1 and Normal variable speed compressor con trol see Section 3 2 2 1 The Fixed steps strategy and Alternate variable speed strategy may not be used in RMCT groups Like RMCC variable speed compressors RMCT vari able speed compressors are always the first on and the last off in a group and the RMCT only looks for new standard compressor combinations when the compressor is either at maximum 100 or minimum speed The major differ ence is in the way the RMCT selects compressor combina tions and speeds The RMCT attempts to stabilize the suction pressure at the set point while keeping the variable sp
358. ss Bd 1 20 Table 11 5 shows the specific inputs in the order they appear within the Input Definitions screens The network address of an input communication board is defined by the network dip switch on the 16AI board or Input Description G1 SUC PRS G1 SUC TMP CI DIS PRS DIS TMP CI IN PRS OUT PRS ASW HUMID ASW TEMP G2 SUC PRS G2 SUC TMP ASW OVRD 1 4 G3 SUC PRS G3 SUC TMP ASW OVRD 5 8 G4 SUC PRS G4 SUC TMP EVAP 1 5 CI INV ALM PHASE LOSS KW ANALOG C1 IN TMP OUT TMP AMBIENT CI RCL STA Group 1 Suction Pressure Group 1 Suction Temperature Condenser Discharge Pressure Condenser Discharge Temperature Condenser Inlet Pressure Condenser Outlet Pressure Anti Sweat Relative Humidity sensor Anti Sweat Temperature sensor Group 2 Suction Pressure Group 2 Suction Temperature Anti sweat override 1 through 4 Group 3 suction pressure Group 3 suction temperature Anti Sweat override 5 through 8 Group 4 suction pressure Group 4 suction temperature Condenser evaporative cooling sensor 1 through 5 Condenser inverter alarm A contact closure from a phase monitor will cause the RMCC to turn off all loads Kilowatt analog input from the watt hour transducer Condenser inlet temperature Condenser outlet temperature used if temperature strategy is selected for condenser control Ambient outside temperature input A contact closure when the system goes i
359. ssor Start Delay defined in the Compressor Start Delay field This delay allows pressure equalization within the system To define the delay enter a value be tween 0 and 10 minutes in the Compressor Start Delay field Defrost Suction Set Point 999 999 10 0 After the compressors within the host group have been shut down for the Compressor Start Delay they are cycled to maintain the Defrost Suction Set Point defined in the De frost Suction Set Point field To define the Defrost Suction System Navigation 11 31 Set Point enter a value between 1 and 50 psi in the Defrost Suction Set Point field 11 4 26 Advanced Defrost Options Electric fa falta ae fa CIRCUIT SETUP Z 1 DEFROST LOAD SHEDDING OPTIONS Host Compressor Group Electric defrost Amps 0 0000 gt 5 O MENU Hussmann PROTOCOL Advanced Defrost Set Points for Advanced Electric Defrost are defined at the Advanced Defrost Options Electric screen This feature analyzes the number of amps drawn by each compressor within the cir cuit s suction group defined in Section 11 2 7 Group 1 Setup compares it to the load that will be drawn by de frost and interlocks one or more compressors in order to shed enough load to compensate for defrost 11 4 27 Case Control Case set points may not be viewed until a case control ler is physically attached to the RMCC I O network 11 4 28 Circuit Set
360. ssure transducers 0 100 Ib for suction pressure 0 200 16 for oil pressure and 0 500 Ib for discharge pressure Each is generally installed on the system by the equipment manufacturer If a transducer must be added to the system consult the refrigeration equipment manufacturer for proper location Mounting In high humidity environments mount the transducer so that the cable is at the bottom or side This prevents cre ating a moisture trap However if pressure media might freeze mount the transducer with the pressure port pointing down Hardware Mounting 3 5 pu m 3 7 1 Outside Ambient Temperature Sensor Location The outside or ambient temperature sensor should be located on the north side of the building preferably under an eave to prevent sun heated air from affecting the tem perature at the sensor Mounting The temperature sensor may be mounted using any standard tubing clamp CPC also offers an aluminum cover and clamp which may be mounted as shown in Figure 3 12 fasteners are not provided Figure 3 12 Outside Temperature Sensor with Cover and Clamp 3 7 2 Refrigeration System Tempera ture Probes and Sensors Location CPC supplies several temperature monitoring devices including bullet sensors pipe mount sensors immersion probes insertion probes and sensors for high temperature applications Each of these sensors is generally installed on the system by the equipment manufacture
361. st sequence Emergency defrost is practically identical to the normal de frost sequence initiated by pressing 1 except the emer gency defrost ignores the values of termination sensors and defrosts for the full defrost duration defined in Section 11 4 18 Circuit Set Points 1 The only way an emergency defrost may be terminated before the full defrost duration is to select the End 2 option from the manual defrost screen System Navigation 11 23 11 4 14 Light Schedules aum eee 11 4 15 Holiday Schedule Him ou HOLIDAY SCHEDULE Date 1 00 00 00 00 00 00 11 4 16 Circuit Setup 1 CIRCUIT SETUP 1 Case Type 1000 gt Enter Defaults No Circuit Name Master Liq Line Solenoid gt SET DATA O MENU All standard circuits defined within the controlled sys tem are setup using the Circuit Setup screens Case Type 0 64 0 The type of case controlled by the selected standard cir cuit is defined in the Case Type field Users may choose from the case types displayed in Table 11 3 Select any key to view a list of all available case types Enter Defaults Y es N o N Default configuration information for all available case types is stored within the RMCC It is recommended that 11 24 Circuit Defrost Control A schedule is a g
362. stomize control of mechanical components 9 9 1 Cells and Modules I O Control is best defined as the process of reading a sensor value comparing the value to a set of user defined set points and activating or deactivating a load based on the comparison Unfortunately control of large systems re quires multiple layers of set points that have different pri orities and control many loads To simplify this complex array of set points the RMCC uses the concept of cells and modules Cells are groups of set points that share common func tions or priorities such as Override or Proof set points While different types of cells perform different functions in different applications all cells are basically alike in their operation cell reads one or more input values applies these values to the cell s settings and set points and exports one or more resultant values as outputs Depending upon the set function of the cell the cell s outputs may then be used as inputs for other cells or modules or they may be used to drive physical devices The number of cells used within the RMCC s I O mod ules is fixed and comprises the various controlling features of the RMCC such as Alarming Logging Overrides By passing etc The arrangement of these cells may not be changed The user may choose to use certain cells and not others but may not add delete or rearrange features in the RMCC Various cells that share a common bond such as manip
363. system there will be a single master liquid line solenoid for all groups controlled by the RMCC enter M aster in the Liq Line Solenoid field When using a Hussmann PROTOCOL system the group supplying the circuit will have its own master liquid line solenoid enter the number of the suction group within which the solenoid is located If the selected circuit is not a hot gas circuit enter N one in the Master Liq Line Solenoid field 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Defrost Type High Low Description Time Time Time Spare Spare for future use RMCC defaults the case type to this set lcecreamfeezerbox 20 560 30 60 sno 2 45 2 60 7 60 Reacinfreezrjuce i15 560 2015 1 45 veoj 1 60 9 Fwenfoodbo M I12 560 2015 3718 3745 2 60 2 60 Table 11 3 Case Type Default Settings RMCC I amp O Manual System Navigation 11 25 Defrost Type PIN 75 30 2 4 5 5 245 2 60 S0 PRPR Produce preproom 35 eseoj 45 0 one 2 45 2 45 2590 Table 11 3 Case Type Default Settings 11 4 17 Circuit Setup 2 834419 ug CIRCUIT SETUP 1 Defrost Type Defrost Termination Type Termination Sensors Temperature Strategy Temp Sensors Strategy Fans On During Defrost T PREV gt SET DATA O MENU All standard circ
364. t 2 a Ran CIRCUIT 1 Case Lights Strategy Case Pump Down Delay Shut Down if Sic ioh Grp Fails Anti Sweat Control Dual Tmp Alarm Set Point Shift Dual Temp Shift Input T PREV gt SET DATA Circuit set points for lighting pump down anti sweat and dual temperature features are defined at the Circuit Set Points 2 screen Case Lights Strategy Always O n Always O F f Schedules 1 2 3 4 Lighting control within a case control circuit is deter mined by the Case Lights Strategy Users may choose from the following Case Lights Strategies Always O n lights in the case are always on e Always O f f lights in the case are always off 1234 Schedules lights in the case cycle on and off according to the selected schedule Schedules are configured at the Light Schedules screen see Section 11 4 42 Light Schedules Case Pump Down Delay 0 240 seconds Defrost performance is improved by specifying a dura tion during which the system empties or pumps down re frigerant from the evaporator coil This procedure ensures that residual refrigerant for the coil does not work against the defrost cycle When this delay is activated within a Case Control Circuit the Suction Valve is opened for the defined delay before the defrost cycle begins During this delay the Pulse Width Modulation and Defrost Valves are also
365. t to the UP position 5 12 Terminating Resistance Jumper Settings S2 45 mm INPUTS 9 16 Set DOWN for sensors requiring voltage SetUP for sensors not requiring voltage 26501070 Figure 5 16 Input Type Switches S1 and 82 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 6 Case Control Hardware Overview This section provides complete information for install ing and programming all versions of CPC s case controller Information is also given for both the CCB and defrost power modules which are designed to provide power with in the space restrictions of the refrigerated case The sec tion should be used in conjunction with the other sections within this manual to configure a complete refrigeration control system Information for controlling refrigerated cases without case controllers is provided in Section 2 Hardware Overview and Section 9 Software Overview 6 1 Introduction A case controller is typically designed to control all re frigerated case functions including lights fans defrost anti sweat and suction side or liquid side valve control 6 2 Hardware Description 6 2 1 CPC produces two different hardware versions of the case controller to interact with either a pulse valve or step per valve Case Controllers The pulse valve case controller Figure 6 1 may be configured with a second
366. tance between the refrigerant temperature and the ambient outside temperature Refrigerant con densing temperature is measured from the condenser inlet condenser outlet or discharge using a pressure transducer The pressure value is automatically converted to tempera ture based upon the refrigerant type defined in the system software The resulting temperature value is compared to the ambient temperature value plus the condensing temper ature differential value specified by the user MINIMUM CONDENSING AMBIENT CONDENSER CONDENSING TEMP TEMP DIFF SETPOINT SETPOINT Kk Condensing Setpoint will go below this value SETPOINT CONTROL PRESSURE converted to temperature 26512027 Figure 9 4 Temperature Differential Strategy As shown in Figure 9 4 the PID set point is propor tionally changing in the Temperature Differential strategy based on the ambient temperature value Therefore to pre vent the PID set point from dropping too low during cold weather a Minimum Condensing set point may be defined If the combined total of the ambient temperature and the condensing temperature differential is less than the Mini mum Condensing set point the Minimum Condensing set point becomes the new PID set point 9 5 1 2 Evaporative Condensers The RMCC uses a single strategy to control evaporative condenser fans This strategy uses either the average the highest or the lowest of up to five s
367. ted on the processor board of the RMCC are used to set the baud rate A different baud rate setting may not be set for the COM A and D networks Positions six and seven on dip switch S1 of the 4 8RO and 8RO FC and switch S3 of the 16AI are used to set the baud rate for the communication boards This baud rate should match the setting for the RMCC Figure 5 15 shows the possible baud rate settings and dip switch posi tions for the COM A and D networks COM A AND D BAUD RATE BAUD WIN y PRESET AT 4800 nm COM A AND D BAUD RATE NG 4AO 8RO AND 8RO FC SWITCH S1 16 SWITCH 53 REFLECS PROCESSOR BOARD 29600 4800 1 9200 38400 26501045 Figure 5 15 Baud Rate Dip Switch Settings 5 10 1 1 Case Controllers If using case controllers the baud rate setting for COM A and D must be set to 19 200 since the baud rate for the case controller is hard coded at 19 200 Refer to Section 4 12 Baud Rate Dip Switches COM A and D only for more information 5 10 1 2 8IO Baud Rates Baud rate settings for the 8IO board are automatically adjusted by the board based on the baud rate setting of the RMCC The 8IO can communicate at baud rate settings be tween 4800 and 38 400 Communication and Power Connections 5 11 5 10 2 COM B Network The COM B baud rate is preset on the RMCC and 485 Alarm Panel dip switch S1 at 4800 since the 485
368. ted to COM C may not exceed 2500 feet 4 7 Number of Devices per Seg ment A single segment beginning with a REFLECS control ler may have no more than 31 additional devices A device is considered to be any controller board or alarm panel There are restrictions to the number of each board type that may be connected to the COM A and D networks No more than sixteen 8ROs or 8RO FCs sixteen 16AIs three 4AOs and two 8DOs may be connected to both the COM A and COM D networks at the same time In addition an 8IO board must be listed as one 16AI and one 8RO 4 8 Except for the single star configuration described be low all devices in a segment must be connected in an open loop or daisy chain configuration A daisy chain must start with the first device in the segment and continue to the last device Branching from a device in the middle of the segment is prohibited Figure 4 5 demonstrates correct and incorrect daisy chain configurations Daisy Chains 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 BOARD NETWORK CPC CONTROLLER END OF SEGMENT CORRECT LOOP CONFIGURATION INCORRECT LOOP CONFIGURATION 26513037 Figure 4 5 Correct and Incorrect Loop Configurations 4 9 Within a single segment a single star branching from a single device is allowable A star is multiple devices con nected to a single device within a segment The device from which the star extends is called the h
369. terminal polarity insensitive 2 Set input dip switch up Various Digital Sensors Klixons Sail Switches etc 16AI Any Available Point 8IO Any Avail able Input Point ARTC An Aux Input 1 Connect one lead to the odd numbered terminal and the other lead to the even numbered termi nal polarity insensitive 2 Set input dip switch up ODD TERMINAL EVEN TERMINAL 800 1100 800 1200 800 1500 Pressure Trans ducers Eclipse 100 200 500 Ib ratings Table 5 1 Sensor Wiring RMCC I amp O Manual 16AI Any Available Point 8IO Any Avail able Input Point ARTC An Aux Input Connect RED power wire to 5VDC supply on input board Connect WHITE signal EL wire to even numbered ae 1 terminal SHIELD BARE WIRE Connect BLACK ground TO ODD TERMINAL wire to odd numbered ter minal WHITE TO gt EVEN TERM BLACK TO ODD TERM Connect the bare SHIELD wire to odd numbered terminal TRANSDUCER ECLIPSE Set input dip switch down Communication and Power Connections 5 3 800 0100 800 0200 800 0500 Pressure Trans ducers Stan dard 100 200 500 Ib ratings Connect to Input Point by Board Type 16AI Any Available Point 8 Avail able Input Point ARTC An Aux Input Connect RED wire to 12VDC source on input board Connect WHI
370. the coil outlet temperature reading is 35 F above the control set point for 60 minutes the case controller will go into sensor bypass During sensor bypass the case controller controls the valve using the Default Valve Percentage defined under CCB Set Points in the RMCC System Navigation Coil Inlet and Coil Outlet Sensor Failure If both the coil inlet and coil outlet read open or short the case controller will go into sensor bypass During sen sor bypass the case controller controls the valve using the Default Valve Percentage defined under Case Set Points in the RMCC page 51 Discharge Air Sensor Failure Liquid If the discharge air sensor reads open or short or if the discharge air temperature reading is 15 F above the control set point for 15 minutes when not in defrost the case con troller initiates recovery mode see Section 8 6 System Recovery Mode After the recovery sequence is complete the case controller will return to normal control The case controller will wait another 15 minutes before repeating the recovery sequence again Discharge Air Sensor Failure CPC Suction If the discharge air sensor reads open or short the RMCC writes a case fail alarm to the Alarm log Discharge Air Sensor Failure Hussmann Suction If the discharge air sensor reads open or short or if the discharge air temperature reading is 15 F above the control set point for 15 minutes when not in defrost the case con troller i
371. the main processor and the memory chips that hold all the code required to operate the RMCC and the data en tered at the front panel or through UltraSite The Processor Board is mounted on the door of the enclosure and is con nected to the PIB with a ribbon cable The PIB Figure 2 2 contains all power and network connections required to power the RMCC and drive the network and is attached to the rear wall of the enclosure Hardware Overview 2 1 LCD Screen Contrast Dial Main Processor Chip Ribbon Cable Connection to Power Interface Board Ribbon Cable Connection to Keypad RAM Battery Flash Memory Chips Clock Battery Manufacture Date Network Baud Rate Dip Switch RAM Chips 26502005 Figure 2 1 REFLECS Processor Board Board Remote Communication Network Connection COM C COM B Termination Resistance Jumpers Network Connection COM D COM D Term Resistance Jumpers Termination Resistance Jumpers LED Power Indicator Power Switch Network Status Lights 4 places AC Power Input Connection Network Connection COM AC Input Power Fuse Host Network Connection COM B AC Voltage Jumpers 26502016 Figure 2 2 Power Interface Board 2 2 Input Communication Boards 2 2 Input Communication Boards To properly interact with any environmental control system the REFLECS requires constant accur
372. timed override will last Ov State The Ov State is a read only field that shows the current state of the Command override either Fixed Timed or Normal Time Left The Time Left field is a read only field showing the amount of time left in a timed override When no timed override is being carried out the Time Left field will dis play a row of dashes System Navigation 11 51 11 7 Power Monitor POWER MONITORING 12 00 1 Demand Status 2 Demand Setpoints 3 Hourly Logs 4 Daily Logs SELECT NUMBER 11 7 1 Demand Set Points DEMAND SETPOINTS Demand Setpoint KW TRANSDUCER Minimum Voltage Maximum Voltage Power at Maximum Demand Set Points are defined at the Demand Setpoints screen Demand Setpoint 0 9999 Enter the appropriate demand limit set point in kilo watts in the Demand Setpoint field If the power usage ex ceeds this set point the RMCC will activate a closure in the demand relay A demand relay must be configured at the 11 8 Configuration CONFIGURATION 12 00 1 Input Definitions 2 Output Definitions 3 System Information 4 Remote Communication 5 Xducer Setup 6 Host Network 7 1 0 Setup 8 Sat Comm 9 Xducer Types SELECT NUMBER 11 52 Power Monitor em Pese Output Definitions screen see Section 11 8 2 Output Def initions kW Transducer To calculate the current energy consumption kW trans ducers read
373. ting baud rate 11 60 setup initialization strings 11 60 types supplied 2 6 Modules inputs and outputs 9 9 N Network searching for new devices 11 62 setting device numbers 11 62 Network Host reset 11 62 Network IO Board reset 11 64 NONE digital state 9 9 Output Definitions 11 54 P Passwords access levels 11 2 entering 11 2 logging logons 11 56 setting 11 56 Phase Loss shutting off compressors during 11 6 PIB features 2 2 PID Control 9 1 analog output modules 9 16 case controllers 8 2 condenser fans 9 4 definition of 9 1 definition of throttle range 9 1 derivative 9 1 error 9 1 integral 9 1 pressure 9 2 proportional 9 1 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 update rate 9 1 PIDA Control A 1 Power Monitoring 11 52 demand setup 11 52 Power up Self Test See Cyclic Re dundancy Check Power up Self Test See Cyclic Re dundancy Check Pressure Control 9 2 9 4 11 2 alarms setup 11 3 11 5 automatic oil reset 11 4 bypass 11 3 Copeland oil system 11 4 discharge trip 9 6 discharge trip point 11 8 fixed step strategy 11 7 11 9 Fixed Steps strategy 9 2 floating set point 9 4 forcing one compressor ON 11 7 forcing one compressor on dur ing defrost 11 7 log interval 12 1 max number of compressors 9 2 PID Control 9 2 proofs 11 6 13 11 running one compressor during reclaim 11 7 set points variable speed 11 8 setup 11 5 11 6 setup two stage system 11 7 unloaders 11 6 13 11 variable
374. tivates a sensor se lection screen where users select or may enter the appro priate sensor number The selected sensor number and the defined type of the selected sensor are displayed at the Sen sor Set Points screen in the and Type fields respectively Eng Unit 5 Character Limit The RMCC reads a signal from the sensor and com pares the signal to the sensor type to determine the correct 11 46 Sensor Control analog value Therefore units of measure are not important to the As a convenience to the user a Units field is provided so that analog values displayed on the RMCC screen are easily interpreted Enter the corresponding units of measure for a specified sensor type in the Eng Unit field Control Using D ifferential or 1st Only A vg Ma X Mi N D The control method defined in the Control Using field determines how to combine the values from up to four sen sors This combined or control value is then compared to defined set points and commands to determine the opera tional status of an output Users may choose from the fol lowing four control methods e Ist Only The RMCC calculates the dif ferential of two sensors or uses the primary sensor value as the control value e A VG The calculates the control value us ing the average reading of one or more sensors e MA X The calculates the control value us ing the maximum sensor reading of one or more sensor
375. to ensure proper communication between net work devices and effective control of refrigeration equip ment Unless noted all information in this section pertains to COM A B C and D networks Information provided in Section 5 conform to these requirements Wiring Specifications Network wiring must meet or exceed the following specifications RS485 COM B and D Shielded twisted pair 18 24 AWG wire 31 pf ft maximum capacity between signal wires 59 pf ft maximum capacity between signal and shield 120 50 ohm nominal impedance Belden part number 8641 for plenum installations 82641 or 88641 RS232 COM C Shielded 22 AWG wire 23 pf ft max cap between signal wires 41 pf ft max cap between signal and shield Belden part number 8771 RMCC I amp O Manual 5 2 Wiring Connect the three wire COM A or COM D network ca ble to the REFLECS and I O board 485 network connec tions as shown in Figure 5 1 POWER INTERFACE BOARD TR PS OMD POWER ON e POWER IN eco GND NEU HOT TBI SEXES COMMUNICATION OTHER PORT BOARDS 26513032 Figure 5 1 COM A Network Connections 5 39 COMB Wiring Connect the three wire COM B network cable to the REFLECS controllers and 485 Alarm Panel as shown in Figure 5 2 POWER INTERFACE BOARD PIB 485 ALARM PANEL PIB ON D so TBI RS485 2 RS485 A POWER ALARM GOMA 0 comc
376. tput val ue every time the digital Command output turns ON The initial value of the Count output is entered by the user as well as the amount the Count output is incremented every time an ON is detected Software Overview 9 11 If desired the Count cell may also be configured to turn on a digital output whenever the Count value exceeds a user specified Trip Setpoint This digital output called the Count Tripped output may be connected to a relay on an alarming device or it may be used as an input for another I O Module The Count output value is reset by sending a signal to the Reset Count input The user specifies whether the count will be reset when the Reset Count is ON OFF or transi tioning from ON to OFF When the appropriate type of sig nal is read from the Reset Count output the Count output reverts to the initial value specified by the user Digital Output Module Counting may be suspended via the Suspend Count in put While this input is ON the Counter will not increment the Count output regardless of the state of the Command output 9 9 2 2 Digital Output Module General Description The primary purpose of a Digital Output Module is to combine up to four digital values into a single digital value which may drive a physical relay or be used as an input for other modules In addition the Digital Output Module may be configured to count the number of Output transitions and it may be set up to detect proof
377. ttings that keep one or more compres sors on during defrost and reclaim modes RMCC I amp O Manual Requested Horsepower HP Adjust Variable Speed compressor RPM Requested HP Current Rack HP 5 increase decrease amount Is an increase or decrease necessary Is the 5 at the minimum INCREASE Are all standard compressors OFF Is the VS at maximum Activate deactivate a standard compressor combination to satisfy the HP requirement Turn VS compressor off 26512026 Figure 9 3 VS Compressor Control Flowchart 9 4 2 2 Alternate Strategy The Alternate strategy is very similar to the Normal strategy described above except that the VS compressor is not always the first compressor on Instead when the calls for the first compressor s to activate it takes into account the amount of HP needed and considers acti vating a combination of standard compressors to meet the requirement For example if 5 HP is needed and there is a 5 HP standard compressor in the group the RMCC may ac tivate the standard compressor rather than activate a 15 HP variable speed compressor In order to determine whether the first compressor on will be variable speed or standard the RMCC compares the required HP amount to the VS HP On Edge set point The VS HP On Edge set point is a horsepower value below which the variable speed compressor will not b
378. ttings will be changed to daylight savings time starting on the date de fined in the DST MANUAL SET START field and will re turn to standard time on the date defined in the DST MANUAL SET END field System time changes at ap proximately 2 00 a m on the dates specified Because the defined dates are specific for each year the Date fields must be updated each year by the user Alarm types within a category marked with a YES will be sent to the 485 Alarm Panel alarm types within a category marked with a NO will not be sent to the alarm panel The ten different alarm filter categories and the alarm types within each category are listed below For additional information on alarm types see Table 14 1 on page 5 e Ckt Hi Circuit High This alarm type includes the Hi Temp and Hi Avg Temp alarms e Checkit This alarm type includes the Check Sys tem Now and Check System Soon alarms Sens Hi Sensor High This alarm type includes the Hi Sens and Hi X Ducer alarms generated by Sensor Control Sens Lo Sensor Low This alarm type includes the Lo Sens and Low Avg Temp alarms generated by sensor control Sens Fail Sensor Fail This alarm type includes the IRLDS Fault Sensor Fail Sensor Short Sensor Open Xducer Short and Xducer Open alarms System Navigation 11 57 e Comp Pres Compressor Pressure Alarms This alarm type includes the Auto Reset Discharge Tripped Hi Suction and Oil Pressure alarms e Ref
379. u inerte iP DR P ree res 11 62 116 16 On Eine St tus iia quee OG a EE ERROR 11 62 145 17 S t Device Numbers ER DR RE EPOR PR 11 62 T4 8 15 Reset ida RR eo p n tbe ate d ED e 11 62 11 86 19 e rb Der OE ee rte E 11 63 11 6 20 I O Bo rd Setup eer E E cO E RE pave RARE OR Feo steven DUREE X E 11 63 1 86 21 Set Device Numbers en ed eee eret he ER gre e i esee Pi PP E ERR eti 11 63 74 68 20 ee eu e cone ER aie b ten deo etie ecol piena 11 64 11 8 23 Satellite Communication sisses duse eene t OH eerie e a Hs ebrei 11 64 11 8 24 Pressure Transducer E ESES OT EE O 11 64 12 SYSTEM LOGS AND 2 2 1 1 1 1 12 1 age d UR 12 1 72 11 Suction Pressure Log Interval n sio e be Oi te ee DR RE SR 12 1 12 1 2 Suction Group L Logs Co d ER EXER i re E ERE 12 1 12420 Anti Swe t Daily Logs iive ise e d deem eva ese bu e ete ae gere ee eve rd 12 1 12 1 4 Standard Circuit er D
380. ub The legs within a star may not exceed 100 feet No more than one star in a single segment is permitted Star configurations are not permitted on the COM B Host and COM C Remote Com munication networks Figure 4 6 shows correct and incor rect star configurations Star Configurations ORRECT STAR ONFIGURATION INCORRECT STAR CONFIGURATION F CORRECT STAR CONFIGURATION 26513049 Figure 4 6 Correct and Incorrect Star Configurations 4 10 Terminating Resistance Jumpers COM A COM B and COM D Only Each device that may be connected to a network seg ment has a set of terminating resistance jumpers one jump er for each wire lead These jumpers are always labeled JU1 JU2 and JU3 for COM A COM B jumpers are al ways labeled JU4 JU5 and JU6 COM D jumpers are al ways labeled JU9 JU10 and JU11 RMCC I amp O Manual The purpose of the jumpers is to indicate the two ends or termination points of the segment If a segment contains a star the hub of the star must be one of the segment termi nation points The other termination point in the star con figuration is the longest leg contained in the network If a device is at either end of a segment in a daisy chain configuration Figure 4 7 or if the device is the hub of a star configuration Figure 4 8 the terminating resistance jumpers must b
381. ue above which the controlled output will turn on The Cut OFF set point is the value below which the controlled out put will turn off There is a 1 dead band around each set point Cut On Cut Off Delay 0 9999 seconds The Cut On and Cut Off Delays are specified measure ments of time the RMCC must wait before activating or de activating the controlled output 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 11 5 5 Shut Off Schedule 1 8 SHUT OFF SCHEDULE SHUT OFF TIME FROM day T PREV INPUT OUTPUT CONTROL 1 Analog In Status Analog Out Status Digital Out Status Analog In Bypass Analog Out Bypass Digital Out Bypass SELECT NUMBER 11 5 8 Analog Input Module Bypass uw ANALOG INPUT MODULE 01 BYPASS Name INPUT 01 Enable NO Command HOFF Type NORMAL Time 10005 minutes Ov State NORMAL T PREV J NEXT gt 5 RMCC 1 amp 0 Manual A Scheduled Override bypasses normal sensor opera tions according to the schedule defined at the Shut Off Schedule 1 screen The defined override schedule is acti vated when assigned to selected sensors at the Shut Off Schedule 2 screen To define the schedule override enter the schedule start day and time in the FROM field and the schedule stop day and time in the UNTIL field Fixed timed and manual overrides
382. uit Description Page CIRCUIT CONTROL 12 00 Status Logs Graphs Anti Sweat Light Schedules Alarm Set Points Setup Alarm Set Points 11 23 6 fet togs ant apis 1 1 RMCC I amp O Manual System Navigation 11 19 11 4 2 Circuit Inputs CIRCUIT INPUTS 01 Temp Term Wash Switch Demand ENT Next fi Circuit The Circuit Inputs Status screen displays the current status information about selected inputs defined within the selected circuit Temp The current Circuit Temperature is displayed in the Temp field 11 4 3 Circuit Statistics ts E Er ege o CIRCUIT STATISTICS Su Mo Tu We 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Om Om Om Om Om Dfr Om Om Om Om Om Om th t Circuit 11 4 4 Circuit Set Points Standard Circuit Control Set Point screens are also ac cessed by selecting the Setup Command from the Standard Circuit Control Menu For descriptions of these screens 11 20 Circuit Defrost Control Term If the termination sensors were set up as analog temper ature sensors the current termination temperature reading is displayed in the Term field This field will display either OPN open or CLSD closed if the termination sensors were set up as digital sensors Wash Switch The current status of the Clean Switch Input is dis played in the Wash Switch field if the switch is defined at the Circuit Setpoints 2 screen see Section 11 4 19
383. uits are set up at the Circuit Setup screens If the Enter Defaults feature was activated at the first Circuit Setup screen see Section 11 4 16 Circuit Set up 1 the default settings for the defined case type should be displayed in all fields at the Circuit Setup 2 screen Defrost Type H ot Gas E lectric R ev Air T imed H The defrost type for the selected circuit is defined in the Defrost Type field and should be defined according to the case type Defrost Termination S tat T emp N one S The strategy the RMCC uses to terminate defrost within the selected standard circuit is defined in the Defrost Ter mination field Users may enter one of the following strat egies e S tat the will terminate defrost when it de tects a change of state from a dry contact non volt age contact closure 11 26 Circuit Defrost Control T emp the RMCC will terminate defrost when the temperature monitored by the defrost termination sensor surpasses the defined Termination Tempera ture set point This set point is defined at the Circuit Setpoints 1 screen see Section 11 4 18 Circuit Set Points 1 N one the will terminate defrost after the defined Defrost Duration has elapsed This duration is defined at the Circuit Setpoints 1 screen see Sec tion 11 4 18 Circuit Set Points 1 Defrost Termination Type N ormal P ulsed N The Termination Type is defined in the Defrost Termi nat
384. uspend Count t Tri d Reset Count ount Trippei Alarm Disabiers gt 5 gt Process Alarm Alarm Notice Occupied V CONTROL APPLICATIONS AN INPUT 1 AV OUTPUT 1 DV OUTPUT 1 AV INPUT 2 26512029 Figure 9 8 Relationship Between Set Points Cells and Modules The RMCC uses three kinds of modules Analog Out put Modules Analog Input Modules and Digital Output RMCC 1 amp 0 Manual Modules In general the cells grouped within the Analog Input and Digital Output Modules are those cells that are necessary to combine several analog or digital values into a single control value that may be used by physical devices or other modules The cells grouped within the Analog Output Module are those cells that control an output using a closed loop PID control method 9 9 1 1 Programming Cells and Modules In UltraSite set points for RMCC I O Modules are grouped together in their respective cells Modules there fore may be easily programmed cell by cell Up to 24 separate Analog Input Modules 16 separate Digital Output Modules and 8 Analog Output Modules may be configured within the RMCC Although the user may not change which cells fall within the two types of modules users may often customize a module s functions by disabling certain cells 9 9 1 2 Module Inputs and Outputs The inputs used to drive I O Modules ma
385. ut Module may be overridden using this screen Name 15 characters max DV OUTPUT module number If desired enter a name for the digital output module in the Name field Enable Yes No N The Enable field allows users to turn an individual Dig ital Output Module on or off without having to use Ultra Site Entering Yes in this field enables the current module entering No in this field turns off the module Command OFF ON NONE OFF The value to which the Command output will be over ridden is entered in the Command field 11 6 Main Status 12 00 4 1 0 Network 5 Host Network STATUS MENU 1 Main Status 2 Input Status 5 Variable Speed Status ELECT NUMBER RMCC I amp O Manual Type Fixed Timed Normal Normal In the Type field users may choose the type of over ride There are three override types to choose from Normal Choosing Normal in the Type field ends a fixed or timed override already in progress e Fixed The output will be overridden to the value chosen in the Value field until the user returns to this field and selects Normal e Timed The output will be overridden to the value chosen in the Value field for the amount of time en tered in the Time field see below This override may also be terminated by selecting Normal the Type field Time 0 68 minutes 5 minutes The value entered in the Time field will be the number of minutes a
386. valve relay for simultaneous con trol of two pulse valves Control of two valves simulta neously is intended for applications where two evaporators are being used to refrigerate a single space such as a walk in box cooler A single pulse case controller is not capable of controlling two separate cases The stepper valve case controller Figure 6 2 does not have the second valve re RMCC I amp O Manual lay and it has a jumper that is set based on whether the valve is bipolar or unipolar Network Address Rotary Dials Valve Relay Plug In Leak Sensor Input Fuse 250 V 5 A AGC 5 or Equivalent Frost Sensor Input Door Switch Sensor Input Valve Fuses 250 V AGC 2 or Equivalent Hand Held Terminal Jack RJ11 Input Cable Connector Termination Resistance Jumpers Fan and Light Fail Safe Jumpers JU7 JU8 Second Valve Output 24 VAC Optional 2nd Valve Relay Plug In Output Cable Connector Lights 12 VDC 170 Ma max Fan 12 VDC 170 Ma max Anti Sweat 12 VDC 170 Ma max Defrost 12 VDC 170 Ma max Pulse Valve 1 24 VAC 26502018 Network Address Rotary Dials Fuse 250 V 5 A AGC 5 or Equivalent Leak Sensor Input Frost Sensor Input Door Switch Sensor Input Hand Held Terminal Jack RJ11 Input Cable Connector Termination Resistance Jumpers Fan and Light Fail Safe Jumpers JU7 JU8
387. ve opening percentage Case dF the case temperature in degrees Fahrenheit 15 4 Hand Held Terminal Screens 026 1102 Rev 4 08 12 99 Coil 1 In the coil 1 in temperature Offset the coil 1 in temp sensor offset This may be changed with the HHT Coil 1 Out the coil 1 out temperature Offset the coil 1 out temp sensor offset This may be changed with the HHT Defr When in defrost this field shows the number of minutes and seconds the circuit has been in defrost This number will be equal to the fail safe time when not in defrost Failsafe the maximum number of minutes and seconds defrost mode will remain active Term the termination temperature sensor reading Setpt the termination temperature set point Defr 1 Defr 4 the first four scheduled defrost times Defr 5 Defr 6 the fifth and sixth scheduled defrost times Drip When in drain mode this field shows the number of minutes and seconds the circuit has been draining This number will be equal to the set time when not in drip mode Set Time the amount of time moisture on the coil is allowed to drain after defrost Humidity the humidity sensor reading Aswt the percentage at which the anti sweat heaters are operating Max the humidity above which the anti sweat heater will remain on at all times Min the humidity below which the anti sweat heater will remain off at all times Lights the current status of the case lights Pressing RIGHT fol
388. weat set points Type Min Description Max Fixed 6seconds None Number of seconds the anti sweat algorithm divides between time on and time off High anti sweat Set point 60 0 Humidity level when heaters will be 100 of six seconds set point 10096 Period Low anti sweat set point Table 8 9 Anti Sweat Control Parameters 8 7 The fan control algorithm controls operation of the fan output The fans will be on while in normal operation liq uid control or suction control When in defrost mode the fan status may be programmed to be either ON or OFF If the fan status is programmed OFF during defrost a coil out delay may be specified that forces the fan to continue to run until the coil outlet temperature exceeds the delay set point See Section 8 4 Defrost Control for more information For walk in box control the fan will turn off when the door switch is activated Fan Control 8 8 Light Control The case controller controls the light output as shown below The light control set point is shown in Table 8 10 1 The lights default to on 2 Forwalk in box control when the door switch input is activated door open the lights will turn on The lights turn off when the switch is deactivated RMCC I amp O Manual Humidity level when heaters will be on 10 of six seconds 10096 Name Type Default Description Set point Active hi Defines the active on level for the lights active hi or a
389. which the anti sweat heaters are operating Max the humidity above which the anti sweat heater will remain on at all times Min the humidity below which the anti sweat heater will remain off at all times Lights the current status of the case lights Pressing RIGHT followed by one of the com mands below allows users to bypass the case lights 1 Auto Pressing 1 will return the case lights to automatic operation 2 Turn Off Pressing 2 will bypass the case lights off 3 Turn On Pressing 3 will bypass the case lights on Supht SP the current superheat set point This value may be changed using the HHT Sens 3 Sens the valve s sensitivity value This may be changed using the HHT See Section 5 3 1 3 RcvyLevel Valve Control for a complete definition of sensitivity see RcvyLevel This number is equal to the recovery valve percentage see Section 11 4 29 CCB Set Point Screen 1 Liquid Pulse and Stepper Only divided by 10 This may be changed using the HHT MaxRcvy Sec the maximum number of seconds the CCB will operate in recovery mode This number may be changed using the HHT Disch Air the current discharge air temperature reading Offset the discharge air temperature sensor offset This may be changed with the HHT Ret Air the current return air temperature reading Offset the return air temperature sensor offset This may be changed with the HHT Status the operational status of the ref
390. y attempt to clear fan proof failures When a fan proof is closed the RMCC attempts to clear it by turning the fan on If the proof is successfully cleared after this attempt the fan shuts off and condenser control reverts to normal If the 11 3 6 Condenser Two Speed Fan Setup The following screens are accessible only if the Con denser Fan s Type field is set to Two Speed Single and variable speed setup screens are described in the Condens er Two Speed Fan Setup and the Condenser Variable Speed Fan Setup sections on Section 11 3 5 Condenser Single Speed Setup Screens and Section 11 3 7 Variable Speed Setup Screens respectively 11 3 6 1 Two Speed Setup Screen 1 62 C2 C4 CONDENSER 2 SPEED FAN SETUP Fan High Output 2Spd Relay 2 Fan Low Output 125 Relay 1 Fan Off Output Relays Start Speed 0 f f T PREV gt SET DATA O MENU Fan High Output 2 2Spd Relay 2 1 2Spd Relay 1 0 Both Relays N o Relays 2 The relay or relays chosen in the Fan High Output field are closed when the RMCC calls for high speed output on the condenser fans There are four options e 2 Spd Relay I Two speed relay 1 will be closed during high speed operation e 2Spd Relay 2 default Two speed relay 2 will be closed during high speed operation e Both Relays Both two speed relay 1 and 2 will be active during high speed operation
391. y come from external I O board inputs and outputs other I O Module outputs or a number of RMCC internal values including pressure control sensor control anti sweat control case control and circuit control inputs Most module inputs can also be set up as constant analog or digital values Digital inputs and outputs of I O modules may be any of three states OFF ON or NONE The NONE state in most respects is interpreted to be the same as OFF except NONE represents don t care rather than off In certain input combining strategies a NONE input will be ignored whereas an OFF input will be read as an input value An example of this is the Analog Input Module s First strategy which passes the first of four defined in puts along to a module s output If Input 1 of a module is NONE the First strategy will skip Input 1 and use the val ue of Input 2 If Input 1 is zero or OFF the First strategy would use the value of Input 1 Some digital I O outputs may also be configured with user specified definitions of ON and OFF For example in stead of having an output be either ON or OFF a user may configure the output be ON NONE NONE OFF or even OFF ON 9 9 2 RMCC I O Module Descriptions 9 9 2 1 Analog Input Module General Description The primary purpose of the Analog Input Module is to combine up to four analog inputs from either analog sen sors or Analog Output Modules into a single analog output value T

026-1102 - Emerson Climate Technologies

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents